State of Jharkhand - Act
Bihar Education Code, 1961
JHARKHAND
India
India
Bihar Education Code, 1961
Rule BIHAR-EDUCATION-CODE-1961 of 1961
- Published on 29 January 1915
- Commenced on 29 January 1915
- [This is the version of this document from 29 January 1915.]
- [Note: The original publication document is not available and this content could not be verified.]
Chapter I
Introduction
Section IDefinitions and Classifications1. Definitions.
- Throughout this Code, unless it is stated on the contrary -2. Public and private management.
- Institutions under the direct management of Government or a public statutory body, such as a District Board, Municipal Corporation, a municipality, or a corporate body are said to be under public management. Institutions under the management of private persons or associations are said to be under private management.3. Aided and unaided Institutions.
- Recognised institutions under private management are classified as aided or unaided, according as they do or do not receive aid from public funds, and include subsidised schools.4. Classification of Educational Institutions.
- This Code does not deal with the Medical Colleges, Government Ayurvedic and Tibbi Colleges that are under the control of either the Universities or the Health Department, or with the Veterinary College and the Agriculture College that are under the control of the Agriculture and Animal Husbandry Department, or with the Engineering College or with technical or industrial schools, that are under the control of the Universities, the Department of Industries or the Agriculture and Animal Husbandry Department, or with the Reformatory school or Anglo-Indian schools which have separate Codes of their own.Note. - As an exception to the above, commercial schools and lace schools are under the control of the Department, as are those schools attached to factories or mines, in which the instruction given is of a literary kind.5. Different kinds of colleges.
- Colleges are divided into the following kinds :-6. Different kinds of schools.
- Schools are divided into two kinds:-7. Functions of Different Institutions.
- An Institute of Research and/or Post-Graduate studies conducts research in specific branches of learning and may provide Post-Graduate teaching in these subjects.A College for general education provides instruction in the University courses in Arts or Science.A first grade College provides instruction up to the standard of a University degree. A Law College is an institution preparing students for the University Examinations in Law.A Training College, is an institution for the professional training of teachers in secondary schools and of inspecting officers. It prepares students for the Diploma in Education and may prepare them for the degree of Master of Education.A Janta College, is an institution which imparts training for diploma in Social Education.A Commerce College is an institution preparing students for University Examination in Accountancy and Banking.College of Health and Physical Education is an institution for the professional training of teachers and students in physical culture and prepares students for (i) the Diploma in Physical Education, and (ii) the Certificate in Physical Education.A Higher Secondary School is a recognised school or department of recognised school imparting instruction in higher secondary education.A Multipurpose School is a higher secondary school with an additional feature providing instruction in vocational subject groups.A High School is a recognised school providing instruction upto the standard of the secondary school examination of the Bihar School Examination Board.Netarhat School is a Higher Secondary Multipurpose State Residential School with special staff and equipments situated at Netarhat. Admission to it is based on a competitive examination and test held on State level, provision existing for reserved seats for pupils of the Scheduled Castes and Tribes and Backward Classes. Fees are charged according to parents' income per schedule.A Sarvodaya Multipurpose School (Post Basic high school) is a recognised Higher Secondary School, imparting a four years' diversified course after the eight years' Senior Basic Course. It imparts both general education and proficiency in occupational subjects with emphasis on appropriate environments and productive activity.A Senior Basic School is a school imparting a seven or eight years' integrated course of general education and in understanding of the environments. It aims at an all round development of the personality of the pupils.A Middle School is a school providing instruction in the integrated course for seven or eight years.A Junior Basic School provides education in the first five years of the integrated course of a Senior Basic Middle School.An Upper Primary School provides instruction up to Class V.A Lower Primary School provides instruction up to Class III.A Teachers' Training School is an institution for the professional training of teachers.An Art School is a school which provides instruction in drawing sculpture, painting and similar subjects.A Commercial School provides instruction to students to qualify them for a career in business.An Agricultural School provides instruction in agriculture, both practical and theoretical.A Pardanashin School is a school where one of the teachers (or more) or pupils observe strict pardah and arrangements are made to teach girls in strict pardah.Institution of Oriental Learning. - A College for traditional learning provides instruction in one of the higher branches of Sanskrit, Arabic or Persian learning.Sanskrit Education8. Educational Policy of the State Government.
- The policy to which the educational system of the State of Bihar conforms has arisen out of the fundamental rights and the directive principles of State policy laid down in the Constitution of India and the policies and programmes formulated from time to time in the development plans of the country and in the various schemes launched by the State Government or jointly by the State Government and the Government of India. The State Government accepts as its objective the providing of universal free and compulsory education for all children until they complete the age of 14 years and, without directly managing schools, it provides the initiative and assistance required for the fulfilment of this objective. It encourages local enterprise wherever it is forthcoming, but takes care to guide the expansion on the basis of well thought out plans and needs of different regions. Government also shares the responsibility of efficient and regular distribution, of salaries to teachers and retains general control, by means of efficient inspection, over all recognised institutions. In the sphere of high school and collegiate education, Government relies largely upon private enterprise and initiative but endeavours to promote expansion and improvement according to the needs of the general development of the society. Government recognises the importance and urgency of social education among the adult population of the State and with the added advantage of private enterprise like libraries and cultural centres, seeks to further this programme. Government's policy in the matter of content and methods of school education is guided by the principle that all education should be linked with the environment of the child, that productive activities should play an important part in education and that at a certain stage the different aptitudes and requirements of the pupils should be taken into account in determining their courses of studies. In other words the Basic system of education in the first eight years of schooling and provision of diversified courses of studies at the high school stage are two main principles recognised by the State Government for the content and method of school education.9. Religious Neutrality.
- No religious instruction shall be provided in any educational institution wholly maintained out of the State Funds.Nothing as noted above shall apply to an educational institution which is administered by the State but has been established under any endowment or trust which requires that religious instruction shall be imparted in such institution.No person attending any educational institution recognised by the State or receiving aid out of State funds shall be required to take part in any religious instruction that may be imparted in such institution or to attend any religious worship that may be conducted in such institution or on any premises attached thereto unless such person, or, if such person is a minor, his guardian has given his consent thereto.(Article 28 of the Constitution of India, 1950).Grants from public funds are given on the principles of strict religious neutrality and no preference is shown to any school on the ground that any particular religious doctrines are taught or are not taught therein.(Government notification No. 194-E., dated the 29th January, 1915, Section IV., B. 3.).10. Medium of Instruction.
- The policy with regard to the medium of instruction shall be as follows;-2. The new Directorate of Social and Youth Welfare will deal with the subjects mentioned below.-
3. A statement is appended hereto (Annexure 1) giving the names of the institutions run and the posts sanctioned by the State Government, under the aforesaid subjects, which will hence onward be required to be dealt by the new Directorate of Social and Youth Welfare.
4. The matters concerning the State Social Welfare Board and the Central Social Welfare Board are dealt with at present by the Community Development Department. The Secretary to Government, Community Development Department, acts at present as the Treasurer of the State Social Welfare Board. Government have been pleased to decide that, after the Directorate of Social and Youth Welfare has been set up, the matters concerning the State Social Welfare Board and the Central Social Welfare Board will be dealt by that Directorate and the Director of Social and Youth Welfare will thereafter act as the Treasurer of the State Social Welfare Board.
5. The Government have been pleased to create, with immediate effect the following posts for the Directorate of Social and Youth Welfare, for the period of the Third Five year Plan (i.e., up to 28th February 1966)-
*(1) Director of Social and Youth Welfare.*(2) Deputy Director of Social and Youth Welfare (to be ordinarily filled up by a lady officer).*(3) Assistant Director of Social and Youth Welfare.* Pay, Special Pay, allowance etc. for the posts of Director, Dy. Director and Assistant Director being published. Readers may please refer to new Pay Scales.6. The Government have also been pleased to decide that, with effect from the date the posts of the Director, Deputy Director and Assistant Director of Social and Youth Welfare are filled up, the temporary posts of the Joint Director of Education (Social) and the Assistant Director of Education (Youth), in the Directorate of Public Instruction shall cease and that the permanent post of Secretary, Basic Education Board, in Class I of the Bihar Educational Service shall be held in abeyance.
7. The headquarters of the Directorate of Social and Youth Welfare will be located at Patna in the New Secretariat building.
8. The following ministerial and grade IV posts have been sanctioned for the period of Third Five Year Plan for the office at the headquarters of the Directorate of Social and Youth Welfare-
†(1) One Accountant.9. The Director of Social and Youth Welfare will have the powers and status of a Head of Department, within the meaning of Rule 21 of the Bihar Service Code, having jurisdiction over the whole of the State.
10. The Director of Social and Youth Welfare will be the Drawing and Disbursing Officer for the pay and allowances of the staff and the contingency of the establishment of the office of the Directorate at its headquarters and will be the Controlling Officer, under Rule 57 of the Bihar Travelling Allowance Rules, for the purpose of the travelling allowance of his staff, both gazetted and non-gazetted, at the headquarters. His own travelling allowance bill will require countersignature of the Secretary to Government, Education Department.
11. A statement (Annexure II) is appended hereto, on the basis of Appendix 8(A) of the Bihar Treasury Code, Volume II, giving a revised list of Drawing and Disbursing Officers, in the changed set-up in respect of pay allowances, contingencies of different offices and staff transferred to the Directorate of Social and Youth Welfare.
12. The provisions made in the Plan and Non-Plan Budgets of Education Department, with respect to the pay of establishment and other charges in regard to the subjects required now to be dealt by the new Directorate, will, after the new Directorate has been set-up, be deemed to have been transferred from the control of the Directorate of Social and Youth Welfare and in modification of previous orders of Government on the subjects, the latter will also be a Controlling Officer in respect of expenditure from the budget heads concerned the details of which appear in the statement embodied in Annexure III. The arrangement will continue till such time that separate budget head is opened with the concurrence of Accountant-General, Bihar regard to subjects to be dealt by the new Directorate and the Director of Social and Youth Welfare is declared as the Controlling Officer in respect thereof. Till then the cost in account of pay, allowances etc., of the officers and staff at the headquarters of the Directorate of Social and Youth Welfare, will be met from the appropriate unit under the budget head "28-Education - E - General - Direction".
13. It will appear from the above that the posts required for the headquarters the Directorate of Social and Youth Welfare, other than those of the Accountant and cashier, have been created either by transfer thereto from the Directorate of Public Instruction or by keeping in abeyance an equivalent post in that Directorate. The Additional cost on the setting up of the new Directorate will thus be only Rs. 21,580 recurring and Rs. 20,000 non-recurring, as per details given in the statement appended thereto (Annexure IV.) To enable immediate expenditure in this regard being met, a sum of Rs. 35,000 (Rs. 15,000 recurring and Rs. 20,000 nonrecurring) has been taken from the State Contingency Fund sanctioned in Finance Department memo. no. 1024 dated the 11th August 1962. Necessary provision in this regard will be made in the Supplementary Statement of Expenditure for 1962-63. Until such time that a separate budget head in opened, the cost in this regard will be debitable to the appropriate unit under the head "28-Education - E - General - Direction" in current year's budget.
14. Government have been pleased to decide that, on the transfer thereof to the new Directorate of Social and Youth Welfare, the posts of Divisional Social Education Organisers, District Social Education Organiser and Lady Social Education Organisers, will be re-designated as Regional Social and Youth Welfare Officers. District Social and Youth Welfare Officers and Lady Social Welfare Organisers respectively. In regard to the posts of Male Social Education Organisers in the C.D. Blocks, Government have been pleased to decide that these should be abolished according as the present incumbents thereto are absorbed in suitable posts in Education and Gram Panchayat Departments, and the work performed at present by these Social Education Organisers, distributed between the Sub-Inspectors of Schools (to be designated hereafter as Block Education Extension Officers) and the Gram Panchayat Supervisors in such a manner that the former are entrusted with the work relating only to the organisation and inspection of Social Education Centres and Public Libraries and the remaining work is entrusted to the latter. It has further been decided that, in regard to the work so entrusted to them the Sub-Inspectors of Schools (to be designated hereafter as Block Education Extension Officers) and the Gram Panchayat Supervisors will be responsible to their respective District Social and Youth Welfare Officers.
15. It has been decided that, until the existing Male Social Education Organisers have been absorbed in other posts, they will continue to work as such. With the setting up of the Directorate, their services will also be transferred hereto and will be at its disposal for the remaining period to work as Social Education Organisers.
Annexure IList of offices and institutions, alongwith the sanctioned staff thereof transferred from the Directorate of Public Instruction, Bihar, to the Directorate of Social and Youth Welfare, Bihar.1. Social Education
Designation of the post[Pay Scale] [For Pay Scales of above posts, see New Pay Scales.]1. Office of the Social Education Board-
2. Janta Colleges (one each at Turki, Muzaffarpur Rambagh, Patna, and Nagarpara, Bhagalpur)-
3. Social Workers' Training Institutes (One for Women at Basuadih, Deoghar and the other for men at Chiri, Ranchi)-
4. Office of the Audio-Visual Officer-
5. Field Staff-
A. Office of the Divisional Social Education Organisers(Now designated as Regional Social and Youth Welfare Officer).1. Superintendent of Libraries and his Office-
2. Bihar State Central Library (Sinha Library, Sinha Library Road, Post Box 62, Patna-1).
3. District State Libraries-
4. Sub-divisional Library-
5. Mobile Libraries-
6. Children's Libraries-
7. Staff sanctioned for the Khuda Bux Oriental Public Library-
8. Government Urdu Library, Patna-
1. State Board of Cultural Education-
2. Cultural Parties-
A. Modmandalies.3. Chhow Dance Centre at Seraikella, Singhbhum-
4. Patna School of Arts and Crafts-
1. Youth Hostels (22 Youth Hostels established so far)-
2. Vigyan Mandirs-
No State Government Staff at present.V. Sports1. State Sports Stadium at Patna-
VI. After Care Programme for Men and Women.2. State after care home for men, Muzaffarpur-
3. District Shelter-cum-Reception Centres-
(One for men at Purnea and two for women at Gaya and Chapra)-| (i) | Headmaster | 240/4 |
| (ii) | Technical Superintendent | 82 |
| (iii) | Technical Superintendent | 87/10 |
| (iv) | Assistant Teacher and Clerk | 84/13 |
| (v) | Assistant Teacher | 72 |
| (vi) | Music Teacher | 69 |
| (vii) | Hindi Reader | 14 |
| (viii) | Peon | 48/8 |
| (ix) | Bearers | 44 |
| (x) | Servants | 44 |
| (xi) | Cook | 41/8 |
| (xii) | Sweeper | 6 |
1. Functions. - The Director, Social and Youth Welfare, Bihar (hereinafter called the Director), is the head of the Department. He is the Controlling Officer and his functions are mainly three-fold : (i) Advisory, (ii) Inspecting, and (iii) Administrative.
2. Relations of the Director with the Government. - The Director is immediately responsible to Government. He is competent to dispose of all questions except those detailed below.
3. Cases requiring reference to Government. - The order of the Government required for-
4. Cases disposed of by the Director. - The Director, Social and Youth Welfare Bihar shall be competent to dispose of cases not included in the above clauses except when powers have been delegated to an officer subordinate to him.
Statement I[Functions, Duties and Powers of the Regional Social and Youth Welfare Officers.] [Delegated vide Letter No. SW/S-6024/63-E-150 dated 23.2.1964.]FunctionsThe Regional Social and Youth Welfare Officer is in general charge of Social and Youth Welfare including women and children programme at the divisional level subject the general control of the Director, Social and Youth Welfare, Bihar. His broad functions will be as follows-11. Controlling Officers.
- The Director of Public Instruction (hereinafter called the Director) is the head of the Department of Education and is the Chief Educational Adviser to the State Government. He is assisted at the State headquarters by-1. At State Level. -
2. At Divisional Level.-
A Regional Deputy Director of Education in each of the four divisions of the State; Patna, Bhagalpur, Tirhut and Chotanagpur.All other officers of the Directorate or subordinate officers are subordinate to one or other of these officers and should address the Director only through the officer to whom they are subordinate.12. Inspecting agency for Girls' Education.
- The inspection, supervision and organisation of girls' education throughout the State are carried through the agency of the Inspectress of Schools, Bihar. There are 17 District Inspectresses of Schools, one in each district who are charged with the immediate inspection and supervision of girls' schools in their respective districts. In addition, there are Deputy Inspectresses of Schools for every outlying subdivision (excluding the Sadar Subdivision) who are responsible for the inspection and supervision of girls' middle and primary schools in their respective subdivisions.Subordinate Inspecting Officers and supervisory staff of Divisional, District and sub-divisional levels.13.
The following officers are posted at Divisional, District, Sub-divisional and Anchal headquarters:-A. At Divisional Level.-14. Inspecting functions of the Director.
- The Director is entitled to inspect recognised public Institutions in the State that are under the control of the Department.15. Administrative functions of the Director.
- The administration and control of Government Teachers' Training Colleges, Government College of Health and Physical Education, Institute of Post-Graduate Studies and Research in Arabic and Persian learning rest with the Director subject to the overall control of Government.16. Relation of the Director with Government.
- The Director is immediately responsible to Government. He is competent to dispose of all questions except those detailed in the succeeding article.17. Cases requiring reference to Government.
- The orders of Government are required for-18. Cases disposed of by the Director.
- Cases not included in the preceding articles are disposed of by the Director except when power has been delegated to an officer subordinate to him.The following articles indicate the powers so delegated:-B. Powers delegated to officers immediately subordinate to the director.19. Director of Educational and Vocational Guidance Bureau.
- Subject to the control of the Director of Public Instruction, the Director of Educational and Vocational Guidance Bureau is responsible for working out plans for the expansion of educational and vocational guidance services, and for the organisation of training courses for school counsellors, teacher counsellors and career masters. He is also required to assist educational institutions in organising information centres and guidance services.20. Director, Dr A. N. Sinha Institute of Social Studies.
- The Director is the academic and executive head of the Institute which is managed and controlled by the State Government with the assistance of (i) General Council, (ii) Executive Committee, and (iii) Advisory Board. He is assisted by two Assistant Directors and an Administrative Officer and is responsible for day to day administration of the Institute.21. Director, Institute of Post Graduate Studies and Research in Arabic and Persian Learning.
- The Director of the Institute is the academic and executive head of the Institute subject to the directions given to him from time to time by the Director of Public Instruction, Bihar and the General Council. He shall have the power to admit students subject to such general policy as may be indicated or laid down by the Government. He shall be the ex-officio Secretary of the General Council and may when present, preside over the meetings of the Publication Committee. He shall have disciplinary control over his subordinates and shall draw and countersign bills of his office establishment and subordinate officers, grant leave to the subordinate officers, indent forms and various articles, incur contingent expenditure and prepare budget. He shall have power to appoint menials under his control, to grant them leave and to punish, suspend, degrade or dismiss them.22. Director, Nava Nalanda Mahavihar, Nalanda.
23. Director, Research Institute of Prakirt, Jainology and Ahimsa, Vaishali.
- The Director shall be a whole-time officer of the Institute. He shall be the academic and executive head of the Institute subject to the directions given to him from time to time by the Government, the Director of Public Instruction Bihar and the General Council. He will supervise the office and the various branches of work in the Institute. He will be responsible for admitting students on such advice of the members of the staff as he may like to take and subject to such general policy as may be indicated or laid down by the Government. He shall also exercise power and perform duties as follows24. Director Mithila Institute of Post-Graduate Studies and Research in Sanskrit Learning.
- The Director will be academic and executive head of the Institute subject to the direction given to him from time to time by the Government and the General Council:-25. Director, Rashtra Bhasha Parishad.
- The Director of the Parishad shall be a paid Government servant appointed by Bihar Government and shall have to perform and exercise such duties and powers as are entrusted and delegated to him by Government. Ordinarily, he shall have the same administrative and financial duties and powers as performed and exercised by the Regional Deputy Director of Education.26. Director, Kashi Prasad Jayaswal Research Institute.
- The Director will be the academic and executive head of the Institute subject to the directions given to him by the Government or the General Council. He will have the power-27. Assistant Director of Education (Sanskrit).
- The Assistant Director of Education (Sanskrit) is the ex-officio Secretary of the Board1 of Sanskrit Education. He is also required to inspect Sanskrit tols, Sanskrit high schools and to advise the Director on all questions affecting Sanskrit education. He is required to be on tour outside his headquarters for not less than 120 days in each official year. He is the Controlling Officer for Government Sanskrit high schools. He exercises power similar to those exercised by the District Education Officer in respect of his office. He is empowered, to publish in the Gazette the annual list of recognised Sanskrit tols and Vidyalayas under his control.28. Assistant Director of Education (Islamic).
- The Assistant Director of Education (Islamic) is required to inspect Madrasas and to advise the Director of Public Instruction, Bihar on all questions affecting education in Persian and Arabic. He is required to be on tour outside his headquarters for not less than 150 days in each official year. He is empowered to publish in the Gazette the annual list of recognised Madrasas under his control. He is empowered to appoint menials under his control, to grant them leave, and to punish, suspend, degrade or dismiss them.29. [ Administrator, Vaishali Rural Institute, Turki. [Terminated vide G.O. No. III/B-1-60/63-2335, dated 15.12.1965.]
- The Administrator is the officer in the over-all charge of educational development of Turki-cum-Vaishali Development Area. The Deputy Superintendent and Local Organisers assist the Administrator in the educational development of Turki-cum-Vaishali Area.]30. Rural Institute for Higher Studies, Birauli.
-Memorandum of Association of the Rural Institute (Birauli) SocietyIn the matter of the Societies Registration Act (Act XXI of 1860) being an Act for the registration of Literary, Scientific and Charitable Societies.AndIn the Matter of the Rural Institute (Birauli) Society hereinafter referred to as the "Society".Memorandum of Association.1. The name of the Society is the "Rural Institute (Birauli) Society".
2. The Registered Office of the Society shall be situated at Birauli, in the district of Darbhanga (Bihar) in such premises as the Governing Body may decide from time to time.
3. The objects for which the Society is established are :-
4.
5. (a) No property of the Society, shall be disposed of in any manner whatsoever without the previous approval of the Government of Bihar.
6. The Society shall employ all members of the teaching staff and other servants of the Government of Bihar, who immediately before the registration of the Society, were employed in the Institute, on such terms and conditions' as may be decided by the State Government.
7. (a) On the registration of the Society, the Institute and attached hostels, and other buildings, forming part of the Institute and the hostels together with all lands appurtenant thereto and articles of furniture, libraries, books, laboratories, stores, instruments, apparatus, appliances and equipments, shall be deemed to have been transferred to the maintenance and to control of the Society.
8. (a) The Government of Bihar may, at any time, appoint one, or more persons to review the work and progress of the Society, or the Institute and to hold an enquiry into the affairs thereof and to report thereon, in such manner as the Government of Bihar may stipulate. Upon the receipt of such report, the Government of Bihar may, in consultation with the Government of India, take such action and issue such directions as they may consider necessary and the Society shall be bound to comply with such directions.
9. In case the Government of Bihar, is satisfied that the Society, or the Institute, is not functioning properly, the Government of Bihar shall have the power to take over the administration and assets of the Institute, with the prior approval of the Government of India.
10. If in winding up, or dissolution of the Society, there shall remain, after the satisfaction of all its debts and liabilities, any property whatsoever, the same shall not be distributed among the members of the Society, or any of them but shall be dealt with in accordance with the decisions of the Government of India and the Government of Bihar.
11. The Society shall be the Governing Body of the Institute.
12. The names and addresses and occupations of the first members of the Society, to whom, by rules and regulations of the Society, the management of its affairs is entrusted, are :-
| SI. No. | Names | Addresses | Status. |
| 1. | Shri S. N. Sinha | Education Minister, Bihar, Patna. | Chairman. |
| 2. | Shri S. V. Sohoni | Development Commissioner, Bihar, Patna. | Member. |
| 3. | Shri T. S. Bali | Commissioner, Tirhut Division, Muzaffarpur. | Member. |
| 4. | Shri H. Prasad. | Secretary to Government, Finance Department, Bihar, Patna. | Member. |
| 5. | Shri Karam Singh | Secretary to Government, Agriculture Department, Bihar,Patna. | Member. |
| 6. | Shri Mahboob Alam | Secretary to Government, Education Department, Bihar, Patna. | Member. |
| 7. | Shri Ram Tahal Singh | Secretary to Government, Industries Department, Bihar, Patna. | Member. |
| 8. | Shri Ram Saran Upadhaya. | Retired Deputy Director of Education, At & P. O. Nausavia-Samastipur (Darbhanga) | Member. |
| 9. | Dr. Ram Prakash | Village Bathhua, P.O. Dighra, Sharma (Darbhanga) | Member. |
| 10. | Shri Kedar Pd. Singh | Agriculturist Muktapur, Darbhanga | Member. |
| 11. | Shri H. N. Mishra | Director, Rural Institute for Higher Studies, Birauli | Secretary. |
13. A copy of the Rules of the Society, certified to be a correct copy of three members of the Governing Body, is filed alongwith the Memorandum of Association.
14. We, the several persons whose names and addresses are given below, having associated ourselves for the purposes described in this Memorandum of Association, do hereby subscribe our names to this Memorandum of Association and set out several respective hands hereunto and form ourselves into a society under Act XXI of 1860.
| SI. No. | Name, address and occupation of members. | Signature of members. | Name, address and occupation of witnesses. | Signature of witnesses. |
| 1. | Shri S. V. Sohoni, Development Commissioner, Patna.Education. | M.P.N. Sharma, Deputy Secretary, Education. | ||
| 2. | Shri J. S. Bali, Commissioner, Tirhut Division, Muzaffarpur. | |||
| 3. | Shri H. Prasad, Secretary, Finance Department, Bihar, Patna. | |||
| 4. | Shri Karam Singh, Secretary to Government Agriculture Deptt.,Bihar, Patna. | |||
| 5. | Shri Mahboob Alam, Secretary to Government, Education Deptt,Bihar, Patna. | |||
| 6. | Shri Ram Tahal Singh, Secretary to Government, IndustriesDepartment, Bihar, Patna. | |||
| 7. | Shri Ram Saran Upadhaya, Retired Deputy Director ofEducation, P. O. & Vill, Nausa via Samastipur (Darbhanga).Present Address:-Dr. S. N. Upadhaya, Chirayatar, Patna. | |||
| 8. | Dr. Ram Prakash Sharma Vill Bathhua, P.O. Dighra,(Darbhanga). | |||
| 9. | Shri Kedar Pd Singh, Agriculturist, Muktapur (Darbhanga). | |||
| 10. | Shri J. N. Mishra, Director, Rural Education for HigherStudies, Birauli (Darbhanga). |
31. Superintendent of Libraries, Bihar.
- Subject to the control of the Director, the Superintendent of Libraries is directly responsible for the administration of all kinds of libraries in the State including the State Central Library of which he is the ex-officio Chief Librarian. He is competent to make appointments to the posts of librarians in the State Libraries, District Central Libraries, and circulating libraries in the State. The Superintendent of Libraries will exercise all powers ordinarily exercised by an appointing authority in respect of the libraries.(G.O. no. 3672, dated 16th November, 1956.)32. Superintendent, State After-Care-Homes.
- The Superintendent, State After-Care-Homes enjoys full powers-33. State After Care Homes at Patna and Muzaffarpur.
- The State After Care Home, for women at Patna and the State After Care Home for men at Muzaffarpur are under the administrative control of the Inspectress of Schools, Bihar, Patna and the Regional Deputy Director of Education, Tirhut Division, Muzaffarpur.34. Education Literature Officer.
- The Education Literature Officer is responsible for the supervision and preparation of books to be prescribed as text-books, books for the Basic Education Board and books for the Social (Adult) Education Board. He is required to work under the instructions of the different Boards for the books concerning those Boards and prepare such general educational literature and pamphlets as are required from time to time.35. Education Publication Officer.
- The arrangement for the printing and publication of the manuscripts prepared by the Educational Literature Officer under instructions from the various Boards is the responsibility of the Educational Publication Officer. He is required to keep himself in touch with various Presses in Patna and outside, make arrangements for the adequate supply of paper and materials, settle terms with the presses with the approval of the Chairman, Text-Book and Education Literature Committee, arrange for the machinery for the sale and, in general, look after the business side of the publication of all educational books. He is not competent to place orders for the supply of papers, other materials and for the printing of the books except with the explicit order of the Chairman, Text-Book and Education Literature Committee.36. Principal, Government School of Arts and Crafts, Patna.
- The Principal, Government School of Arts and Crafts, Patna is the academic and executive head of the institution and is responsible for the day-to-day administration of the institution.37. Principal, Government College of Health and Physical Education.
- The Principal is the academic and executive head of the institution. He is responsible for the good and efficient organisation and administration of the college and for the fulfilment of its aims and objectives. He is also the ex-officio Secretary of the Bihar Physical Education Board.38. Principal, Netarhat Residential School.
- The Principal is the academic and executive head of the school. He is responsible for the good and efficient organisation and administration of the school and for the fulfilment of its aims and objectives. He is also the Controlling Officer of the Netarhat Basic School but the inspecting officer of the Department will continue to be responsible for its inspection. He is empowered.-39. Admission.
- Admission to Netarhat Residential School is based on a competitive examination held on State basis with reserve seats for the Scheduled Castes, Scheduled Tribes and Backward classes.40. Candidates Eligible.
- All boys who are not less than 10 or more than 12 years of age on the 1st August, and who are prosecuting their studies in any type of school or even privately at home are eligible to take the test, provided their parents are permanent residents of Bihar.41. Application.
- All boys seeking admission into the school are required to submit their applications in the prescribed form on such date, as may be fixed by the Deputy Inspector of Schools of the area concerned accompanied with an examination fee of Rs. 2 only. In case of Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes, the rate of examination fee is only Re. 1.42. Preliminary written text.
- The preliminary written text will be held in the following papers-| Marks. | |||
| (a) | Language and Literature (Urdu, Hindi, Bengali and Oriya; anyone may be offered). | 100 | |
| (b) | Mathematics | 100 | |
| (c) | Everyday Science.. .. | 100 | |
| (d) | Social Studies .. | 100 | |
| Total | 400 |
43. Descriptive Rolls.
- The Deputy Inspectors of Schools shall submit in the duplicate, the descriptive rolls bound in register form of all candidates to the Registrar of Examinations, Bihar.44. Examination.
- The competitive examination for admission will be conducted by the Principal, Netarhat School and the Registrar of Examinations, Bihar will assist him in circulating the information about the examination through the departmental agencies among all the Elementary schools and High schools in the State. The Principal will be responsible for appointing paper setters, head-examiners, and co-examiners and for publishing the examination and the examination results.45. First Selection of Candidates.
- The number of candidates to be selected as the result of the test shall not ordinarily be less than four times of the number of vacancies available.46. Second Test.
- The candidates selected at the preliminary test will be further tested at the Divisional headquarters by the Directorate of Educational and Vocational Guidance, Bihar. These very candidates will at the same place and about the same time appear before an Interview Board consisting of the Principal, Netarhat School as Chairman and the Counsellor and a senior psychologist nominated by the Government. This test will be designed to ascertain the intelligence and potentiality of the candidates.47. Final Selection.
- The final selection shall be made by the Principal on the basis of the total marks secured by the candidates in both the tests and the interview, subject to their medical fitness.48. Reservation of seats for Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes.
- Provided suitable candidates are available, 11 per cent of the seats shall be reserved for Scheduled Castes and Schedule Tribes and 4 per cent for the backward classes.49. Fees.
- Fees are charged according to parents' income as per schedule:-50. Scholarship.
- Scholarship once awarded shall be continued until the scholars complete their school-leaving examination courses, provided they continue to make satisfactory progress. The Principal may recommend to the State Government suspension or cancellation of scholarship on the ground of unsatisfactory progress or misbehaviour.51. Registrar of Examinations.
- The Registrar of Examinations under the order of the Director and in consultation with the School Examination Board of which he is the ex-officio Secretary is responsible for the control and supervision of the examinations entrusted to him. He is also required to appoint examiners for the several examinations, moderate question papers, publish results of the examinations and control all receipts and expenditure connected with the examination,(G.O. no. 1386-E., dated 4th July, 1913.)52. Regional Deputy Director of Education.
- State Government have re-designated the Divisional Inspector of Schools as Regional Deputy Director of Education. This will not involve any change in their duties.(G. O. no. 4100, dated 19th August, 1959).53. Functions of the Inspectress of Schools, Bihar.
- The functions of the Inspectress of Schools in respect of Girls' Education are (i) Inspection and Supervision, (ii) Administration and Organisation, and (iii) Advisory.Note. - She will exercise all the powers and functions mutatis mutandis in respect of Girls' Schools as are correspondingly exercised by the District Education Officer in respect of Boys' schools.54. Inspecting duties of the Inspectress.
- The Inspectress is empowered to inspect all classes of educational institutions for girls and women (except colleges) and may submit her inspection report to the Director of Public Instruction.The Inspectress is responsible for the efficient inspection of all recognised Girls' Institutions (other than colleges) in the State. She is required to inspect every recognised Girls High/Higher Secondary School in the State at least once in two calendar years, and to send the reports of these inspections to the Board of Secondary Education. Each report should contain a definite recommendation as to whether or not the school should continue to be permitted to present candidates at the Secondary School Examination. She is also required to visit annually a certain number of Girls' middle and primary schools in order to test the work of her subordinate inspecting officers. She should also inspect annually the offices of all the District Inspectresses, in the State to see that these are being efficiently managed and the inspection and supervision work of these officers are thorough.55. Other duties of the Inspectress.
- The Inspectress, is responsible for ensuring that the Departmental regulations and curriculum are strictly followed, the accounts correctly kept, prescribed text-books are used, approved holidays are observed and discipline properly maintained in all the Girls' Institutions under her Control. She will, where necessary for the better efficiency of Government Girls' School, recommend to the Director of Public Instruction-56. Relation of Inspectress to Aided Schools.
- The Inspectress is the agent of the Department for the.administration of grant to Recognised High/Higher Secondary Schools for Girls' under private management. She will deal with all applications for new grant-in-aid and also for the renewal of such grants in respect of Girls' Schools. She will also pass the grants-in-aid bills of these Girls' Schools.57. Duty of the Inspectress of Schools at aided Schools.
- When inspecting an aided Girls' school, she is required to see that the conditions attached to the grant are fully carried out, that the accounts are correctly kept, Departmental regulations strictly followed and discipline properly maintained. She is empowered to recommend to the school authorities the dismissal or removal of any teacher with whose work she is dissatisfied or whose presence on the staff of the school she considers undesirable, and to make such other recommendations with regard to the staff of the school, the constitution of the managing committee, the provision of suitable buildings, equipments etc., as may seem to her necessary. If the Inspectress finds any infringement of the conditions of the grant, or if there is an unwillingness or unwarrantable delay on the part of the school authorities in giving effect to her recommendations, she is empowered to suspend the payment of the grant and to recommend alternate mode of management of the institution. Should the cause of complaint be not removed within a reasonable time, she should withdraw the grants, unless the school is High/Higher Secondary School, in which case she should report the facts to the Board of Secondary Education.58. The Inspectress and Anglo-Indian Schools.
- The Inspectress is authorised to visit all recognised institutions in which Anglo-Indian girls are being educated but the Inspector of Anglo-Indian schools is primarily responsible to the Department for these schools. In her visit to Anglo-Indian schools, the Inspectress should pay attention to subjects studied by girls along and to infant class work.The Inspectress will send to the Inspector of Anglo-Indian schools a copy of such inspection reports, as she may write, of Anglo-Indian Schools,The Inspectress will furnish the Inspector of Anglo-Indian Schools with a copy of the programme of any tour in the course of which she intends to visit Anglo-Indian Schools.59. The Inspectress and the Commissioner.
- The Inspectress must supply the Commissioner with whatever information or assistance the latter may require in connection with the work of Girls' Education in the State.60. Inspection of High/Higher Secondary Schools.
- Formal visits of the Inspectress to the Girls' High/Higher Secondary Schools in the State should be undertaken in the course of her ordinary tours of inspection and must be evenly distributed throughout the year.61. Consultation with the Commissioner or District Magistrate.
- In the case of disputes between the managing or advisory committee of the school and the local public, the Inspectress should obtain the opinion of the Commissioner or the District Magistrate, as the case may be, before giving her decision.62. Conference.
- An annual conference should be held in each division under the presidency of the Inspectress. The Lady Principal of all Government Girls' High/Higher Secondary Schools, and the headmistresses of the schools should be invited to attend. Lectures should be delivered to which also they should be invited to attend. These should be followed by discussions and debates. Government servants attending these conferences will draw travelling allowance at the usual rates.The committees of aided or unaided schools, should be asked to pay the expenses of the Headmistresses, if they permit them to attend. Any divisional meeting of the District and Deputy Inspectresses, Lady Principals and Headmistresses of women's training classes, at which it may be necessary for Government servants only to attend should be held immediately before or after this conference so that travelling expenses may be minimised.63. Minimum number of days on tour.
- The Inspectress is required to be on tour outside her headquarters not less than 150 days with at least 90 nights in each financial year.64. Power delegated to the inspectress.
- The Inspectress is empowered-65. Function of District Education Officer.
- The functions of a District Education Officer are three fold, i.e. (i) inspection, (ii) supervision and (iii) administration.66. Inspecting duties of a District Education Officer.
- The District Education Officer is responsible for the efficient inspection of all recognised educational institutions (other than colleges and research institutes, girls' middle, high and training schools) including basic schools and social education centres in the area entrusted to his charge. He is required to inspect every Government Higher Secondary school including Sarvodaya High Secondary schools and Teachers' Training schools in his district at least once a year and to send the reports of these inspections to the Board of Secondary Education and the Board of Basic Education respectively. Each report except the report on Teachers' Training schools should contain definite recommendations whether, or not the school should continue to be permitted to present candidates at the Secondary School, Higher Secondary Examination. He should also pay occasional surprise visits to these schools. He is required to inspect annually not less than 33 per cent of non-Government High/Higher Secondary schools and a certain number of Government and non-Government Basic besides other Middle and Primary schools. He should also inspect annually the offices of all educational officers immediately subordinate to him. He should also inspect some of the other subordinate offices. He should see that these offices are efficiently managed and the inspection and supervision work of these offices are thorough. A copy of the Inspection Notes should be submitted to the Director through the Regional Deputy Director. The inspection should be evenly distributed throughout the year.67. Other duties of a District Education Officer.
- The District Education Officer, is responsible for seeing that the departmental regulations and curriculum are strictly followed, the accounts correctly kept and discipline properly maintained in all the institutions and offices under his control. For the sake of better efficiency in any Government school, he is required to recommend to the Director through the Regional Deputy Director in respect of the following :-68. District Education Officers' relation to aided schools and other institutions.
- The District Education Officer is the agent of the Department for the administration of grants to recognised school and other institutions.69. District Education Officers' duty regarding aided schools.
- When inspecting aided schools including basic schools, he is required to see that the conditions attached to the grant are fully carried out, that the accounts are correctly kept, that departmental regulations are strictly followed and that discipline is properly maintained. He is empowered to recommend to the school authorities the dismissal or removal of any teacher with whose work he is dissatisfied or whose presence on the staff, he considers undesirable and to make such other recommendations with regard to the staff of the school, the constitution of the managing committee, the provision of suitable buildings, etc., as may seem to him necessary. If the District Education Officer finds any infringement of the conditions of the grant, or if there is any unwillingness or unwarrantable delay on the part of the school authorities in giving effect to his recommendation he is empowered to suspend the payment of the grant. Should the cause for complaint be not removed within a reasonable space of time, he should withdraw the grant, unless the school is a High/Higher Secondary school, in which case he should report the facts to Board of Secondary Education, or in the case of Basic institutions to the Basic Education Board.70. The District Education Officers' relation to unaided schools.
- Although the same standard of efficiency cannot ordinarily be expected in an unaided school as in an institution maintained or aided by Government, the District Education Officer should require a certain minimum of efficiency in every school recognised by the Department, taking into consideration in each case the standard of instruction to which the school proposes to teach. If the District Education Officer, considers any school to fall short of that minimum in the matter of management, school building, staff, equipment or discipline and if the school authorities show unwillingness or unwarrantable delay in carrying out his requirements he should, in the case of a High School, recommend to the Board of Secondary Education and in the case of basic school to the Board of Basic Education, the withdrawal of recognition and in other cases, withdraw recognition for so long a period as he deems necessary.71. District Education Officers' responsibility for examination.
- The District Education Officer is responsible for the conduct of departmental examinations and the award of middle scholarships in his district in accordance with the regulations contained in Bihar Education Code and subject to the powers exercised by the School Examination Board. He should consult the District Inspectress concerned with regard to the examination of pardanishin candidates, and make such arrangements as may be possible for their convenience.72. The District Education Officer and the District Magistrate/Deputy Commissioner.
- The District Education Officer must supply the District Magistrate/Deputy Commissioner with whatever information or assistance the latter may require in connection with the work of education in his district. He should remain in close touch with the District Officer and seek his guidance and assistance specially in the administrative field.73. Inspection of High/Higher Secondary Schools.
- The District Education Officer's formal visits to the High/Higher Secondary schools in his district should be undertaken in the course of his ordinary tours of inspection.74. Assistance to the District Inspectress.
- The District Education Officer and his subordinates are required to extend all co-operation to the District Inspectress in connection with the schools for the control and supervision of which the latter are directly responsible specially in such matters as the acquisition of land and erection of buildings, etc.75. Consultation with the Commissioner or District Magistrate/Deputy Commissioner.
- In the case of disputes between the managing or advisory committee of a school and the local public, the District Education Officer shall obtain the opinion of the Commissioner or the District Magistrate/Deputy Commissioner as the case may be, before giving his decision.76. Annual Conference.
- An annual conference should be held in each district under the Presidentship of the District Education Officer. The Deputy Inspectors of Schools, Sub-divisional Education Officers, heads of all the boys' and girls' High schools, Principals of Teachers' Training schools in the district, District Superintendent of Education, Superintendent of Basic Education, Deputy Superintendent of Physical Education and local residents known to be interested in education should be invited to attend. Lectures may be delivered which may be followed by discussions and debates. Government servants attending these conferences will draw travelling allowances at the usual rates.The committees of aided and unaided schools should be advised to pay the expenses of their Headmasters/Headmistress/Principals, if they permit them to attend, any sub-divisional meeting of District Education Officers, Sub-divisional Education Officers and Headmasters/Headmistress/Principals of Government High/Higher Secondary schools including Sarvodaya High/Higher Secondary schools/Superintendent of Basic Education, Deputy Superintendent of Physical Education, at which it may be necessary for Government servants only to attend, should be held immediately before or immediately after this conference, so that the travelling expenses may be minimised.77. Collection of Statistics.
- The District Education Officer shall be responsible for the collection of statistics for annual district returns.78. Minimum number of days on tour.
- The District Education Officer is required to be on tour outside his headquarters for not less than 150 days with not less than 90 night halts outside his headquarters in each financial year.79. Powers delegated to the District Education Officer.
- District Education Officers are empowered:-80. Duties and Powers of Sub-divisional Education Officer.
- The Sub-divisional Education Officer is in general charge of all educational activities other than colleges, research and special institutes and female education in the subdivision, subject to the general control of the District Education Officer. He is the local educational officer who is charged with the immediate inspection and academic supervision of schools of all classes in his subdivision with the exception of Government High/Higher Secondary schools and Training schools of which the heads are officers of an equivalent rank. He is the authority to grant or withdraw recognition of Middle schools in his subdivision. He should carefully supervise the work of the Deputy Inspectors and the Sub-Inspectors of schools under him. He is the educational advisor of the Sub-divisional Officer.81. Propaganda Work.
- The Sub-divisional Educational Officer should occasionally arrange interviews with the managing committees of the schools under his charge and with the parents and guardians of pupils in order to explain the necessity for regular and punctual attendance and to induce the people generally to take an interest in education.82. Sub-divisional Education Officer's relation to National Extension Service and Community Development Blocks.
- He is required to keep in close touch with Block Development Officers and Project Executive Officers and supervise the educational programme of each Block. He should ensure that educational plans for each block are prepared carefully and in time and that such plans implemented properly.83. Minimum number of days on tour.
- The Sub-divisional Education Officer is required to be on tour outside his headquarters for not less than 150 days with at least 90 night halts in each financial year.84. Inspection and Supervisory duties of a Sub-divisional Education Officer.
- He should inspect each non-Government High and Higher Secondary school in his charge at least once a year and each Training school whose head is not an officer of equivalent rank and all Government Basic schools as often as possible. In addition, he should inspect as many Middle and Primary schools, including non-Government Basic schools in the subdivision, as he conveniently can.He should also inspect the offices of the Deputy Inspectors of Schools, Sub-Inspectors of Schools and Deputy Superintendents of Basic Education at least once a year to see that they are efficiently managed and that the inspection and supervision work of these offices is thorough. A copy of his inspection note should be submitted to the District Education Officer. A copy of the inspection note on office of Sub-Inspector of Schools should be sent to the Block Development/Project Executive Officer concerned. His report of inspection of High/Higher Secondary schools should be forwarded to the Board of Secondary Education by the District Education Officer with such observations of his own as he may wish to make.Note. -(i) A Sub-divisional Education Officer may count as a day spent on tour any day during which he visits four schools within 5 miles of his headquarters, provided that if a school is visited more than twice in the same year, no account will be taken of such visit; and85. Checking of diaries of Subordinate Inspecting Officers.
- The Sub-divisional Education Officer must check the tour diaries of Sub-Inspectors which should be submitted to him through the Deputy Inspector of schools and Block Development Officer or Project Executive Officer with a view to ascertain whether the touring has been satisfactory from the qualitative and quantitative points of view and whether it has been carried out in a planned manner. He should require each Sub-Inspector of Schools to submit a full list of the primary, special and indigenous schools in the Anchal along with the diary. The list shall show the name and class of each school, the date of its commencement, the dates of inspection in the various months and any remarks thereon. The list should be returned to the Sub-Inspector after inspection and signature. The Sub-divisional Education Officer will send the tour diary to the District Superintendent of Education for his perusal and onward transmission to the District Education Officer. Similarly, the tour diaries of Deputy Inspectors of Schools and Deputy Superintendent of Basic Education should be obtained along with their travelling allowance bills and checked in the same manner.86. Check list of schools to be submitted.
- The Sub-divisional Education Officer should submit a similar list dealing with Sarvodaya High and Higher Secondary, Middle and Teachers' Training schools of which the head is not a class II Officer to the District Education Officer along with his own travelling allowance bill.87. Girls' schools open to male inspection.
- Girls' schools under the District and Deputy, Inspectresses of Schools but incharge of male teachers are open to inspection by the Sub-divisional Education Officer. He should forward to the District and Deputy Inspectresses concerned, copies of inspection notes which he records in respect of such schools.88. Powers of Sub-divisional Education Officer.
- The Sub-divisional Education Officer is empowered :-89. District Inspectress.
- The District Inspectress of Schools is the local educational officer charged with the immediate inspection and supervision of Girls' schools of all classes in her district with the exception of Government High/Higher Secondary schools and Training schools of which the heads are officers of an equivalent rank. She is the authority to grant or withdraw recognition of Girls' Middle schools in her district. She should carefully supervise the work of the Deputy Inspectresses of Schools under her. She is the Educational Adviser of the District Education Officer in respect of girls' education in the district.90. Propaganda Work.
- The District Inspectress of Schools should occasionally arrange interviews with the Managing Committee of the Girls' schools under her charge and with the parents and guardians of pupils in order to explain the necessity for regular and punctual attendance and to induce the people generally to take interest in girls' education.91. District Inspectress's relation to C.D. Blocks.
- She is required to keep in close touch with the Block Development Officers and Project Executive Officers and supervise the Educational programme relating to girls of each block, particularly the working of the Lady Social Education Organiser.92. Minimum number of days on tour.
- The District Inspectress of schools is required to be on tour outside her headquarters for not less than 150 days with at least 90 night halts in each financial year. The tour programme should be properly planned and approval of the Inspectress of Schools should ordinarily be obtained in advance.93. Inspection and supervisory duties of the District Inspectress of Schools.
- She should inspect each non-Government Girls' Middle school in her charge at least twice a year and each Training school whose head is not an officer of equivalent rank and each non-Government Girls' Middle school at least once a year. In addition, she should inspect as many Primary schools as she conveniently can. She should also take interest in the supervision of various women's programmes organised and run by other departments of Government.She should also inspect the offices of the Deputy Inspectress of schools at least once a year in order to see that they are efficiently managed and the inspection and supervision work of these offices is thorough and satisfactory. A copy of her inspection note on the office of the Deputy Inspectress of Schools should be submitted to the Inspectress of Schools. Her report of inspection of High/Higher Secondary schools should be forwarded to the Board of Secondary Education through the Inspectress of Schools who will make her observations on it when forwarding it to the Board.Note. - A District Inspectress of Schools may count as a day spent on tour any day during which she visits two schools within five miles of her headquarters provided that, if a school is visited more than twice in the same year, no account will be taken of such visit for this purpose.The District Inspectress of Schools is required to supervise the working of the N.C.C. and Auxiliary Cadet Corps organisation functioning in Girls' schools in her district in consultation with the Assistant Administrative Officer, N.C.C. of her division.94. Checking of diaries of Subordinate Inspecting Officers.
- The District Inspectress of Schools must check the tour diaries of the Deputy Inspectress of Schools which should be submitted to her alongwith their T.A. bills.95. Check list of schools to be submitted.
- The District Inspectress of Schools should submit a similar list dealing with High/Higher Secondary, Middle and Teachers' Training schools of which the head is not a class II officer inspected by her to the Inspectress of Schools along with her own T.A. bills.96. Boys' Schools open to inspection by Lady Inspecting Officers.
- The District Inspectress of Schools may inspect such Boys' schools (excluding Government High/Higher Secondary schools ) in which girl students are admitted. She should forward to the District and Subdivisional Education Officer concerned copies of inspection notes which she records in respect of such schools.97. Power of District Inspectress of Schools.
- Subject to the powers delegated to the Deputy Inspectress of Schools, the District Inspectress of Schools is empowered :-98. Duties and powers of the Deputy Inspectress of Schools.
- The Deputy Inspectress of Schools is the local educational a officer charged with the immediate inspection and supervision of all Girls' Middle and Primary schools including Government Girls' Middle schools in her subdivision. A Government Girls' Middle school where the Headmistress is in the Upper Division of the Subordinate Educational Service will, however, be under the direct control of the District Inspectress of Schools, the Deputy Inspectress of Schools will have the authority to grant or withdraw recognition of Girls' Primary schools of her Subdivision.99. Propaganda Work.
- The Deputy Inspectress of schools should frequently arrange interviews with the managing and local committees of schools under her charge, with the mukhya of Gram Panchayats and with the parents and guardians, particularly with the mothers of school-going age girls in order to explain to them the importance of girls education and to ensure the increase in enrolment and regular and punctual attendance of girls in schools and to induce the people generally, to take interest in Girls' Educational Organisations as well as other women social worker of development blocks in the achievement of this objective.100. Minimum number of days on tour.
- The Deputy Inspectress of Schools is required to be on tour outside her headquarters for not less than 180 days with at least 100 night halts in each financial year. She should send a copy of her tour programme to the Block Development Officer of the Block concerned in advance so that it may be possible for him to conveniently co-ordinate her tour programme with that of the Lady Social Education Organiser. The tour programme should be properly planned and got approved by the District Inspectress of Schools in advance.101. Inspection and supervision duties of the Deputy Inspectress.
- The Deputy Inspectress of Schools should inspect each Girls' Middle school in her charge at least twice a year and each Girls' Primary school at least once in two years. In addition, she should inspect as many other categories of primary schools, special and indigenous schools as she conveniently can. She should also take interest in the supervision of various women's programme run by other departments of Government. A copy of her inspection notes should be submitted to the District Inspectress of Schools.Note. - The Deputy Inspectress of Schools may count as a day spent on tour any day during which she visits two schools within five miles of her headquarters provided that neither school has received more than one visit from her earlier in that financial year.102. Check list of schools to be submitted.
- The Deputy Inspectress of Schools should submit travelling allowance bills, a full list of Government Girls' Middle and Primary schools in her charge, showing the name and class of each school, the date of its commencement, date of last inspection, the dates of inspection in the various months during the year and any remarks thereon to the District Inspectress of Schools. No travelling allowance bills will be entertained by the District Inspectress of Schools without such a list.103. Boys' schools open to inspection by Lady Inspecting Officers.
- The Deputy Inspectress of Schools may inspect such Boys' Middle and Basic schools in which girls students are admitted. She is free to inspect Boys' Primary schools, even if girls' are not admitted to them. She should forward to the District Inspectress of Schools and Subdivisional Education Officer concerned copies of her inspection notes which she records in respect of Middle and Basic schools of composite character.104. Powers of the Deputy Inspectress of Schools.
- The Deputy Inspectress of Schools is empowered-105. Deputy Inspector of Schools.
- A Deputy Inspector of Schools is charged with the immediate inspection and academic supervision of Middle Schools in his subdivision. He is primarily responsible for the state of the Middle schools. He should supervise the work of Sub-Inspectors under him. He should occasionally arrange interviews with the managing committees of the schools under his charge, also with parents of pupils in order to explain the necessity for regular and punctual attendance and to induce the people generally to take an interest in education. He is required to spend 180 days on tour in each year and should inspect each middle school once a year. He should in addition see as many primary schools as he conveniently can.Note. - A Deputy Inspector of Schools may count as a day spent on tour any day during which he visits schools within five miles of his headquarters, provided that neither school has received more than one visit from him earlier in that financial year.(G.O. no. 25-E.R., dated the 4th May, 1926 : D.P.I's tetter no. 4470, dated the 28th April 1931 and G.O. no. 360-E, dated the 21st January, 1935.)106. Check Lists.
- A Deputy Inspector is authorised to pass the pay bills and contingent bills of the Sub-Inspectors of Schools in his subdivision. Each such officer should submit to the Deputy Inspector, with his bill, his diary and a full list of the Primary, Special and Unrecognised schools in his circle. The list should show the name and class of each school, the date of commencement, the dates of inspection in the various months and any remarks thereon. This list should be returned to the Sub-Inspectors as the case may be, after inspection, signature and such remarks as the Deputy Inspector may wish to make. The Deputy Inspector should submit a similar list of the Middle schools under his charge to the Sub-divisional Education Officer along with his own travelling allowance bill.(G.O. no. 25-E.R., dated the 4th May, 1926, G.O. no. 360, dated the 21st January 1935 and G.O. no. 2289, dated the 9th September, 1945.)107. Conference.
- Deputy Inspectors should attend the Sub-divisional Education Officers' Annual Conference and should also make it a point of attending as many of the annual conferences held by their Sub-Inspectors as possible.(G.O. no. 25-E. R., dated the 4th, May, 1926.)108. Powers of Deputy Inspectors.
- Deputy Inspectors are empowered-109. Annual Returns.
- A Deputy Inspector should attend when required to help the District Education Officer in the preparation of his annual returns in lieu of a Sub-Inspector from his subdivision. In that case he is only allowed to absent himself from his work for ten days inclusive of Sundays and holidays and the time spent in travelling from and to his headquarters. If the period exceeds this, he will cease to draw pay and allowance for the day or days in excess.(G.O. no. 25-E. R., dated the 4th May, 1926.)110. Regulation of transfer of Deputy Inspectors of Schools and Deputy Superintendent of Education.
- A Deputy Inspector of Schools and Deputy Superintendent of Education should not ordinarily be posted in his home district. If the officer is already stationed in his home district, steps should be taken immediately to transfer him to a place outside his home district.111. Deputy Superintendent of Education.
- In every district there shall be one or more Deputy Superintendent of Education to give such assistant and perform such functions as will be assigned by the District Superintendent of Education or as may be laid down by the Director.112. Sub-Inspector of Schools.
- A Sub-Inspector's first duty is in connection with primary and indigenous schools. He may, however, be authorised by the Sub-divisional Education Officer or the Deputy Inspector of Schools to visit Middle and Junior Basic schools. He should also arrange occasionally to see the parents and guardians of the pupils of Primary schools in order to explain the necessity for regular and punctual attendance and to induce the people generally to take an interest in education. The headquarters of a Sub-Inspector will be located at the headquarters of Anchal-cum-Development Block and his jurisdiction will be co-ex-tensible with the jurisdiction of a Development Block. Ordinarily, a Sub-Inspector is placed incharge of 60 primary schools.(G.O. nos. 4367, dated 26th September, 1955 and 370, dated 22nd January, 1957.)113. Relationship between the Sub-Inspector and the Block Development Officers/Project Executive Officers.
- (i) The Block Development Officer/Project Executive Officer shall have the full control over the movement of the Sub-Inspector of Schools within the Block. A copy of the tour programme of the Sub-Inspector of Schools shall be sent by him to the Block Development Officer/Project Executive Officer as also to the Sub-divisional Education Officer. The Block Development Officer/Project Executive Officer may ask the tour programme to be adjusted in which case the Sub-Inspector of Schools shall adjust the tour programme accordingly. The Block Development Officer/Project Executive Officer, while asking for such adjustment shall keep the requirements of the Education Code in view and shall send a copy of his order to the Sub-divisional Education Officer.114. Minimum number of tour days, tour programme and check list.
- He must submit his tour programme to the Block Development Officer before going out on tour. He should submit with his diaries a full list of the Primary schools special and indigenous schools, the date of its commencement, the date of inspection in the various months and any remarks thereon. The form will be returned with the diary. The Sub-Inspector of Schools is required to be more than 200 days on tour every year and to visit and inspect each Primary school in his area at least once a year and in addition to pay a surprise visit to each school at least four times in the year. The surprise visit should be paid in the course of ordinary inspection tour to other schools.(G. O. no. 2289-E, dated the 28th September, 1945.)115. Control of Sub-Inspector of Schools.
- The following rules regulate the appointment, leave, promotion, transfer, suspension and punishment of the Sub-Inspector:-116. Assistance in preparing the Annual Returns.
- One Sub-Inspector from each subdivision may be called by the District Education Officer and one Sub-Inspector from each district by the Regional Deputy Director of Education to help in the preparation of the annual returns. These Sub-Inspectors will be allowed to be absent from their work for ten days only inclusive of Sundays and holidays and the time spent in travelling from and to their headquarters. If the period is exceeded, the Sub-Inspector of Schools will cease to draw pay and allowances for the day or days in excess.(R. & O. Page 145.)117. Guru gathering under Sub-Inspector.
- This Scheme is not in force now hence omitted.118. Deputation of Sub-Inspector of Schools from Inspecting Branch to the staff of Junior Training School.
119. Duties and power of Divisional Superintendent of Basic Education.
- The Divisional Superintendent of Basic Education is under the administrative control of the Regional Deputy Director of Education. He is required to assist the Regional Deputy Director of Education in the supervision of basic education in the division.120. Divisional Social Education Organiser.
- At each divisional headquarters here is a Divisional Social Education Organiser under the administrative control of the Regional Deputy Director of Education. His duty is to supervise and guide the work of the District Social Education Organisers and through them of the social education workers at lower level.121. Powers and duties of the Superintendents of Basic Education.
122. Powers and duties of the Deputy Superintendent of Basic Education.
123. The Deputy Superintendent is empowered.
124. Duties of Divisional Assistant Administrative Officer, N.C.C.
- The Assistant Administrative Officer (N.C.C. and A.C.C.) has been assigned the following duties:-125. District Social Education Organiser.
- There is a District Social Education Organiser at district headquarters under the direct control of the District Education Officer. He is responsible for organising, supervising and inspecting the Social Education Programme in the District. He is expected to to exercise technical control over the work of the Social Education Organisers.126. Deputy Superintendent of Physical Education.
- In each district there is a Deputy Superintendent of Physical Education directly responsible to the District Education Officer for the growth of sports, games and physical education in the District.127. School counsellors (Guidance Masters).
- The School counsellor is responsible for giving proper guidance to students in selecting the appropriate course suited to their abilities and aptitude. He shall organise and administer the guidance programme in the school to which he is attached. The Director of Educational and Vocational Guidance will continue to give him technical guidance through the head of the institution.128. Principal of Government Higher Secondary Multi-purpose School and Head-master of Government High School.
- The Principal/the Headmaster is responsible for the institution under his control with the attached hostel, if any. He is empowered-129. Lady Principal of Government Girls' High/Higher Secondary Schools.
- The Lady Principal of Government Girls' High/Higher Secondary schools including the Lady Principal of the B.N.R. Training College are responsible for the institutions under their control with the attached hostel, if any. They are empowered-130. District Superintendent of Education.
- The District Superintendent of Education is empowered-131. Duties and Functions of Social Education Organisers.
- Primary functions of a Social Education Organiser is the full Education of the people in citizenship and thus creating a field for work by the other extension officers of the Book-team. The duties and functions of Social Education Organisers are as follows:132. Duties of the Inspecting Officers intaking prompt action to deal with abnormal situation.
- The Inspecting officers should ensure that whenever any abnormal situation (organised strike, forbidden concerted action, act of indiscipline calculated to undermine administration of law and order or any untoward event of a serious nature) arises in their jurisdiction, timely information by express letter, telephone, telegram or special messenger is immediately communicated to the Director of Public Instruction, who should be fully posted with any subsequent significant developments. The Sub-divisional Education Officer, will submit such reports direct to the District Educational Officer, Regional Deputy Director of Education and the Director of Public Instruction, Bihar. The District Education Officer on receipt of such report from the Sub-divisional Education Officer should submit his own assessment of the situation with a report on the action taken by him to deal with it to the Regional Deputy Director of Education, who in turn will submit his report to the Director of Public Instruction. It is necessary that very prompt action should be taken by the proper authority. If the officer whose normal duty is to deal with such situations is away from headquarters, the officer immediately subordinate to him, who is on the spot, should promptly assume responsibility for effectively handling such situations.A factual report to the Director of Public Instruction, on all incidents involving students which have a direct repercussion on general law and order, communal relations, railway administration, bus transport, student-teacher relationship, should also be sent within a week of their occurrence.(D. P. I.'s Circular no. 629, dated the 19th February, 1949 and no. 3045, dated the 3rd July, 1959.)133. Duties of Inspecting Officers in keeping the Divisional Commissioner informed of important developments in the Educational Sphere.
- It is most important that the Divisional Commissioners, Deputy Commissioners and the District Magistrates as heads of their respective divisions and districts, be kept informed of all important matters whether of administrative and political significance or these relate to development plans. The Regional Deputy Directors of Education and the District Education Officers should keep themselves in touch with the Divisional Commissioners and Deputy Commissioners and the District Magistrates and see them from time to time and apprise them of the recent educational development.(G.O. no. 28497, dated the 25th September, 1953.)134. Duty of Inspecting Officers.
- Inspecting officers are not merely teachers or examiners. They should possess the experience and knowledge needed by teachers, but their real duty is to see how far the actual teachers understand the art of teaching and school management and how far they are careful and zealous in performing their duties; to give them instruction and advice with regard to their work, and in general to assist them in overcoming any difficulties which they may encounter.(Cf. R. & O. Page 101.)135. Inspection and Examination.
- The proper scrutiny of a school consists of two principal parts, viz. inspection and examination. By the former is meant the process of seeing a school at work during its ordinary routine, nothing, for example, the suitability of the building, the sanitary conditions, the arrangement and organisation of the classes, the organisation of school and class libraries, the furniture and apparatus, the manner in which the accounts and registers are kept, order and discipline, the relationship between teachers and pupils, the ability of new programmes like assessment, NCC/ACC and the methods used in teaching. By the latter is meant the process of testing the pupils in order to discover how far they have profited by the instruction of their teachers and how far weakness in the method of teaching is borne out by resultant weakness in the class.(Cf. R. & O. Page 103.)Note. - For guidance of inspecting officers three forms have been prepared containing suggestions as to points that should be noticed at high and middle schools, respectively. These forms will be found in appendices I, II and III.136. Notice of Inspection.
- Ordinarily notice of the date of inspection should be sent to high, middle and training schools, with the intimation that work should go on as usual. A form has been drawn up on which Headmasters should supply to the inspecting officers the information which he requires. This should be ready for his perusal on his arrival.(Cf. R. & O. page 103.)137. Inspection remarks.
- Inspection remarks on all kinds of schools should be written in Hindi (Devanagari Script). Besides other points, a paragraph on the following point' should also be devoted in the inspection note. -138. Mutual visits of Headmasters and Headmistress and staff to neighbouring schools.
- Government desires that Headmasters and Headmistresses of High Schools and their staff should acquaint themselves with the special activities and feature of other High Schools in the neighbourhood, for example, Mission School in Ranchi deserves to be visited by the Principal, Ranchi Zilla Multi-purpose Schools. It is, therefore, necessary that District Education Officers or the Regional Deputy Directors of Education should direct the Headmasters and the Headmistresses and staff of all recognised schools in their respective jurisdictions to associate with each other and to organise visits to different institutions so that the schools may benefit from the experience of similar institutions.(G.O. no. 1856-E., dated the 20th October 1951.)139. Tours.
- Inspecting officers should arrange their tours so that they can visit the greatest number of schools with the minimum amount of travelling. The habit of making short excursions from headquarters, seeing two or three schools and then returning, is to be deprecated. Long daily journey should not be undertaken unless for special and adequate reasons.(R. & O. page 102.)140. Instructions regarding inspection of offices and institutions by Inspecting Officers.
- It is the responsibility of every Inspecting Officer to see that all offices and institutions under his control are inspected frequently, regularly, and systematically. The following instructions should be followed strictly :-141. Local Self-Government Act.
- The following are the provisions of the Local Self-Government Act (Bengal Act III of 1885, as amended by Bihar and Orissa Act I of 1923 and Bihar Act VII of 1954 relating to Education)."54A. Constitution of District Education Fund. - (1) There shall be formed for each district a fund to be called the "District Education Fund" and there shall be placed to the credit thereof-(i)all sums granted to the District Board by the Government for purpose of education;(ii)all income derived from any endowments or other property owned or managed by the District Board for the benefit of education;(iii)an annual contribution from the District fund not being less than the average of the sums spent by the District Board for purpose of education during three years immediately preceding the year in which the contribution is made;(iv)all receipts in respect of any school for the maintenance or management of which the Board is responsible under Section 62 or Section 63;(v)all other sums which may be contributed to or received by the District Board for purpose of education; and(vi)such other sums as may be directed by the State Government to be credited to the District Education Fund.54B. Application of District Education Fund. - The District Education Fund shall, subject to such rules as may be prescribed by the State Government be applicable to the following objects, namely :-
54C. Accounts of District Education Fund, how to be kept and published. - Account books of the District Education Fund shall be kept by the District Superintendent of Education.
An account showing the income of the District Education Fund under each head of receipt, the charges of establishment, the works undertaken, the sums expended on each work, and the balance, if any, of the Fund remaining unspent at the end of the year, shall be prepared for each financial year as soon as possible after its close and any person resident in, or owning or holding land in, the district may at all reasonable times inspect any such account without payment of a fee.62. Subject to any rules made by the State Government under this Act, every District Board shall be charged with, and be responsible for, the maintenance and management of all primary and middle schools under public management within the district, the construction and repair of all buildings connected therewith, the appointment and (subject to the provisions of section 33), of all masters and assistant masters provided that nothing contained in this section shall be held to apply to schools for the education of the Europeans and Anglo-Indians:
Provided further that the posting and promotion of the masters and other establishment of such schools shall be made, and disciplinary action, including removals and dismissal, taken against them, by the District Board in consultation with the District Superintendent of Education appointed under section 62A.62A. Power of State Government to appoint District Superintendent of Education and other officers. - The State Government may appoint for each district a District Superintendent of Education and such other officer or officers to assist him as it thinks fit and their establishment and may transfer the Superintendent and the officers from one district to another.
62B. Control over establishment of schools to which grants-in-aid are made. - Subject to the rules made by the State Government in this behalf, the appointment, posting and promotion of the masters, assistant masters and other establishments of schools to which grants-in-aid are made shall be made, and disciplinary action including removal and dismissal, against them shall be taken, by the District Superintendent of Education in consultation with the District Board.
62C. Procedure in case of difference of opinion between District Board and District Superintendent of Education. - (1) If there is any difference of opinion between the District Board and the District Superintendent of Education on the question of the removal or dismissal of any member of the establishment of any school the matter shall be referred to such authority as may be prescribed in this behalf, by a general or special order, by the State Government and the decision of such authority shall be final.
63. Other Schools. - The District Board may, subject to any rules made by the State Government under this Act, with its own consent, be charged with.
* * * *64. It shall be lawful for the State Government to declare that the maintenance and management, of any High English School under the Bihar and Orissa Municipal Act, 1922. shall be entrusted to a Joint Committee, consisting partly of members delegated by the Commissioners of such municipality and partly of members delegated by such District Boards as may be named in the order, provided that no order shall be made under this section except with the consent of the local authorities and the municipal authority affected thereby.
Every order issued under this section shall specify the number of members to be delegated, and the proportion of the cost of maintenance of the school to be provided, by each of the local authorities and the municipal authorities and the municipality named therein.Every Joint Committee appointed under this section shall in respect of any such schools have the same powers, and be subject to the same liabilities, as are by this heading conferred and imposed on district boards.64A. The District Board may, subject to any rules, made by the State Government under this Act-
65. It shall be lawful for the State Government from time to time to transfer to a District Board such funds as it may deem necessary for expenditure on-
65A. The hostels referred to in sections 64A and 65 may be situated either within the area directly subject to the authority of the District Board, or within any place or town lying within that area in which the Bihar and Orissa Municipal Act, 1922, is for the time being in force.
65B.
65C. Constitution of Planning Committee for education and its functions. - (1) There shall be a Planning Committee for education to be called at the Education Planning Committee in each district consisting of-
(a)the District Magistrate;(b)the Chairman of the District Board;(c)the District Education Officer;(d)the Chairman of the Municipality at the headquarters station of the district;(e)one non-official member to be appointed by the State Government;(f)not more than five members of the State Legislature to be appointed by the State Government; the Secretary of the Planning Committee.65D. Power of State Government to appoint an authority to perform the duties of District Board in respect of education. - If the State Government is satisfied, after such enquiry as it thinks fit, that any sum granted of funds transferred by the State Government to the District Board for purposes of education are not being spent properly on the purpose for which the sums were granted or the funds were transferred, the State Government may, by notification, appoint an authority who shall, subject to the control of the State Government, perform the duties imposed on the District Board under this Act in respect of education and direct the person having the custody of the District Education Fund to pay to such authority the amount necessary for the performance of such duties.
* * * *138. It shall be lawful for the State Government to make rules consistent with this Act for any District Board for the purpose of-
* * * *142. Statutory Rules for District Board.
- The following are the rules framed by Government in exercise of the powers conferred by Sections 54B, 62, 62B, 63, 63B, 65C and 138 of the Local Self-Government Act. These rules also regulate, mutatis mutandis the control over schools to be exercised by the Hazaribagh Mines Board.(Government Notification No. 5062, L.S.G., dated 1st June, 1954)Section I1. Throughout these rules-
2. A school will ordinarily be recognised if it follows the courses of study prescribed or approved by the department and fulfils the conditions and complies with the instructions issued by the department from time to time; but recognition may be withheld or withdrawn from any school which-
3. Recognised schools shall be open to inspection and their pupils shall ordinarily be eligible for admission to public examinations or tests or assessments held by the Department.
4. District Education Fund. - The District Education Fund constituted under Section 54A of the Act will be kept in the Government Treasury of the district and will be operated upon by the District Superintendent, through a system of cheques and transfer credits.
5. (a) All payments out of District Education Fund shall be made by the District Superintendent.
6. A District Board shall not exercise control over, and may not incur expenditure on any classes of recognised schools other than the following:-
7. Save as expressly provided in these rules, a District Board shall not incur any expenditure on, or make any grant-in-aid to any other educational institution, without the previous sanction of the State Government.
Note. - For purpose of this rule the Bharat Scouts and Guides or any of its local branches shall be deemed to be an educational institution.8. (a) Apart from the District Superintendent, there shall be one or more Deputy Superintendents for every district. The Deputy Superintendents will give such assistance and perform such functions as will be assigned to them by the District Superintendent or as may be laid down by the Director.
9. The District Superintendent shall be responsible for the maintenance of Service books and character-rolls of all teachers in receipt of salaries and allowances out of the District Education Fund. These character-rolls and service-books will consist of re-port-sheets submitted annually for every teacher of all primary schools and non-Government junior basic schools by the Sub-inspectors of schools and for every teacher of middle and non-Government basic schools by the Deputy Inspector of Schools. These report-sheets will be kept in a separate file for each teacher in the personal custody of the District or Deputy Superintendent, with such remarks as the Chairman of the Board or the District Superintendent, may like to make. The District Education Officer may also ask for any entry to be made in the character-roll of any teacher.
10. Comprehensive lists of all teachers and of schools shall be maintained by the District Superintendent, in such form as may be prescribed by the Director.
11. Tho District Superintendent of Education shall forward copies of its educational proceedings of the Board and the Education Committee to the Regional Deputy Director of Education who shall be competent to make observations thereon for the consideration of the Board.
12. At the close of every financial year, such educational returns as may, from time to time, be required by Department shall be prepared in the office of the District Superintendent of Education jointly by the District Superintendent and the District Education Officer and their staff and subordinate officers, on such date as may be prescribed by the Department.
The Board shall supply to the District Superintendent and the District Education Officer any information which may be required for the preparation of the reports and returns. A report of the educational operations of the Board shall be drafted within the time prescribed by the Department, by the District Superintendent and the District Education Officer jointly every year. The report shall contain such particulars as may, from time to time, be required by the department. The District Superintendent shall submit the report to the District Officer with such comments as the Chairman, District Board may like to make. The District Officer shall, on or before the date fixed by the department, forward the report to the Regional Deputy Director who shall submit it to the Director with his remarks together with his own report on education in the circle under his charge.13. Should a difference of opinion arise between the Board and the Regional Deputy Director on any question connected with the Board-managed schools or should the Board omit to take action in any case when requested to do so by the Regional Deputy Director or should the Regional Deputy Director disapprove of any action taken by the Board, the question shall be referred to the State Government in the Education Department either by the Regional Deputy Director or by the Board, if by the former, through the District Officer and the Director and if by the latter, through the District Officer.
14. The State Government may authorise any Deputy Superintendent or Deputy Inspector, as the case may be, to exercise any power or perform any duty conferred or imposed under these rules on the District Superintendent or District Education Officer respectively, in any area specified in such orders.
Section IIRules applicable to all types of schools maintained or aided out of the District Education Fund15. Any school maintained or aided out of the District Education Fund, together with all its accounts, books and other records, shall at all times, be open to inspection and examination by the Commissioner, the District or Sub-divisional Officers, the Regional Deputy Director, the District Education Officer, the Deputy Inspector, the District Inspectress, the District Superintendent, the Deputy Superintendent, by members of the District Board Education Committee and District Board in case of Board-managed schools (in case of primary schools) also by the subordinate inspecting agencies employed by the department and to this end, the records and accounts shall be placed and kept in such custody that they shall always be accessible, on the visit of any such inspecting officer.
16. Every, such school shall submit punctually in the prescribed form such annual and periodical returns and they may be called for by the department or by the District Superintendent.
17. Every such school shall have attendance register, an admission register, a visitor's book, record of transfer certificates received and issued and where fees are charged an account book, each of which must be kept in such form as the department may prescribe. The school shall also maintain such other registers and books as the department may prescribe from time-to-time.
18. Every such school shall observe rules relating to transfer and other matters of the department.
19. A teacher in any school maintained or aided out of the District Education Fund shall be disqualified from continuance of his employment, if he takes part in political-propaganda or demonstration or becomes or continues to be a member of a political organisation.
20. Every such school shall provide instruction according to the courses of study prescribed by the State Government. Save with the previous approval of the State Government, the text-books in every such school shall be selected from the lists published by the Director. No change of system in the administration or control of recognised schools shall be introduced without the sanction of the State Government. Application for such sanction shall be forwarded to the Director through the District Superintendent and the Regional Deputy Director who shall record their opinions on the proposal.
21. The levy and rates of fees to be realised from pupils shall be regulated by such instructions, as have been or may be given by the State Government and will be subject to such general or special exemptions and concessions as Government may grant from time to time.
22. The percentage and number of free studentships and half-free-studentships shall be as have been or may be prescribed by the State Government.
23. In the hostels, if any, attached to middle or primary schools, managed or aided out of the District Education Fund, such percentage of the boarders as may be laid down by the Director may be excused seat-rent and furniture rent provided they are really poor. Boarders who are members of the Scheduled Tribes or who belong to Scheduled Caste may be excused seat-rent in such hostels up to a number to be fixed by the District Board on the recommendation of the Education Committee concerned in case of Board-managed schools and by the District Superintendent in the case of other schools.
24. Procedure for the submission, scrutiny and counter signature of establishment and other bills of all schools managed or aided from the District Education Fund. -
25. Examination of bills and remittances of payments by the District Superintendent. - (a) All bills received by the District Superintendent from the Sub-Inspectors of Schools and Deputy Inspectors of Schools shall be immediately entered in the bill register. Thereafter each bill shall be properly scrutinised with the least delay and necessary entries made in the prescribed register and the amount of the bill that has been passed for payment shall be entered in the money-order form.
26. Receipt of payments by Schools. - (a) The Headmaster or teacher-in-charge shall, on receipt of the money-order, outer the amount in the register prescribed by the Department and distribute the salaries and allowances to the staff, or on the day that the money-order is received or on the next working day at the latest. The amounts in respect of equipments, teaching and craft materials, contingencies, etc., shall be deposited by the Headmaster or teacher-in-charge into the Post Office Savings Bank Account the same day that it is received or on the next working day. The account will ordinarily be operated by the Headmaster of the School and into this account local donation, if any, will also be deposited. The District Superintendent in consultation with the Chairman may also permit the Secretary of the School Committee to operate the account in special cases where such an arrangement is considered to be more desirable. Where it is not practicable for any Savings Bank Account to be opened for want of a Post Office with Savings Bank facilities within reasonable distance, the District Superintendent in consultation with the Chairman approve of any other suitable arrangement for the proper custody of such funds.
27. Headmasters or teachers incharge of schools shall be required to furnish such security and surety as may be prescribed from time to time.
28. Some of the equipments and teaching craft materials may be purchased by the District Superintendent in consultation with the Chairman, centrally at the headquarters but prior approval of the Director should invariably be obtained to the list of such articles.
29. After the list has been approved by the Director, tenders and quotations should be invited, but for articles manufactured in basic institutions, Reformatory Schools, Cottage Industries institutes, Bihar Khadi Samiti and other organisations approved by the Director, orders should be placed with such organisations.
30. The quotations received should be thoroughly scrutinised by tho District Superintendent and placed before the District Board Education Committee for approval. After the approval of the District Board Education Committee is obtained, the purchase shall be made and the articles so purchased, distributed amongst various schools with the least delay.
31. (i) No book shall be purchased or distributed for schools use unless-
32. It shall be the duty of the District Superintendent and the Chairman, District Board to see that, within such period as may be prescribed by the Director, every school covered by the District Education Fund is placed under a Panchayat or a properly constituted local committee. Powers to these may be delegated by the District Superintendent on the basis of records of such Committees and Panchayats and in accordance with the general or specific instructions of the Director.
Section IIISpecial Rules applicable only to Board Managed Schools33. Subject to the general control of the District Board Education Committee shall be responsible for the superintendence of all matters connected with the finances, accounts, maintenance and management of schools maintained by the Board.
34. As far as possible, the day-to-day administration of these schools should with the approval of the Board be entrusted to the Secretary of the District Board Education Committee. A list of items regarding which powers may be delegated to the Secretary should be prepared, so that the work may be carried on smoothly.
35. The District Board Education Committee shall meet at least once every month. Emergent of the Committee may also be called by the Chairman, District Board.
36. The District Board Education Committee subject to the general control of the Board will be responsible for seeing that every school is properly managed and that accounts of contingencies, etc., of every school are duly maintained and that the buildings and equipments of the schools are kept in proper state.
37. All decisions and instructions of the District Board Education Committee as approved by the Board shall be signed and communicated on its behalf by the Secretary of the Committee.
38. All actions proposed to be taken by the Chairman regarding the postings and promotions of masters and assistant masters and other establishments of Board-managed Schools and regarding disciplinary action including removal and dismissal, shall be reported without delay to the District Superintendent who shall furnish his opinion within 14 days of the receipt of the information. Unless he does so, it will be assumed that he concurs in the action proposed. If the Chairman does not accept the advice of the District Superintendent, the latter shall refer the matter to the prescribed authority whose decision shall be final. The prescribed authority may act in the manner prescribed in Section 62 (c). Pending decision of the prescribed authority the Chairman shall not carry into effect the proposed action.
39. Should the Regional Deputy Director or the District Education Officer or the District Inspectress discover that the teachers in any school maintained by the Board are not properly qualified for their work, that the instruction given is not in an efficient manner, or that discipline is not properly exercised, or that the accounts are not properly kept or should he-be in any other way dissatisfied with the management of the school, he shall report the matter to the District Superintendent who will take necessary action forthwith and inform the Chairman, District Board. Recognition will not be withdrawn ordinarily except at the end of a session, but it may be withdrawn at any time under the special orders of the Regional Deputy Director for reasons to be recorded in writing and communicated to the Chairman and the District Superintendent.
40. The list of holidays and vacations to be observed in Board-managed Schools shall be drawn up annually by the District Board Education Committee, by the date prescribed by the Director subject to such general or special instructions, as may be, issued by the State Government. A copy of such list shall be forwarded to the District Education Officer, District Superintendent, Deputy Inspector and Deputy Superintendent as also to all sub-inspectors of schools at the beginning of each year.
41. Proper accounts will be maintained in every Board-managed School showing the income from school fees at the end of each month. The total amount received through school fees each month shall be remitted by the Headmaster or teacher incharge, as the case may be, in the first week of the following month through money-order to the District Superintendent for being credited to the District Education Fund, full particulars of the amount should be noted in the money-order Form.
42. On receipt of the money-order referred to in the preceding rule, the District Superintendent shall credit the amount to the District Education Fund, through transfer credit.
Section IVSpecial Rules applicable to School securing aid out of the District Education Fund.43. Grant-in-aid out of District Education Fund shall be given on the principle of strict religious neutrality.
44. The Committee or Panchayat incharge of any school or schools receiving grant-in-aid from the District Education Fund shall be responsible for the due expenditure of the school funds, in accordance with conditions of the grant. It shall appoint a Secretary to conduct its correspondence with the District Superintendent.
45. The District Superintendent shall, subject to the general control of the Director, be responsible for the distribution of grants-in-aid and for the general supervision of the finances, accounts, maintenance and management of all aided schools and may issue instructions in that connection to the Managing Committees or Headmasters or teacher-in-charge.
46. The powers regarding appointment, posting and promotion and of disciplinary action including removal and dismissal of Masters and Assistant Masters and other members of the establishment of aided schools will be exercised by the District Superintendent, in consultation with the Chairman, District Board. The District Superintendent may, where necessary, obtain the opinion of the Managing Committees and such committees may also make proposals or recommendations on these matters to the District Superintendent.
47. Every action proposed to be taken by the District Superintendent regarding the appointment, posting and promotion and disciplinary action including removal and dismissal of Headmasters and Assistant Masters and other members of the establishment of aided schools shall be reported to the Chairman, District Board immediately, who shall furnish his opinion within 14 days of the receipt of the information. Unless he does so, his concurrence in the action proposed will be presumed. If there is difference of opinion the District Superintendent shall refer the matter to the prescribed authority, whose decision shall be final. The prescribed authority may act in the manner prescribed in Section 62C, pending decision of the prescribed authority, the District Superintendent, shall not carry into effect the proposed action.
48. (a) Leave to teacher of aided, primary and non-Government and Basic schools shall be granted by the Sub-Inspector of schools concerned, according to the rules laid down in Section VIII of this Chapter.
49. Subject to such general and special instructions as may be issued by the State Government, the list of holidays and vacations to be observed in aided schools shall be drawn up by the District Superintendent, not later than the 1st of November next preceding the year for which the list is intended. In drawing up the list, the District Superintendent shall take into consideration the recommendations and suggestions, if any, of the Managing Committees. A copy of such list shall be forwarded to the Chairman, District Board, District Education Officer, Deputy Inspector and Deputy Superintendent, as also to all Sub-Inspectors of schools and all the schools at the beginning of each year.
50. No application for grant-in-aid shall be disposed of except in accordance with the plan prepared under sub-section 5 of Section 65C of the Act. In exceptional cases, however, the District Superintendent may with the previous orders of the Director sanction grants in anticipation of the plan.
51. Grants may be granted for starting new schools, even without any application for the grant having been made, provided such schools are included in the plan prepared under sub-section 5 of Section 65-C of the Act.
52. Applications for inclusion of schools in the plan and for qualifying for grant-in-aid should be made to the District Superintendent of Education.
53. Subject to the provisions of rules 51 and 52 grants shall ordinarily be given only to those recognised schools which are managed by committees, whose constitution is approved by the District Superintendent and which, with the aid of the grant to be given, can adopt a scale of establishment not lower than that prescribed by Government from time to time. This rule shall only be relaxed with the previous approval of Government. Before grant is given to a school, reasonable local contribution shall be required.
54. Every application for inclusion of schools in the district plan and for eligibility for grant out of the District Education Fund, shall be submitted to the District Superintendent with full information on the following points in a prescribed form:-
55. Every application for inclusion in the plan or grant-in-aid shall be entered as soon as it is received in a register to be maintained for the purpose, by the District Superintendent.
56. Before placing the application before the Planning Committee the District Superintendent shall get full enquiries made through the subordinate inspectorate and shall also obtain the opinion of the District Education Officer and the Chairman, District Board.
57. After a school has been included in the plan, the District Superintendent may, subject to the general or specific instructions of the Director, sanction a suitable grant provided the funds at his disposal are sufficient to meet the requirement.
58. (a) Grants shall ordinarily be sanctioned for period of three years but the District Superintendent may, at any time during its currency, for reasons to be recorded in writing, increase, reduce, suspend or withdraw a grant.
59. Sanction to a grant shall be conveyed in a form which may be appended to these rules and on the conditions to be stated therein.
60. When a grant is sanctioned, the school authority shall forward to the District Superintendent an agreement on stamped paper to the effect that it will conduct the school, according to the conditions of the grant.
61. Should the Regional Deputy Director or the District Education Officer or the District Inspectress discover that the teachers in any aided school are not properly qualified for their work, that the instruction given is not in an efficient manner, or that discipline is not properly exercised, or that the accounts are not properly kept or that any of the conditions on which the school is getting the grant is not being observed or should he be in any other way dissatisfied with the management of the school, he shall bring the matter to the notice of the school authority and the District Superintendent. If the school authority omits to take necessary action within a reasonable period, the District Superintendent will take necessary action forthwith. Recognition will not be withdrawn ordinarily except at the end of a session, but it may be withdrawn at any time under the special orders of the Regional Deputy Director for reasons to be recorded in writing.
Section VRules for the Education Planning Committee62. An annual plan shall be prepared by the Planning Committee of every district and will contain such particulars as may be required in those rules.
63. Except as otherwise provided, all future grants for expansion and improvement of schools shall be given only for schools included in the annual plan. Thus no new schools opened outside the plan will ordinarily be entitled to receive grants from the District Education Fund.
64. The District Superintendent shall obtain from the Sub-Inspectors, Deputy Inspectors, Chairman, District Board and from other sources, lists of institutions that may be considered by the Education Planning Committee. Fie shall also place before the committee all applications for inclusion in the plan or for grants received by him under rule 52. The Committee shall also consult in the preparation of the plan such other persons and officers as advised by the Director.
65. While examining applications or recommendations for the establishment, expansion or improvement of school, the Education Planning Committee shall consider whether the school will supply a want in the locality, whether the teaching staff in the case of existing schools is competent and adequate how far local resources including the resources of the Committee would be adequate to meet the necessary expenditure, whether special facilities like offer of lands or buildings are available whether the school deserves priority in the context of the over-all needs of the District and the limited resources available and whether the funds in the District Education Fund are sufficient to meet requirements. Special consideration should be given by the Planning Committee to the needs of the scheduled castes, and scheduled tribes and to the necessity of providing increased facilities for the education of girls.
66. The plan should provide, among other things, the following.-
67. The plan shall be submitted to the Director of Public Instruction by the 1st of November of the year preceding the one for which the plan is required. This date may, however, be changed by Government if and when necessary and will not apply to the plans for 1954-55. The Director shall give his-approval to the plan or make such changes as he may consider necessary and intimate his approval within a month of its receipt.
68. Preparation of list of suitable candidates. - (a) A list of suitable candidates for the posts of teacher shall be prepared by the Committee at least once a year. Ordinarily the annual list should be prepared within one month of the publication of results of the Training Schools, but this shall not apply to the list prepared for 1953-54 and 1954-55.
69. The Planning Committee shall meet at least four times in the year and may have to hold more frequent meetings at the time of the preparation the district plan and selection of suitable candidates. The meetings of the Planning Committee will be convened by its Secretary in consultation with its President. The quorum for a meeting will be four but an adjourned meeting may be held without the required quorum. The final decision on the Plan and the list of suitable candidates shall not be taken in the absence of the President.
70. Preliminary steps for the implementation of the Plan shall be taken, well in advance of the academic year.
Section VIProcedure for the construction of the Building of Schools and expenditure to be incurred thereon out of the District Education Fund71. Expenditure may be incurred from the District Education Fund subject to availability of funds towards-
72. The building grant, in the case of school other than Board-managed, shall be given on the following conditions:-
73. All proposals for the construction or additions to or improvements of buildings of Board-managed Schools, and all applications or proposals for the construction of additions to or improvements of the buildings of other schools shall be placed before the Planning Committee.
74. The recommendations of the Planning Committee, relating to the Board-managed Schools, shall be placed before the District Board Education Committee which will give necessary directions to the District Engineer and to its Secretary for the works, subject to the availability of funds from the District Education Fund and subject to the observance of the standard approved by the Director. All construction work, in respect of Board-managed Schools, will be the responsibility of the District Engineer. The District Superintendent of Education will, however, keep a general watch on the progress of work and will inform the District Board Education Committee if the progress is not satisfactory.
75. The recommendations, in respect of other schools, will be considered by the District Superintendent of Education subject to the availability of funds. He may give grants to the local Panchayats or Committee in suitable instalments. He and the subordinate inspectorate staff will be responsible for the supervision of the works in such schools. They will, however, get technical advice and such other assistance as may be necessary, from the District Engineer. The agency for the work of construction and improvements, etc., will ordinarily be the local Panchayat or Committee. No grant shall be paid in full until-
76. Loans may also be given to local Panchayats and Committees for the construction of school buildings subject to such general instructions and conditions as may be laid down by Government.
77. No expenditure may be incurred on building works by the District Board nor any grant given for a single work exceeding Rs. 6,000 or exceeding the amount estimated for an approved standard plan. Proposals involving higher expenditure should be referred to the Director for approval with full particulars and justification.
Section VIIRules for the Examination and Grant for Lower Primary Scholarship78. The District Board shall be responsible for the award and payment of lower primary scholarships. These scholarships shall be of the value of Rs. 3 a month and be tenable for two years. They shall be distributed by thanas, and be open to competition only among pupils of recognised lower primary schools, except that girl candidates shall be allowed to appear from any primary or middle school. Candidates from any such school in the district shall be eligible for the scholarships whether or not the school is situated in the area under the control of the District Board. They shall not be over eleven years of age on the date of the examination (for member of Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes the age-limit is twelve) and no candidate may appear at the examination more than once. A fee of two annas shall be charged from each candidate.
79. A preliminary selection of candidates shall be made by Sub-Inspectors of schools who shall fix centres to which teachers shall send their candidates for examination, provided that no pupil shall be required to attend a centre more than four miles distant from the school. Each Sub-Inspector shall forward to the District Education Officer a list of the eligible candidates from schools under his control. The number of names in the list shall not exceed eight times the number of scholarships available. The District Education Officer shall scrutinise the list and strike out or add names if he thinks this to be necessary. Not more than two candidates shall be selected from any one school.
80. The examination of the candidates thus selected shall be held at the headquarters of the Sub-Inspector or at any other convenient place within his jurisdiction and under arrangements made by the Board. The examination shall be limited to the prescribed course. Written answer will be required in composition and in arithmetic's the rest of the examination will be oral. The oral part of the examination will be conducted by the Centre Superintendents appointed by the Board, who will also set and mark the papers to which written answers are required, unless the Board prefers to make other arrangements. Both in the written and in the oral part of the examination the question should be so framed as to test intelligent understanding, rather than memory alone.
81. The marks assigned to the candidate at the oral and written examination shall be forwarded to the District Education Officer who shall forward them to the Board with his views as to the award of scholarships and with any other remarks which he may deem necessary.
82. The scholarships shall be awarded by the Board in consultation with the District Education Officer and in accordance with these rules. Not more than one scholarship shall ordinarily be awarded to a school, provided that a boy and a girl may gain scholarship from the same school, and provided that the Board may, in other exceptional cases, permit a school to hold more than one scholarship.
83. A District Board shall when awarding scholarships conform to such general rules relating to scholarships as shall, from time to time, be prescribed by Government.
84. Bills for lower primary scholarships tenable in upper primary schools, shall except as hereinafter provided, be countersigned by the Sub-Inspector of schools and shall be submitted by him, to the District Superintendent of Education for payment.
85. In the case of a lower primary scholarship awarded by one District Board and made tenable with the consent of Board in another district, the bills shall be drawn up by the Headmaster of the Schools in which the scholarship is held and presented for payment to the District Superintendent of Education of the former district through the District Superintendent of the latter district.
86. Bills for lower primary scholarship tenable in high schools shall be submitted direct by the Headmaster to the District Superintendent.
143. Issue of Executive Instructions to the District Superintendent of Education by the District Education Officer and others in regard to matters falling in former's statutory jurisdiction as laid down in the Local Self Government Act.
- Executive instructions may be issued to a District Superintendent of Education by his District Education Officer and other superior officers in regard also to matters which fall within his statutory jurisdiction and that the instructions so issued, are to be treated as binding on him in the sense any instruction of a superior officer is binding on his subordinate. When any instruction is issued, in regard to matters referred to above, to a District Superintendent of Education by any of his superior officers, he must act thereon, where he is not required to consult District Board and that he should base his stand thereon (even though his personal views may be different) for the purpose of consultation, where he is required to act up in consultation with the District Board.(G. O. No. 6377, dated the 15th December 1959.)Section VIIIModel Leave Rules for teachers of non-Government Primary and Middle School managed or aided, out of District Education Fund144. Application of Rules.
- These rules may be applied to all teachers of primary and middle schools paid out of District Education Fund, other than those serving in the schools managed by Managing Committees or by the District Board. The Managing Committees of primary and middle schools where these exist, may adopt these rules for the purpose of grant of leave to teachers serving under them. These rules maybe extended to the teachers of such schools after the' decision of the Managing Committees, and these rules have been communicated to the District Superintendent of Education.Note. - In regard to the schools, managed by District Board they may be treated outside the purview of these rules till the District Boards are agreeable to adopt these rules.145. Grants of Leave.
- Leave is not to be granted to any employee as a matter of right. Utmost care should, therefore, be exercised to ensure that leave is not granted to a teacher unless it is absolutely necessary. In short-term vacancies, caused due to absence of teachers on leave, deputation of substitutes should not ordinarily be made, except in a single-teacher schools, and the remaining teachers should be requested to carry on the work and that the question of deputation of substitutes in such schools should be considered, in such cases only when the work is found, for only special reasons, impossible for management without such deputation.Note. - Provision of leave-reserve is being made, on the basis of one per cent of the total number of teachers in the district (including the teachers of Board managed and managing committee-managed Schools), paid out of the District Education Fund. Every effort should be made to see that the work is managed with the leave reserve.(G.O. no. 5801, dated the 21st November 1960)Sub-Section I1.
2. Definitions. - In these rules, unless there is anything repugnant in the subject or context.-
3. Following will be competent to sanction casual leave, leave of absence during the gazetted holidays or vacations, to the class of teachers noted against each
| Class of teachers. | Sanctioning authority. | ||
| (i) | Headmaster of District Board-managed Middle Schools and suchaided Middle Schools as have no managing committees | District Superintendent of Education. | |
| (ii) | Headmaster of middle schools having managing committees. | Secretary of the managing committees of the Schools. | |
| (iii) | Assistant teachers of middle school. | Headmaster of the school. | |
| (iv) | Headmaster and assistant teachers of primary school, other thanthose managed by managing committees. | Sub-inspector of schools. |
4. Application for casual leave, or for leave of absence during gazetted holidays or vacations, shall be made in advance and shall state clearly the date on which the teacher wishes to leave the station and the date on which he proposes to return. Such an application shall ordinarily be submitted at least a week in advance.
5. Casual leave may not be granted for more than 16 days in one calendar year. The unutilised balance of casual leave of one calendar year shall not be combined with casual leave of the succeeding calendar year.
6. A teacher appointed during the course of a year may be granted casual leave in proportion to the number of months (part of a month being treated as full month) he is employed in that year.
7. Casual leave will not be admissible in continuation of vacations.
8. Sundays and holidays (including local holidays) may be both prefixed and suffixed to casual leave but the total period of absence including such holidays, shall not exceed 12 days at a time. Intermediate Sundays and holidays, falling within a period of casual leave, shall be counted as a part of leave.
9. A teacher who seeks permission to leave his station during casual or vacation leave or leave of absence during holiday shall state, in his application, the address or addresses which find him during such leave.
10. A teacher on casual leave shall not be treat as absent from duty and his pay shall not be intermitted. No substitute shall be appointed in place of a person absent on casual leave.
11. Casual leave cannot be claimed as of right. These rules merely prescribed the maximum amount of casual leave which may be granted. The sanctioning authority shall have full discretion not to grant the leave where it is not necessary or when its grant would be opposed to the interests of public service.
12. Casual leave shall not be granted in cases in which some other form of leave be appropriate.
13. Every authority which grants casual leave shall cause a register of such leave to be maintained in the form given below:-
Column 1. - Name and rank of the person to whom casual leave has been granted.Column 2. - Date (s) on which leave begins and ends.Column 3. - Purpose of leave.Column 4. - Signature of the sanctioning authority.Column 5. - Remarks.Sub-Section IIIQuarantine Leave14. Quarantine leave is leave of absence from duty necessitated in consequence of the presence of an infectious disease in the house in which the teacher is actually residing.
15. Quarantine leave may be granted by the authority, competent to sanction casual leave on the certificate of a Medical or Public Health Officer, for a period not exceeding twenty one days. Any leave necessary for quarantine purpose, in excess of this period shall be treated as ordinary leave.
16. Quarantine leave may be granted, when necessary, in continuation of other leave, subject to the maximum mentioned above.
17. A teacher on quarantine leave will not be treated as absent from duty and his pay will not be intermitted.
18. Cholera, small pox, plague, diptheria, typhoid fever and cerebrospinal meningitis will be considered infectious diseases for the purposes of this leave. In the case of chicken pox, no quarantine leave shall be sanctioned unless the Health Officer of the area considers that because of doubt as to true nature of disease, there is reason for the grant of such leave.
19. Medical or Public Health Officer, referred to in rule 18 includes medical officer in charge of a Government (Civil or Military) hospital or dispensary or any hospital or dispensary which is vested in, or is under the control and administration of any local body. In case of a teacher at whose place of duty there is no such hospital or dispensary, the Medical Officer in charge of such a hospital or dispensary situated nearest to the teacher's place of duty shall be deemed to be the Medical or Public Health Officer.
Sub-Section IVOther Kinds of Leave20. Following kinds of leave come under this class-
21. Earned leave. - (1) The earned leave admissible to a teacher every year will be one-eleventh of the period spent on duty reduced by thirty days.
22. Half-pay leave. - Half-pay leave will be earned without any restriction to the limit of accumulation in the course of service, at the rate of 15 days for each completed year of service. Such leave due can be availed of on private affairs as well as on medical certificate. There will be no limit on the half pay leave that can be availed of at a time on medical certificate. In case of leave on half pay for private affairs leave can be granted up to a maximum limit of sixty days in a year or at a time during a year unless the authority competent to sanction the leave has reason to believe that the teacher will return to duty after its expiry.
Explanation. - The term "completed year of service" used in this rule means continuous service of specified duration, and includes period spent on duty as well as on leave (including extraordinary leave).23. Commuted leave. - (1) At his option a teacher can have the half-pay leave due converted into half the amount of full pay leave. Such converted leave will be termed "commuted leave". It will be granted only on medical certificate subject to a limit of 120 days during the entire service.
24. Extraordinary leave. - Extraordinary leave may be granted to a teacher in the following special circumstances :-
25. The rules, contained in this and in the preceding sub-section, apply to all permanent members of the staff of schools, managed or aided out of District Education Fund, and also to such members thereof as have completed three years of active service and are expected to be retained in the service of the schools on the expiry of the leave.
26. Any leave (other than casual leave and quarantine leave) under these rules will be granted by the District Superintendent of Education, but in case of Board-managed Schools, with the approval of the Chairman, and in case of aided middle schools this power will be exercised by the managing committees subject to the approval of the District Superintendent of Education.
27. Leave cannot be claimed as of right. In cases of exigency, leave may be refused or revoked, or leave for a shorter period than that prayed for may be given.
28. Leave may not be granted to a teacher under suspension unless the authority competent to grant leave has reason to believe that the teacher placed under suspension may be honourably exonerated from ail charges and is otherwise entitled to leave.
29. The procedure regarding application for leave, grant of leave etc., shall be regulated as under:-
30. Leave is earned by duty only. For the purpose of this rule a period spent on leave including extraordinary leave (leave without pay) does not count as duty.
31. Except as otherwise provided by these rules-
32. Holidays can only be prefixed or suffixed to the leave,
33. A teacher may be permitted to combine vacation with leave either at the beginning or the end thereof provided that-
34. When a teacher is permitted to prefix holidays to leave, his leave begins on the first day after holidays.
35. When a teacher is permitted to suffix holidays leave, his leave ends on the day on which it would have ended if the holidays had not been suffixed.
36. When a teacher is permitted to combine leave with vacation, his leave begins or ends on the day on which it would have begun or ended if it had not been combined with vacation.
37. No teacher who has been granted leave on medical certificate may return to duty without first producing a medical certificate of fitness. A teacher who has been granted leave for reasons of health, even though such leave was not actually granted on medical certificate, may be required by the authority which granted the leave to produce a similar certificate.
38. Absence from duties without sanction of leave except due to sudden illness (on medical grounds) shall be treated as misconduct and shall be dealt with under disciplinary rules.
39. No teacher on leave can take any service or accept any employment without obtaining previous sanction of the authority empowered to appoint him.
Sub-Section VILeave Salary40. A teacher on earned leave shall be entitled to leave salary at a uniform rate equal to the average monthly pay earned during 12 complete months preceding the month in which the leave commences.
41. A teacher on half pay leave shall be entitled to leave salary equal to half the leave salary admissible on earned leave.
42. A teacher on commuted leave will be entitled to leave salary equal to twice the amount admissible under rule 41.
43. A teacher on extraordinary leave is not entitled to any leave salary.
Sub-Section VIIMaternity Leave44. Maternity leave may be granted to a female teacher of a primary or middle school on the production of a certificate from a Medical Officer in charge of any hospital or dispensary run by Government or a local body, by the District Superintendent of Education and in case of teachers of Board-managed Schools with the consent of the Chairman of the District Board. As regards aided schools managed by approved managing committees, this power will be exercised by such managing committees with the approval of the District Superintendent of Education.
45. The period of such leave may extend up to a date two months subsequent to the date of its commencement or four weeks subsequent to the date of confinement, whichever is earlier.
46. Leave salary during such leave shall be equal to pay drawn by the teacher at the time of taking leave.
47. Leave of any other kind may be granted in continuation of Maternity leave, if the request for its grant is supported by a medical certificate. Maternity leave shall not be debited against leave account and will be treated as special leave on full pay.
Sub-Section VIIIMiscellaneous48. The earned leave to the credit of a teacher on the 1st April 1960 under the rules previously in force will be carried forward and there will be no retrospective calculation of such leave.
49. For half pay leave, it will be necessary to make retrospective calculation in respect of such leave for the entire continuous service of a member in service. The half pay leave to be carried forward under these rules will therefore, be the total half pay leave earned in respect of completed years of service on the 1st April, 1960 reduced by the amount of the half pay leave on private affairs and on medical certificate availed of prior to that day. If this calculation results in minus balance, it should be adjusted against the half pay leave that will be earned subsequently.
50. Grant of half pay leave on medical certificate and commuted leave will also continue subject to the production of medical certificate from the prescribed medical authority and for a period not exceeding that recommended by such Medical Officer.
Section IIIMunicipalities146. The Municipal Act.
- The following are the provisions of the Bihar and Orissa Municipal Act (VII of 1922) regarding education :-50.
339. It shall be the duty of an education committee appointed under Section 49, subject to the control of the Commissioners and to the rules made by the State Government.-
340.
341. The State Government may make rules consistent with this Act-
147. Statutory rules for Municipalities.
- The following are the rules framed by Government under Sections 81 and 341 of the Bihar and Orissa Municipal Act(Government notification no. 5246-L.S.G., dated the 2nd May 1925.)148. Rules for grants to Municipalities.
- The following are the rules prescribed by Government to regulate grants to municipalities for educational purposes. These rules apply also to Notified Area Committees and the Patna Municipal Corporation :-(Government notifications no. 1146-E., dated the 21st February 1929; no. 981-Ft.E., dated the 23rd July 1935 and no. 219-E., dated the 3rd February 1944.)| Bauri. | Kanjar. |
| Bantar. | Kurariar. |
| Bhogta. | Lalbegi. |
| Chamar. | Mochi. |
| Chaupal. | Musahar. |
| Dhobi. | Nat. |
| Dom. | Pan. |
| Dusadh (including Dhari or Dharhi). | Pasi. |
| Ghasi. | Rajwar. |
| Halakhor. | Turi. |
| Hari, including Mehtar. |
149. Municipal Budgets.
- The Budget estimates of a municipality are prepared by the Deputy Inspector and are sanctioned by the municipal Commissioners. Copies of the estimates are then forwarded by the municipal Commissioners to the district officer, who, after examining the budget sends extracts showing details of the income and expenditure under the head "Education" to the District Education Officer. The District Education Officer will bring to the notice of the Director any points on which he considers the budget defective. The Director will, if necessary refer the case to Government for orders.(G. O. no. 2154-L.S.G.R., dated the 19th July 1923 and no. 1051 E.R., dated the 23rd July 1927.)150. Grants to Municipalities.
- Grants to municipalities are calculated on two separate scales, one for those which have introduced compulsory education and the other for those which have not. In former case there is no limit to the amount of the non-recurring grant admissible, but the municipality is required to contribute save under general or special sanction of Government, a sum equal to that to be paid by Government subject to a limit of 10 percent of its ordinary income the recurring grant admissible is limited to two-thirds of the cost of 10 percent of the male population of the municipality as recorded at the previous census at Rs. 11 a head and the municipality is required to find from its own funds half as much as is paid by Government. In the latter case the non-recurring grant admissible is 20 percent of the ordinary income of the municipality and the municipality is required to find from its own funds, save under general or special sanction of Government, a sum equal to that to be paid by Government; the recurring grant admissible is limited to the sum given in 1922-23 or half the cost of educating 5 percent of the male population of the municipality as recorded at the previous census at Rs. 8 a head, whichever is greater, and as a condition to any addition to the grant sanctioned for 1922-23, the municipality is required to find from its own funds as much as is paid by Government. In the latter case, too municipalities are required to observe the rules regulating free-studentships contained in Article 317 of the Code. Government also consider that the minimum which any municipality should spend on primary education is 5 percent of its ordinary income, and no increased grant will be made to any municipality unless it undertakes as one of the conditions of the grant, to spend not less than this proportion of its income on primary education.Note. - The condition regarding free-studentships has been relaxed in the case of the municipalities in Saran.(Government Resolution no. 2826-E., dated the 18th August 1925; G. O. no. 5758-E., dated the 10th December 1929; Government Resolution no. 568-ER., dated the 9th September 1932 and G.O. no. 1472-E., dated the 19th April 1924.)151. Municipal Advisers.
- It is the policy of Government whenever possible, to nominate the senior educational officer stationed in each municipality as a member of the Municipal Board. It is the duty of this officer to advise the Commissioners on the requirements of their schools. He should not take an active part in connection with municipal politics and should avoid all action which may with any justice be interpreted as partisan.(G. O. no. 2369-73-E., dated the Nth November 1914; and D.P.I.'s circular no 48, dated the 30th August, 1915)Section IVCompulsory Education152. Primary Education.
- The following is the text of the Bihar and Orissa Primary Education Act (1 of 1919) as amended by Bihar Act XVI of 1939 and Bihar Act XVII of 1946 and Bihar Act IV of 1959.An Act to Provide for The Extension of Primary Education in the State of BiharWhereas it is expedient to provide for the extension of primary education in the State of Bihar.And whereas it is expedient to amend the Bihar and Orissa Primary Education Act, 1919 in the manner hereinafter appearing, it is hereby enacted as follows -1.
2. In this Act unless there is anything repugnant in the subject or context:-
3.
4.
5. Where a notification under Section 3 is in force in any area, the parent of every child shall, in the absence of reasonable excuse as hereinafter provided, and if such a child ordinarily resides in such an area, cause such a child to attend a recognised primary school in such an area.
6. A parent shall be deemed to have reasonable excuse within the meaning of Section 5 for failure to cause a child to attend a recognised primary school in any of the following cases:-
7.
8.
9.
10. An application to a Magistrate under Section 7 and a complaint to a Magistrate under Section 8 or Section 9 may be made on behalf of the school committee by such person as may be authorised by the committee in this behalf.
11. The State Government may of its own motion or on the application of the local authority by notification exempt the children of any class of persons or any community reading in the area or any specified part of the area under the control of the local authority from the operation of this Act or may direct the local authority to make such separate provision for the education of the children of such class of persons or such community as the State Government may deem fit.
12. Free Primary Education Cess. - The State Government may, by notification.
13. Rate of free primary education cess. - (1) The free primary education cess shall-
(a)in any municipality constituted under the Bihar and Orissa Municipal Act, 1922 (B. arid O. Act VII of 1922), and in any area specified in a notification issued under sub-section (1) of Section 388 of that Act be six and a quarter percent of the tax on a holding under clause (6) of subsection (1) of Section 82 or under clause (6) of Section 389 as the case may be, of that Act and shall be recoverable in the same manner as if it were such tax;(b)in the area to which the Patna Municipal Corporation Act, 1951 (Bihar Act XIII of 1952), applies, be six and a quarter percent of the tax on a holding under clause (a) of Section 123 of that Act and shall be recoverable in the same manner as if it were such tax; and(c)in any other area, other than a cantonment, be six and a quarter percent of the total rent which is payable by a raiyat, or if no rent is actually payable would on a reasonable assessment be payable during the year, for any land by a raiyat or by any other person in actual use of occupation thereof and shall be recoverable in the same manner as if it were such rent.14. Liability to pay school fees. - The parent of every child attending a recognised primary school shall be liable to pay such fees as may be fixed by the local authority:
Provided that in any area where the free primary education cess has been imposed under this Act, no tuition fees shall be payable:Provided further that in any area, where free primary education cess has not been imposed but in respect of which a notification under Section 3 of this Act has been issued, the parent of a child liable to pay fees under this Section may apply to the School Committee for remission of such fees and the School Committee shall hold an enquiry into the application and on being satisfied that the applicant is unable to pay the fees, remit such fee wholly or in part.15. All primary schools maintained by a local authority in any area in which this Act is in force shall be open to inspection by any officer appointed in this behalf by the State Government.
16. If the State Government is of opinion that a local authority has made default in any of the requirements of this Act, the State Government may, by notification stating the grounds of such order, cancel any notification which has been issued under section 3, or may make such other orders as the State Government may deem fit.
17. If the local authority does not appoint a school committee under the provision of this Act, the local authority shall itself exercise all the powers conferred and perform all the duties imposed by or under this Act upon a school committee so appointed.
18.
153. Statutory rules under the Bihar Primary Education (Amendment) Act, 1959.
- The following are the rules framed by Government in exercise of the power conferred by Section 18 of the Bihar and Orissa Primary Education Act (1 of 1919) as amended by the Bihar Primary Education (Amendment) Act XVII of 1946 and Bihar Act IV of 1959.(Government notification no. 881-E., dated the 2nd March, 1920, no. 3840-E., dated the 31st December 1924; and no. 3064-E., dated the 12th July 1935.)1. In these rules-
2. The District Education Officer in charge of the area concerned is prescribed as the educational authority for the purpose of sub-sections (1) and (7) of Section 2 of the Act.
3. The following shall generally be considered to be adequate provision for primary education for the purposes of clause (b) of sub-section (2) of Section 3 of the Act.-
4. Applications by the local authority for permission to issue a notification under sub-section (b) of section 3 of the Act shall be made at least three months before the date on which the notification is to be issued and at least six months before the date from which primary education is to be made compulsory, provided that the State Government may relax this rule in special cases. The application shall enclose a copy of the resolution passed at the general meeting specially called in this behalf under clause (a) of sub-section (2) of Section 3 of the Act and shall state the number of members present at the meeting and the number of votes recorded for and against the resolution. It shall be addressed to the Secretary to the Government in the Education Department through the District Officer, the Commissioner and the Director of Public Instruction, and shall be accompanied by-
5. A notification under sub-section (1) of section 3 of the Act issued by the State Government shall be accompanied by-
6. The local authority or the Basic Education authority as the case may be, by a resolution passed at an ordinary meeting appoint a school committee under sub-section (1) of Section 4 of the Act.
7. Each such school committee shall consist of not less than five or more than seven members including a local officer of the Education Department not below the rank of Sub-Inspector of schools, who shall be nominated by the Director of Public Instruction to be an ex-officio member of each committee. Of the ordinary members at least half shall be members of the local authority or the Basic Education Board as the case may be, while the remainder shall be residents of the locality The appointment of ordinary members who are not also members of the local authority or the Basic Education Board as the case may be, shall be subject to the approval of the District Officer. The members shall choose their own Chairman and Secretary.
8. The school Committee shall be reconstituted whenever all the members of the local authority are elected or appointed afresh, as the case may be, and resume office or in the case of Basic school committee whenever the Basic Education authority for that area is reconstituted. An ordinary member may at any time be removed by the local authority or the Basic Education authority as the case may be, by a resolution passed at an ordinary meeting. Any member, who fails to attend six consecutive meetings shall cease ipso facto to be member.
9. Subject to the provisions of the Act under which the local authority concerned or the Basic Education authority is constituted, the duties and powers of a school committee shall consist:-
10. Any local authority or the Basic Education Board as the case may be, with the sanction of the Commissioner or the Bihar Basic Education Board as the case may be, and subject to the control of the State Government may from time to time make rules as to-
11. The proceedings of the committee shall be laid before the local authority or the Basic Education Board, as the case may be, for inspection every month.
12. Copies of the proceedings of all meetings of the committee shall be sent by the local authority or the Basic Education Board to the District Education Officer in charge of the areas concerned and to the Regional Deputy Director of Education for their information. The Regional Deputy Director to whom the District Education Officer may refer, if necessary, shall have the right to comment on the proceedings and the local authority or the Basic Education Board as the case may be, shall direct the committee to take such comment into consideration. In case of a difference of opinion either the local authority or the Basic Education Board authority or the Regional Deputy Director may refer the matter to the Commissioner for decision,
13. The local authority or the Basic Education Board, as the case may be, if the number of schools concerned is more than 25 and is of opinion that one committee cannot adequately supervise so many schools, may appoint separate school committees for separate portions of the area concerned, provided that not more than two such committees shall be appointed unless there are more than 50 schools and so in proportion for any larger number.
153A. The Primary Education Rules, 1959.
- In exercise of the powers conferred by sub-section (1) read with clause (e) of sub-section (2) of Section 18 of the Bihar and Orissa Primary Education Act, 1919, the Governor of Bihar is pleased to make the following rules, namely :-1. Short title and commencement. - (1) These rules may be called the Bihar Primary Education Rules, 1959.
3. Authority to assess and collect cess. - (1) The authority to assess and collect the cess shall-
(a)in any municipality constituted under the Bihar and Orissa Municipal Act, 1922 (B. & O. Act VII of 1922), and in any area specified in a notification issued under sub-section (1) of Section 388 of that Act, be the authority empowered under that Act to assess and collect tax on a holding under clause (b) of sub-section (1) of Section 82, or under clause (6) of Section 389, as the case may be, of that Act;(b)in the area to which the Patna Municipal Corporation Act, 1951 (Bihar Act XIII of 1952), applies, be the authority empowered under that Act to assess and collect the tax on a holding under clause (a) of Section 123 of that Act; and(c)in any area, other than cantonment area and the areas referred to in clauses (a) and (b) of sub-rule (1) be the Revenue Officer in charge of the area and the collection of the cess shall be made by the same agency through which rent payable by raiyats to the State Government is collected.4. Maintenance of accounts, registers and records. - (1) For collection of the cess in areas, mentioned in clauses (a) and (b) of sub-rule (1) of rule 3, demand notices shall be issued; receipts shall be granted to payers and accounts maintained in forms and registers, prescribed for the purpose under the Municipal Account Rules (Recovery of Taxes), after making suitable insertions and consequential alterations therein.
5. Deposits of proceeds of cess in Government Treasury. - (1) The proceeds of the cess realised in the area mentioned in clauses (a) and (b) of sub-rule (1) of rule 3 shall, after educating ten percent thereof as collection charges, be deposited in the Government Treasury under the head "IX-Land Revenue - miscellaneous Education Cess".
6. Audit of accounts. - The accounts maintained by the authorities under rule 4 may from time to time be audited by such authority as may be directed by the State Government in this behalf.
(G.O. No. VII/R8-02/59-205-E, dated 9th January 1964).Section VRates of pay approved by State Government for Staff of all Non-Government Recognised Middle and Primary Schools in the State of Bihar154. Rates of pay in Non-Government recognised middle and primary schools.
- The following rates of pay have been prescribed by State Government for non-Government recognised middle and primary schools with effect from the 1st April, 1956.| Middle and Primary Schools | ||||
| Qualification of the teachers. | [Prescribed scales of pay.] [Now see new Pay Scales.] | |||
| Rs. | ||||
| 1. | Trained graduates .. .. | 100-5-125-E.B.-4-145-3-175 | ||
| 2. | Untrained graduates or trained Intermediates. | 70-3-85-E.B.-4-105-2-115. | ||
| 3. | Untrained Intermediates or trained Matriculates. | 50-2-70-E.B.-2-90. | ||
| 4. | Trained Non-Matriculates ... ... | 40-2-50-E.B.-1-61-2-75. | ||
| 5. | Untrained Matriculates ... ... | 40-2-50-E.B.-1-60. | ||
| 6. | Untrained Non-Matriculates and trained U.P.s. | 30-1 (bi)-40 | ||
| (G.O. No. 8896, dated the 22nd December, 1956) | ||||
| 1. | Weaving teachers (instructor) employed in Middle and PrimarySchools and eligible to be treated as trained Matriculates. | 50-2-70-E.B.-2-90. | ||
| 2. | Weaving teachers (instructor) employed in Middle and PrimarySchools and eligible to be treated as trained Non-Matriculates. | 20-2-50-E.B.-1-60. | ||
| (G.O. No. 4632, dated the 30th July 1957 andG.O. no. 1373, dated the 13th March 1958) | ||||
| Senior and Junior Trained Women Teachers | ||||
| 1. | Matric Senior Trained .. .. | 50-2-70-E.B.-2-90. | ||
| 2. | Non-Matric Senior Trained .. | 40-2-50-E.B.-1-61-2-75. | ||
| (G.O. no. 36-E, dated the 3rd January 1950 andno. 8896, dated the 22nd December 1956.) |
155. Clarification regarding equivalent of certain qualifications.
- The following instructions are issued in this connection.-156. Age-limits of teachers to be appointed in primary and middle schools.
- The following age restrictions in respect of candidates seeking appointment as teachers are, laid down :-157. Special cases where condonation of the age-limit prescribed above may be necessary.
- There may be certain special cases where the Planning Committee may consider it desirable to condone the age-limit laid down above, for example, there may be a matriculate who took up teaching in a private unaided school for a number of years after passing the matriculation examination, without getting trained. He might have exceeded the age-limit prescribed vide paragraph (b) above but such a person may be ideally suited for appointment as a teacher in view of his long and useful teaching experience. Again there may be a trained teacher who might have exceeded the age-limit laid down in paragraph 1 (a) above but who has got very long and meritorious teaching experience and may be considered very suitable for appointment. In such cases if the District Planning Committee is thoroughly satisfied that it is a fit case where the excess of age should be condoned, a reference shall be made to the Regional Deputy Director of Education recommending the condonation with adequate reasons. Power to condone the excess age in such special cases has been delegated to the Regional Deputy Director of Education who shall pass necessary orders, after satisfying himself whether each particular case justifies condonation or not.No candidate who is over-age will be appointed as a teacher in any primary or middle school maintained or aided out of the District Education Fund unless and until the prior approval of Regional Deputy Director of Education,concerned, condoning the excess of age has been obtained.(G.O. no. 90S, dated the 23rd February 1955.)Section VIThe Relations Between Educational Officers on the one hand and Officers in the Executive Service and Local Bodies on the other158. Responsibilities in the matter of primary education.
- The general responsibility for primary education in each district rests with the District Superintendent of Education. At the same time the critical inspection of these schools and the supervision of the educational work done therein are part of the duties of all the educational inspection officers of Government, while the executive officers of Government also are required to interest themselves in education. Should the Chairman of a District Board propose any action that is repugnant to the provision of the Act, the rules and Government instruction it will be the duty of the District Superintendent of Education to point out the irregularity to him courteously and to act only in accordance with the provisions of the Act, rules and instructions.(G.O. no. 24842, dated the 13th September 1954,)159. Responsibilities in the matter of secondary education.
- With the exception noted in the above article the general responsibility for secondary education in each district rests with the Department. It is, however, the wish of Government that administrative officers generally should interest themselves in the progress of the numerous schemes of educational reforms which are being brought forward, and that educational officers should invite the co-operation and obtain the advice of administrative officers to as large an extent as may be possible. Their visits to schools and their suggestions with regard to such matters as improvements in accommodation, the acquisition of new sites and general educational policy should be welcomed. The Regional Deputy Director of Education should consult the Commissioners in cases where a considerable expenditure of public money is likely to be involved and generally in any case where a proposal is made involving large additional staff or any important change of policy. They should also consult Commissioners in all important matters concerning high schools, such as proposal for recurring grants, new or additional buildings, change or extension of site, and starting of new schools or hostels, before any definite line of action is taken. The co-operation of the District Officer should also be secured in such cases by previous consultation. The Regional Deputy Director of Education and District Education Officer should keep themselves in touch with the Commissioners and District Officer and see them from time to time and apprise them of all important matters of administration and political significance and of educational plans.(G.O. no. 24487, dated the 25th September 1953.)Chapter III
Government Professional Colleges
Section IGeneral160. Scope of these rules.
- These rules apply to all Government Professional Colleges. They are supplemented, but not modified by the rules contained in the succeeding sections.161. Management.
- Every Government Professional College must be under the management of a Governing Body and must be conducted in accordance with the regulations of the Department.162. Submission of returns.
- Every Government Professional College is required to submit punctually and in the prescribed forms such annual and periodical returns as may be required by the Department.163. Liability of inspection.
- Every Government Professional College with its accounts registers and other records must be open at all times to inspection by the Director, by the Commissioner of the Division or by any other officer or officers authorised by the State Government to conduct such an inspection.164. Admission and withdrawal of students.
- The following general rules regarding admission, leave and absence are to be observed:-165. Discipline.
- The Principal of a Government Professional College is responsible for the maintenance of discipline in accordance with the rules of the Department. The Principal must report at once to the Director all cases in which rustication or expulsion has been inflicted, The cases in which an appeal may be made by a student from an order of the Principal of a Government College are indicated in rule (7) of Article 171.(G.O. no. 308-E. P., dated the 13th February 1918.)166. Attendance at political meetings, etc.
- Students of a Government Professional College are not permitted to become or to continue to be members of a political organisations or to attend or take part in political meetings or demonstrations, or in the organisation or arrangements for the conduct of any such meeting or demonstration. Any breach of this rule will be regarded as serious offence. Should any doubt arise as to whether a meeting, demonstration or organisation is or is not of a political nature, the Principal shall refer the matter to the Director and act under his direction. Where there is no time to refer a doubtful case to the Director, the Principal shall consult the District Magistrate and act under his advice.(Government Resolution no. 2264-E., dated the 22nd October, 1942 and Government notification no. 287-E., dated the 5th February 1943.)167. Other meetings.
- The Principal in consultation with the President or Chairman of the Governing Body of the college may prohibit students from attendance at any meeting which they jointly deem unsuitable or unseemly.(D.P.I.'s Circular no 42, dated the 23rd October 1914.)168. Membership of outside clubs, etc.
- Any student on the rolls of a Government Professional College who wishes to join or to continue to be a member of any club, society or organisation outside the college must obtain the approval of the Principal before doing so. Any breach of this rule will be regarded as a serious offence. In granting or withdrawing recognition to clubs, societies or organisations, the Principal shall be guided by instructions issued by the Director from time to time. If the Principal has any doubt about the suitability of any outside club, society or organisation, which any student wishes to join or of which any student wishes to continue to be a member, he shall refer the matter to the Director for orders.(Government Resolution no 2264-E., dated the 22nd October 1942 and Government notification no. 287-E., dated the 5th February 1943.)169. Clubs in Government Professional Colleges.
- No club or society may be started or maintained in any Government Professional College without the approval of the Principal. Suitable members of the staff of the college will be selected by the Principal as honorary members of all such colleges, clubs and societies and will be required to interest themselves in their progress and welfare. No person, who is not at the time a member of the college, may be a member of or may address a meeting of any such club or society, save at the invitation of a person duly authorised by the Principal,(D.P.I.'s Circular no. 40, dated the 23rd October 1914.)Section IISupplementary Rules for Government Professional Colleges170. Governing Body.
- For each Government Professional College there is a Governing Body, some members of which are appointed ex-officio whilst the remainder are appointed by the State Government on the recommendation of the Director. The Commissioner of the Division is ex-officio President and the Principal of the college ex-officio Secretary.171. Duties of the Governing Body.
- The duties of the Governing Body are-172. Powers delegated to the Governing Bodies of Government Professional Colleges.
- The following powers are exercised by the Governing Bodies of Government Professional Colleges:-173. Library Rules.
- The following are the rules for the management of the libraries of Government Professional Colleges :-174. Attendance by Principals at lectures given by other members of the staff.
- The following instructions shall be followed in regard to the attendance by Principals at lectures given or classes conducted by subordinate members of the staff:-175. Vacations and holidays.
- The maximum number of holidays permissible for a Governmental Professional College during the year is 165 inclusive of Sundays and local holidays. The summer vacation must not exceed twelve weeks and one day in length. Subject to these limits the annual list of holidays for each college is sanctioned by the Governing Body, but a copy of the list must be sent to the Director for his information.(G. O. no. 3254, dated the 12th August 1909, G. O. no, 321-E.R., dated the May 1930, D. P. I.'s letter no. 3604. dated the 10th March 1909.)Notes. - (i) Additional holidays in honour of visitors may only be granted at the request of a District Officer, District Judge or officer of higher status. Such holidays should not exceed one day in duration except when they are granted by the Governor, Minister or the Vice-Chancellor, It is the duty of the Principal to see that this rule is observed.(D. of P. item 79 and D. O. circular no. 166, dated the 23rd February 1923.)176. Purpose of the colleges.
- Teachers' Training Colleges in the State are maintained by the State Government for the professional training of actual or prospective graduate teachers of secondary and other kinds of schools and prospective sub-inspectors of schools and other officers of the Department. The College fulfils the following aims :-177. Governing Body.
- The colleges are managed by a Governing Body. The functions of the Governing Body are laid down in Section II of this Chapter.178. Length of Course.
- The length of the course shall be one academic year. Working hours in the academic year shall not be fewer than 1,600. The college session shall commence in July and end in June.179. Size of classes and number of students.
- Not fewer than 100 graduates are admitted annually in the Training Course (Diploma in Education). No fee shall be charged to the pupil-teachers.180. Application for admission.
- Candidates are to apply to the Principal concerned for admission in terms of the prospectus issued each year by the Principal of each such college. They are selected for admission on the basis of their academic qualifications and tests, personal interview and participation in camp and community activities as prescribed from time to time by the Department.181. Age-limits.
- The age-limit for admission is 30 years in general and 35 years for the members of Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes.182. Residence.
- To ensure successful community life, residence on the college campus will be provided for all trainees and teachers as far as practicable. Training colleges should be co-educational institutions.183. Private students and future employment.
- No guarantee of future employment under Government is given to students who, not being already Government servants, enter the college and successfully complete their course. They are however, eligible for appointment as teachers in Secondary and other kinds of schools and Sub-Inspectors and to other administrative posts in the Subordinate Educational Service in the Department.184. Examination and assessment.
- The final examination at the end of the course will be called the Diploma in Education Examination. It will be held in two parts. The practical part consists of (a) training in community life activities, (b) training in craft, (c) training in teaching practice. The theoretical part comprises of (a) principles of Education and School Organisation, (b) Educational Psychology and Health Education, (c) Methods of training, and (d) Current Educational problems.185. Text-books to be provided by students.
- Students must provide themselves with the text-books recommended by the Department.186. Medium.
- The medium of teaching shall ordinarily be Hindi. The medium of examination will be Hindi or any of the recognised regional languages in High, Basic and Middle schools. English should be an alternative medium.187. Leave to students.
- The authority competent to grant leave, other than casual leave, to a Government servant deputed for training is the same authority which is empowered to grant the leave in ordinary course. Casual leave may be granted by the Principal.188. Joining time not admissible to officers deputed for training.
- Government servants deputed for training are not entitled to joining time but are treated as officers on tour and are only allowed such time as may be required for transit. They are entitled to travelling allowance for their initial journey to, and final journey from, the college, but not to any halting allowance.(G.O. no. 140-E., dated the 9th January 1929.)Section IVJanta Colleges189. Purpose of the colleges.
- Janta colleges are maintained by the State Government for the professional training of graduate teachers for Diploma in Social Education. They also give three months' training for certificate course in Social Education to Village Level Workers for running Social Education Centres to villages.Section VThe Government College of Health and Physical Education190. Purpose.
- The Government College of Health and Physical Education is an institution maintained by the State Government for the professional training of actual and prospective teachers (both men and women) in physical culture. Its further object is-191. Governing Body.
- The college is managed by a Governing Body consisting of the Commissioner, Patna Division as President, the Principal of the college as ex-officio member and Secretary, the Regional Deputy Director of Education, Patna Division as ex-officio member and four non-official members who are appointed by the State Government for a term of three years. The functions of the Governing Body are laid down in Section I of this Chapter.192. Courses and examination.
- The college prepares students for-193. College Sessions.
- The session begins in July and ends in June. The maximum number of seats available for the two types of courses is 145. Candidates are admitted free of any tuition fee.194. Application for admission.
- Candidates are to apply to the Principal. Government College of Health and Physical Education, for admission. Persons already in service should submit their applications through their controlling officers. No candidates will be finally admitted without a personal interview. Final selection of candidates for admission is made by the Principal.195. Stipends.
- Monthly stipends of Rs. 30 each are awarded to all the 145 trainees (both men and women) who join the Diploma in Physical Education and Certificate in Physical Education Course for the whole period of nine months' training. Stipendiary students are required to execute agreements binding themselves to complete the course to the satisfaction of the Principal (save when exempted by the Principal on medical grounds) and, thereafter, to serve as teachers in Government educational institutions, if required, for not less than three years and in default to refund the amount of the stipends paid to them.196. Private students and future employment.
- No guarantee of future employment under Government is given to students, who not being already Government servants, enter the college and successfully complete their training course. They are, however, eligible for appointment as drill masters or physical education instructor in educational institutions or in the Physical Education Supervisory staff or college staff.197. Hostel accommodation.
- Free hostel accommodation is provided for sufficient number of students (both men and women). They are, however, charged for electricity. Students have the option of residing as day scholars under satisfactory condition of residence.198. Leave to students.
- The authority competent to grant leave, other than casual leave, to a Government servant, deputed for training is the same authority which is empowered to grant the leave. Casual leave may be granted by the Principal.199. Joining time not admissible to officers deputed for training.
- Government servants deputed for training are not entitled to joining time but are treated as officers on tour and are only allowed such time as may be required for transit.They are entitled to travelling allowance for their initial journey to, and final journey from, the college, but not any halting allowance.Chapter IV
Schools for General Instruction
Section I - GeneralNotes. - (i) The rules in this section apply to all Government, Board, Municipal, Aided and Unaided schools recognised lay the Department, and are supplemented but not modified by the regulations for special classes of schools contained in Sections V to VIII of this Chapter.(ii)Unless in any case the contrary is stated the powers relating to secondary schools which are assigned to District Education Officer by the rules contained in this Chapter are exercised by the Inspectress of Schools in the case of secondary schools for girls.200. Recognition of High Schools (including Sarvodaya High Schools).
- A High School is said to be recognised when it is permitted to present pupils at the Secondary School Examination. The authority competent to grant permission to a school to present candidates at the Secondary School Examination is defined in the Bihar School Examination Board Act (Bihar Act VII of 1952) as amended by Bihar School Examination Board (Amendment) Act, 1959.Applications from schools for recognition as High Schools should be submitted to the Inspectress of Schools, Bihar or the District Education Officer before the 1st of February in the year previous to that for which recognition is desired. Every application for such recognition should be accompanied by a detailed statement on the following points:-200A.
The number of rooms and dimensions necessary for High School must have for administrative and other purposes (1) a room for Head master (2) a room for office (3) a library (4) a Teachers' Common room (5) a students Common room and (6) a miscellaneous or store room beside water sheds for classes, they should have also four class rooms and one for additional subject. This should be regarded as minimum for 4 class schools.(Letter no. 5600-5 dated 30.10.1947 from Secretary Secondary Board)201. Recognition of Higher Secondary/Multi-purpose Schools.
- A Higher Secondary/Multi-purpose School is said to be recognised when it is permitted to present pupils at the Higher Secondary Examination. The authority competent to grant permission to present candidates at the Higher Secondary Examination is defined in the Bihar School Examination Board Act (Bihar Act VII of 1952) as amended by Bihar School Examination Board (Amendment) Act 1959A school seeking recognition as a Higher Secondary School will have to apply through the District Education Officer/Inspectress of Schools Bihar to the Board of Secondary Education with a certificate from the Sub-divisional Education Officer/ District Inspectress of schools of the area, as the case may be, that the school concerned is in a position to meet the minimum conditions in respect of lands, buildings, staff, etc., laid down for recognition. The school will have to indicate whether it seeks recognition as a Higher Secondary School for Humanities only or for Humanities as well as Science groups. It will have also to indicate if it would provide for an additional vocational subject group, in which case the school will have to be considered for being recognised as a Multi-purpose Higher Secondary School. Every application for such recognition will be accompanied by a detailed statement of existing facilities in the school regarding accommodation, furniture, equipment, library, staff as noted below. The statement will be certified by the Headmaster/Headmistress and Secretary of the School and will be verified by the Sub-divisional Education Officer/District Inspectress of Schools, as the case may be.On receipt of the application from a school for recognition as a Higher Secondary School, the Board of Secondary Education will appoint a Special Board, consisting of an Inspecting Officer in Class I of the Bihar Educational Service and at least one member to be nominated by the President of the Board of Secondary Education to inspect the school and report on its eligibility for being converted into a Higher Secondary School.(Government Resolution no. 4719, dated the 10th November 1960.)The Special Board will report on the following points :-202. Recognition of Middle Schools.
- (i) The power of recognising schools as middle schools rests with the Sub-divisional Education Officer in the case of a boys' school and with the District Inspectress of Schools in case of a girls' school. No school should be recognised as a middle school unless the headmaster is at least a trained I. A. or I. Sc.(ii)The Second Teacher has passed the Secondary School Examination or is middle trained.(G.O. no. 326, dated the 19th January 1957.)Note. - (1) A middle school may be recognised either until further or for a specific period; in the latter case the order granting recognition should state that the recognition will be continued after the period specified in the order unless certain conditions (to be enumerated) are fulfilled.(G. O. no. 5808, dated the 14th September 1957.)203. Recognition of Primary Schools.
- The power to recognise a school as a primary school rests with the Deputy Inspector of Schools. In case of girls' schools the power rests with the Deputy Inspectress of Schools.(G. O. on. 4319, dated the 21st November 1958 and no 3780 dated the 29th September 1959.)Note. - In the case of Primary Sanskrit Schools the power of recognition rests with the Sub-divisional Education Officer acting on the recommendation of the inspecting staff for Sanskrit studies. If there is a difference of opinion between the recognising authority and the inspecting officer for Sanskrit studies the matter should be referred to the District Education Officer.(Government Resolution no, 724-E., dated the 30th January 1929.)204. Association of names of eminent persons with educational institutions.
- No educational institution which adopts the name of the Prime Minister or of any other eminent person should be granted recognition unless the consent of the Prime Minister or the persons concerned has been obtained before hand.(D. P. I.'s letter no. 3012, dated the 14th August 1958.)205. Withdrawal or withholding of recognition.
- Recognition shall only be withdrawn or withheld for reasons to be recorded in writing on one of the following grounds:-206. Withdrawal of approval to the constitution of the managing committee.
- For reasons specified in clause (e) of the aforesaid rule, the President, Board of Secondary Education in respect of Secondary Schools and District Education Officer in respect of Elementary Schools, instead of withdrawing or withholding recognition may withdraw the approval of the constitution of the Managing Committee and make such arrangement for the management of the school as he considers suitable, pending proper reconstitution of the managing committee. For the purpose of this rule, Elementary Schools will mean "Primary and Middle Schools".(G.O. no. 2838, the 16th May 1959.)207. Change of status in schools maintained by local bodies.
- In no case should sanction be accorded to a change in the status of any school maintained by local body until the approval of that body has been obtained.Note. - The expression "change of status" does not mean the conversion of a recognised school into an unrecognised school, or vice versa, it means an alteration in the standard up to which the school is recognised, as when a lower Primary school becomes an upper Primary school.(D.P.I.'s circular no. 46, dated the 16th October 1913.)208. Change of status requires sanction in writing.
- No change of status can be recognised unless it has been sanctioned in writing by the proper authority.(D.P.I.'s circular no. 46, dated the 16th October 1913.)209. Liability to inspection.
- Every recognised school, with its account books, registers and other records, must be open to inspection at ail reasonable hours by the authorised inspecting officers of the Department, by the executive officers of Government and by any Director or Assistant Director of Health Services or Civil Surgeon or Assistant Surgeon deputed by Government to examine the health of the students or the sanitary condition of the buildings and premises.Note. - In addition to the above any distinguished non-official visitor is ordinarily at liberty to visit a Government school for boys at any time with the assent of the Headmaster or the master in charge of the school. Should, however, the visitor wish to deliver an address, or desire that a holiday should be granted in honour of his visit, the Headmaster should obtain the consent of the President or the Vice-president of the managing committee of the school or, where there is no such committee, the consent of the inspecting officer.(D.P.I.'s circular no. 34, dated the 16th November 1916.)210. Returns and reports.
- Every recognised school must submit punctually in the prescribed form such annual and periodical returns and such other reports as may be required by the Department.(D.P.I.'s circular no. 15897, dated the 6th September 1954 and Government notification no. 636-E. P., dated the 2nd April 1919.)211. Registers.
- The following registers must be maintained :-(i)Admission register, containing-(a)Name of pupil;(b)Father's name and occupation;(c)Name, residence and occupation of guardian;(d)Residence of pupil, whether with parent, guardian, in hostel or in mess;(e)Date of birth (year, month and day);(f)In the case of pupil admitted from another school, the name of the school, the class in which he was reading and the number and date of his transfer certificate;N.B. - Transfer certificate should be filed for reference.(g)Class into which pupil is admitted;(h)Date of admission;(i)Signature of parent or guardian, if it is a case of first admissios to any school and not one of transfer from one school to another;(j)Signature of another respectable gentleman, if it is a case of first admission to any school and not one of transfer from one school to another;(k)Headmaster's signature;(ii)Daily attendance register;(iii)Visitor's book;(iv)Fee register (in schools where fees are levied);(v)Acquittance roll of scholars (in schools where any scholars are reading);(vi)Register of transfer certificates issued;(vii)A book in which the transfer certificates of all pupils joining the school are kept;and in high schools including Sarvodaya high schools.(viii)Attendance register of teachers;(ix)Cash Book;(x)Acquittance roll of teachers;(xi)A contingent register;(xii)An order book;(xiii)A punishment register;(xiv)A stock book of school furniture and equipment;(xv)A book containing the proceedings of the managing committee;(xvi)A log book. This should be a diary kept by the Headmaster of all important events in the life of the school, such, for example, as visits of inspecting officers, and others, celebrations, unusual occurrences in the school and school examinations;(xvii)Abstract Attendance register;(xviii)Teachers' leave register;(xix)Athletic account book;(xx)Library account book;(xxi)Prize account book;(xxii)Progress book containing the scheme of work proposed for each class month by month and the work actually done.(xxiii)Books containing a record of the supervision work done by the Headmaster and Assistant Headmaster;(xxiv)A register showing the results of the examination of candidates for admission, Article 267;(xxv)A register of marks secured at the terminal and the test examinations;(xxvi)An assessment register in the prescribed form;(xxvii)A confidential final assessment register (maintained by the Headmaster);(xxviii)Confidential character rolls of the teachers;(xxix)Service Book of teachers.(G. O. no. 3744-E.R., dated the 22nd August 1932.)Notes. - (1) Although the maintenance of separate registers for the prize, library and athletic funds is required, it is not desirable that there should be separate Savings Bank accounts for each of three funds. Each school should have one consolidated Savings Bank account belonging to each of the different funds.(D.P.I.'s circular no. 19, dated the 10th June, 1919.)212. Curricula.
- The curricula prescribed by the Department must be followed except in so far as special exemption may be granted by the Director.Note. - Class time-table showing (i) the work to be done in each period of the school day, and (ii) the home work to be set to the pupils each day must be hung on the walls of each class room.1. [ The curriculum for classes I to XI of schools in Bihar includes many practical subjects, such as gardening, sowing, cooking, rough carpentry, spinning; and weaving, tailoring, Durri making and agriculture etc. During the course of my visits to schools it has been noticed that proper record of the practical work done by each pupil is not maintained either by the teachers or by the pupils themselves.] [Added by letter no. 4 dated 10th July, 1946.]
2. It is essential that those pupils who can read and write should maintain practical note books of the kind which are maintained by Science students. Such note books not only ensure that the subjects are properly taught; but are excellent means of teaching composition, handwriting and self-expression. In the case of smaller children the records will, of course, be maintained by the teachers in their daily notes of lessons; but should be sufficiently individualistic. This should be made known to all head teachers and management of primary and secondary schools and a note should be written in all inspection reports whether the records and practical note books are being properly maintained or not. The children's practical note books and the teachers' records should be available for inspection by all inspecting officers on the date of their visit.
A disregard of the instructions issued in this circular will be treated as serious inefficiency in the management and inspection of schools."213. Inclusion of dignity of labour in the schools.
- School students particularly those belonging to senior classes should be encouraged to engage in manual work in order to inculcate in them a sense of dignity of labour and to attract their attention and energy to interests which will be educationally beneficial to them and of value to society.In higher classes viz. from class VIII onward, Social Studies in compulsory subject and under practical social work, students should as prescribed in the syllabus be required to do intensive survey of a village or Mohalla or to engage in such programme of social work as may improve sanitation and health, provide facilities for preventive and curative medicines and help the organisation of village assemblies, village sports, village libraries, reading rooms, rural theatres and rural festivals. Manual work and social service should not be regarded as extra curricular activity but should be so integrated with the courses of the schools that at the time of the promotion of the pupils from one class to another an assessment of their work and service should count towards such promotion.Projects and programmes involving manual work should be planned on special occasions like the celebration of the school anniversary or campaigns like Van Mahotsava, etc. These should be organised in such a way as to arouse mass interest and consciousness in Social Education and love for dignity of labour. A few of the projects to be taken up by students are given below by way of suggestions.-214. Teaching of languages at the Secondary School stage.
- The State Government have decided the following principles for adoption on the study of languages at the secondary stage :-215. Significance of National Flag and National Anthem.
- It is considered essential that all educational institutions should make provision in the programme of their work for explaining to the students the significance of the National Flag and National Anthem. They should as a part of the school routine, practise the hoisting of the Flag and the singing of the Anthem. The boys and girls in the educational institutions should be acquainted with the history of National Flag and National Anthem and the correct method of saluting, hoisting and lowering the Flag or singing the National Anthem.(Government of India order no. F-8-61/54-D-7, dated the 4th October, 1954)216. Knowledge of preamble to the Constitution of India.
- It is very desirable that every student should be familiar with the preamble and know it by heart. The students of classes X, XI and class XII of the Sarvodaya High Schools and Higher Secondary Schools including trainees at Training Colleges and Training Schools should learn it by heart in mother tongue (Hindi, English) and students of other classes below class X in their mother-tongue in Hindi. The preamble runs as follows;-"We, THE PEOPLE OF INDIA, having solemnly resolved to constitute India into a SOVEREIGN SOCIALIST SECULAR DEMOCRATIC REPUBLIC and to secure to all its citizens;JUSTICE, social, economic and political;LIBERTY of thought, expression, belief, faith and worship;EQUALITY of status and of opportunity and to promote among them all;FRATERNITY assuring the dignity of the individual and the unity and integrity of the Nation;IN OUR CONSTITUENT ASSEMBLY this twenty-sixth day of November, 1949, do HEREBY ADOPT, ENACT AND GIVE TO OURSELVES THIS CONSTITUTION."(DPI's letter no. 2695, dated the 14th May, 1956 and G.O. no. 7281, dated the 1st October, 1956)217. Text-books.
- Text-books must be selected only from the lists published by the Director.Note. - It is the duty of the class master to see that all the pupils provided themselves with the text-books used in the class.(Government notification no 860-E, dated the 13th May 1913, and R. & O. page 167, rule 3.)218. Keys.
- The use of "keys is strictly prohibited. Any books of this character found in the possession of pupils should be confiscated by the Headmaster and destroyed.(D.P.I.'s circular no. 39, dated 17th October 1914.)219. Residence of pupils.
- Pupils must reside (i) with their parents or an authorised guardian, or (ii) in a hostel or mess approved by the Department.(R. and O. page 554, paragraph 2.)220. School terms.
- There are two school terms recognised by the Department:221. Periodical Examinations.
- Periodical exercises or examinations of an informal kind in the different subjects of the school curriculum should be held by the Headmaster or under his orders. The results obtained by pupils in these exercises or examinations should be recorded, and in cases of doubt should be taken into consideration in determining the annual promotions from class to class.222. Assessment of work and progress of students.
- [Abolished with effect from the S.S. Examination, 1963, vide letter No. 1897 dated 24-6-1963.]223. Formal school examination.
- In every high school there should be either two terminal examinations in each year, or a system of formal weekly tests. The latter system should be adopted' only with the special approval of the District Education Officer. In schools where terminal examinations are held, formal weekly tests should not be held also, though there is no objection to informal weekly exercises.(D.P.I.'s circular no. 24, dated the 24th April 1917.)224. Value to be attached to the different examinations.
- The first terminal examination should cover the courses taught during the first term, while the examination held at the end of the second term should cover the whole course taught during the session. The marks obtained by the pupils at both the examinations should be taken into account in determining promotions. It is left to the discretion of Headmaster or Principal whether to award prizes or school scholarships on the basis of the marks obtained at both the terminal examinations or of those obtained at the second alone. In determining the fitness of pupils to be sent up for the Secondary School Examination, greater importance should be given to the results of the second terminal examination, but the marks obtained at the first examination should also be taken into account. The maximum marks for the second examination may at the discretion of the Headmaster or Principal be fixed at double those for the first.(D.P.I.'s letter no. 5967. dated the 24th June 1918; D.P.I.'s letter no. 8385, dated the 4th September 1918; and D.P.I.'s circular no. 24, dated the 24th April 1917.)225. Distribution of work.
- The Headmaster or the Principal should see that the work of the year is carefully distributed over the two terms and that the assistant masters make arrangements to cover the ground at an even pace.(D.P.I.'s letter no, 5697, dated the 24th June 1918.)226. Restriction on the time to be devoted to examinations.
- Headmasters or Principals should see that the last month of session is not wholly occupied in examinations, but that the expenditure of time on examinations is spread over the whole year. The terminal examination should be held at the end of the term; they should not make more than one week and the examination of all the classes (except perhaps in the case of the test examination for Secondary School Examination) should be held simultaneously. The last terminal examination in a high school other than the test examination should commence on the date not earlier than fourteen days from the date on which the school closes for the Christmas holidays. The papers set for this and the other terminal examinations should not be of more than two hours duration except in the case of the examinations held in class XI. Class promotions must be declared before the end of the term. Assistant masters should not be excused from regular teaching work while they are marking examination papers. This work should be done out of school hours.(D.P.I.'s circular no, 24, dated the 24th April 1917; Resolution of Inspectors' conference, 24th June, 1930; D.P.I.'s letter no. 7409, dated the 26th July, 1932; and D.P.I.'s letter no. 8845. dated the 29th September 1934.)227. Promotions.
- Class promotions are made by the Headmaster/Principal and, except in special cases, e.g., that of a pupil wrongly classified on admission, they should be made only once in the year. The inspecting officers of the Department have the power to grant special promotion to deserving pupils, and to revise the promotions made by the Headmaster. All answer books on the basis of which promotions are given, or the fitness of candidates to appear at the Secondary School Examination is determined should be preserved for at least one year after the last examination of the year, so that they may be scrutinised, if necessary, by inspecting officers.228. Preparation of lessons.
- Headmasters or the Principals are required to see that their assistant teachers adequately prepare their lessons for the day. In a High or Middle and Basic school every teacher must be prepared to show to an inspecting officer, if called upon to do so, notes of the lessons which he proposes to deliver during the day, together with notes of the previous lessons. Separate books should be used for notes of lessons to different classes or on different subjects.229. Private tuition.
- In normal cases students should not need private tuition and both District Education Officer and Headmasters/Principals should use their best endeavours to render it unnecessary. Teachers should not be allowed to undertake private tuition which will in any way interfere with the proper execution of their school duties, including the preparation of lessons at home and the correction of exercises. Teachers in aided and subsidised schools should not also be allowed to undertake private tuitions. For the rules regarding the acceptance of fees for private tuition by Government officers, see Article 824.(G.O. no. 1913-E., dated the 16th March 1950.)230. Breach of agreement by teachers.
- School authorities should report to the District Education Officer any case, in which a teacher has left a school in contravention of the terms of his employment. If the teacher was employed in a High or middle school, the District Education Officer will report the case to the Regional Deputy Director of Education.231. Inspection.
- When an officer of the Department notifies his intention to inspect a High/Higher Secondary and Multi-purpose schools or middle or basic schools, the head teacher should fill up the prescribed inspection form for submission to the officer on his arrival.232. Action to be taken on the notes of Executive and Judicial Officer.
- Copies of all notes by the Commissioner, District Magistrate, District Judge or Sub-divisional Officer, on High/Higher Secondary schools including Sarvodaya schools should be sent by the school authority to the District Education Officer. Copies of their notes on any primary or junior basic school that they may visit, should be forwarded by the Sub-Inspector, or in the case of middle or senior basic schools by the head teacher, to the District Education Officer. The District Education Officer should note what action, if any, has to be taken, and should forward a copy of his orders to the officer who originally noted. That officer if he then considers it necessary, will communicate further with the District Education Officer on the subject either in writing or by consulting. Should it be so desired, reference may be made by either party to the Director through the usual channel or direct, as the case may be. In the case of girls' schools a similar course should be followed, mutatis mutandis except that copies of their notes, should be forwarded to the Inspectress of Schools, Bihar in the case of girls' High schools and to the District Inspectress of Schools in the case of other schools.233. Action to be taken on the notes of members of the Government.
- Should the Governor note in any school inspection book, a copy of his remarks should at once be sent to the District Education Officer. The District Education Officer should note what action has to be taken and should forward to the Director through the Regional Deputy Director of Education forthwith a copy of the Governor's remarks with his notes on the action required. A similar course should be followed in the case of inspection notes by the Ministers. In the case of girls' schools a similar course should be followed, mutatis mutandis except that copies of the notes should be forwarded to the Inspectress of Schools, Bihar in the case of girls' High schools to the District Inspectress of Schools in the case of other schools.234. Holidays in Middle and Primary schools.
- The following instructions in respect of the holidays and vacations to be observed in schools managed by District Boards and schools aided out of the District Education Fund have been issued by Government in accordance with the provisions of rules published under clauses (j), (j1), (j2) and (g) of Section 138 of the Bihar and Orissa Local Self Government Act, 1885 :-235. Holidays in other schools.
- The maximum number of holidays permissible annually, excluding Sundays (except where otherwise shown) but including the birth day of Mahatma Gandhi, Lord Budha, Lord Mahavira, Kunwar Singh, for Sarhool, Republic and Independence Days celebration is as shown below against each of these, three days are intended to cover holidays granted on the occasion of visit of inspecting officers.| Class of schools | No. of holidays | |
| 1. | High/Higher Secondary and Multi-purpose including SarvodayaHigh schools. | 73 |
| 2. | Teachers' Training schools | 81 |
| 3. | Training schools for women | 81 |
| 4. | Government girls middle schools and Senior Basic schools | 71 |
| 5. | Junior Basic schools | 60 |
| 6. | Junior section of Sanskrit Tols which comprises thePrathamaandMadhymaclasses. | 137(including Sundays orPratipadaandAstamis). |
| 7. | The Senior section of madrasas, which comprises theFazil,Alim, MaulviandFauqaniaclasses. | 154(including Sundays and Fridays). |
| 8. | The Junior section of madrasas which comprises theTahtaniaandWastaniaclasses, i.e. class 1 to 7. | 137(including Sundays and Fridays). |
236. List of Holidays.
- Head teachers of Government aided schools are required to submit by the 7th of January of each year a complete list of the holidays, which they propose to observe during the ensuing year for the approval of (1) the Managing Committee, in the case of Government High/Higher Secondary schools for boy and Teachers' Training schools; (2) the Sub-divisional Education Officer in the case of other high schools for boys, (3) District Inspectress of Schools, in the case of High/Higher secondary, middle and training schools for girls; (4) the Deputy Inspector of schools in the case of boys, middle schools; aided directly by Government and (5) Deputy Superintendent of Basic Education in the case of basic schools.(G O no 2345-E, dated the 11th October 1913; Resolution no. 3961-E., dated the 19th November 1925 and G. O. no. 431, dated the 21st November 1958.)237. Other conditions of recognition.
- Every recognised school is required to observe the regulations for the maintenance of discipline and for the admission and withdrawal of pupils, contained in the succeeding sections and also the regulations for fees, fines, and free studentships.Section II - Discipline238. Some standard forms of Punishment.
- The following are some standard forms of punishment:-(i)Imposition.(ii)Detention, including extra drill.(iii)Fines.(iv)Corporal punishment.(v)Rustication.(vi)Expulsion.Note. - (1) The first three of these punishments should be referred by the master who inflicts them to the Headmaster for confirmation; corporal punishment should be imposed only by the Headmaster and only in exceptional cases, Rustication, or expulsion may be imposed by the managing committee but in cases of gross indiscipline the District Education Officer has the power to rusticate a student without consulting the managing committee or if a school is under the direct management of a local body, by the Chairman of that body. The Chairman is required to take the opinion of the District Education Officer before he passes orders.(G. O. no 1695-E dated the 17th September, 1916, Government Resolution no.3268, dated the 5th December 1923; G. O. no. 4318-E., dated the 24th November 1934; G O. no. 2399-E., dated the 22nd October 1942 and Government Resolution no. 728-E. R., dated the 21st July 1954.)239. Expulsion.
- Expulsion should be used only in the case of very grave offences. The conditions which justify its use are these-240. Rustication.
- Rustication should rarely be employed and should not be imposed or less than three months. It may be regarded as alternative to corporal punishment in cases where the parents object to that punishment, or where that punishment is otherwise objectionable.(G.O. No. 1695-E, dated the 17th September, 1915.)241. Appeals.
- In all cases of rustication or expulsion by the managing committee a statement of the case must be drawn up and approved by the managing committee. It should state clearly the nature of the offence committed and the evidence on which the decision of the committee is based. One copy of the order passed must be forwarded immediately to the District Education Officer and another, under registered cover, to the parent or guardian of the pupil. The parent or guardian of a pupil who is punished with rustication or expulsion may appeal to the District Education Officer or Inspectress of Schools, Bihar against the order of the managing committee, provided that any such appeal must be received in the office of the District Education Officer or the Inspectress of Schools, Bihar within 20 days from the date of the receipt by the parent or guardian of the order against which the appeal is made. If no petition of appeal is received in the office of the District Education Officer or the Inspectress of Schools, Bihar within the specified period, the District Education Officer or the Inspectress of Schools, Bihar will confirm such order, or diminish or increase the punishment.In cases of gross indiscipline, the District Education Officer shall have the power to rusticate a student, reading in a school other than that which is under the direct management of a local body, without consulting the managing committee and any appeal from the parents or guardians of such students shall lie to the Regional Deputy Director of Education, whose decision shall be final.In order to deal with the misbehaviour of students sent up for the Secondary School Examination, who are under no obligation to attend the school the good conduct certificate granted by the Headmaster/Principal may under orders of the District Education Officer be withdrawn or withheld. This would disqualify such students from appearing at an examination or being eligible for appointment to any public service. The District Education Officer will have the power to direct a Headmaster/Principal to withhold or withdraw a good conduct certificate in case of proved misbehaviour on the part of ex-students.(G.O. no. 4335, dated the 24th November 1958 and Resolution no. 728-E., dated the 21st July, 1954.)Note. - (1) Pending the decision of the appeal the student rusticated or expelled must not attend school, though his name will continue to be borne on the rolls. If the appeal is allowed, but not otherwise, he will be required to pay fees for the period during which the appeal was under consideration.242. Procedure for disposing of appeals.
- If the Officer to whom the appeal is made considers that the facts admitted by the petitioner are sufficient to warrant the action taken, he will dismiss the appeal. In all other cases he will forward a copy of the petition, of appeal to the Secretary to the committee for report. The report should contain a specific reply to each of the allegations contained in the petition, together with the statement of the case approved by the managing committee and such further comments as may be necessary.(Orders of the D. P. I. embodied in the first edition of the Code.)243. Final decision of appeals.
- After considering the report of the managing committee, the appellate authority may either dismiss the appeal, set aside the order of the committee, or proceed in person, or depute his subordinates not below the rank of a Sub-divisional Education Officer to hold a further enquiry into the case. On the result of such enquiry the appellate authority will pass such orders as he may think fit.(Orders of the D. P. I. embodied in the first edition of the Code.)244. Publication of order of expulsion or rustication.
- Order of expulsion and of rustication, passed or confirmed by the District Education Officer or the Regional Deputy Director of Education are circulated by the Director. Copies of all orders of this nature passed by a District Education Officer or Regional Deputy Director of Education must be forwarded to the Director without delay, on expiry of the period within which an appeal is permissible, or after the Regional Deputy Director of Education or the District Education Officer has been passed the final orders on the appeal.(Orders of the D.P.I. embodied in the first edition of the Code.)245. Corporal punishment.
- Corporal punishment should be used:-246. Fines.
- Fines should be inflicted-247. Detention and impositions.
- Detention and impositions should be used in case of neglect of work.(G.O. no. 1695-E., dated the 17th September 1915.)248. Detention.
- In the use of detention the following points should be noted:-249. Other punishments.
- A master will often be able to impose other punishments which will be more suitable to certain offences than the punishments which have been mentioned above. When this is done, these three considerations should be borne in mind-250. Remonstrance.
- Before a teacher turns to punishment he will naturally commence with a remonstrance and reasoning and will show his disapproval, which may in itself suffice to meet the case. A warning in many cases will be found to be sufficient especially if it is accompanied by entry of the boys' name in the conduct register.(G.O. no. 1695rE., dated the 17th September 1915.)251. Discipline in students.
- Following instructions for improving the state of discipline in schools have been laid down :252. Growing indiscipline in students.
- The menace of ticketless travelling, growing indiscipline and anti-social conduct among the students are treated as gross misconduct. Students are warned to desist from such criminal and antisocial acts as pulling alarm chain and adopting obstructionist tactics in order to prevent the railway employees from properly discharging their duties. The Inspecting Officers and Headmasters/Principals should carefully note and implement the measures specified below in order to check these menace:-252A. Departmental action in incidents of hooliganism by students and teachers, particularly when legal action is not feasible for any reason.
- In most cases, the District Education Officers take prompt action on such reports, but the S.P. who makes the original complaint is not always informed of the action taken on his report. In the circumstances Govt, in Education Deptt. should issue necessary instructions to S.P./D.I.G. of the action taken on reports sent by police.(Memo No. 5044 D, dated 4th December, 1959.)253. Responsibility for the junior section of high schools.
- In each High schools, as far as possible the assistant headmaster or some other teacher specially selected for the purpose should be placed in general charge of the junior classes, and should be held responsible for the welfare and progress of the boys in these classes, which may be regarded as constituting the junior or preparatory section. For this purpose it is not absolutely necessary, though it is desirable that separate buildings or wings should be occupied by the preparatory and senior sections, respectively.(D.P.I.'s circular no. 32, dated the 23rd September 1914.)254. Class Masters.
- As far as possible especially in the lower classes, one teacher should teach and be responsible for each class. Even in the higher classes of High schools the responsibility for each class should be assigned definitely to one teacher. Each class master should be responsible for the welfare and the general intellectual and moral progress of the boys of the class definitely assigned to him. These instructions are not, however, intended to prevent the grouping of boys for instruction in different subjects according to their proficiency in those subjects, where the strength of the school staff renders such grouping possible.(D.P.I.'s circular no. 32, dated the 23rd September 1914 and Government Resolution no. 2258-E., dated the 5th December 1923.)255. Methods of choosing pupils for rewards.
- The distribution of rewards must generally be based upon marks and these marks should represent the opinion of more than one master.(G.O. no.1695, dated the 17th September 1916.)256. A suggested system for the award of prizes.
- Prizes may be given to all pupils who have shown a certain standard of merit. The advantage of this system is that it eliminates the spirit of undue competition,257. Appreciation of good work done by the teachers in Secondary schools in the State.
- It would be possible to get the best out of teachers whose outstanding services would be immensely beneficial towards the various forms of reorganisation of Secondary Education. Such teachers should be encouraged. The Inspecting Officers may express grateful appreciation of good work done by such teachers and convey it demi-officially to the Headmaster/Principal. Care should, however, be taken to ensure in such cases that the work of the teacher is found to be really good on the basis of personal inspection.(D.P.I.'s letter no. 5414, dated the 13th December 1957.)258. National Award for teachers.
- With a view to raising the prestige of teachers and giving public recognition to the services rendered by them, it has been decided by Government of India to hold an annual function at which certificates and token awards of Rs. 500 each may be given to the teachers who have rendered valuable services to the community in their professional life. Any teacher who fulfils the minimum qualification of twenty years recognised teaching experiences is eligible for the award. Eight awards have been allotted to this State, four are given to primary school teachers and four other to Secondary School teachers. The following criteria have been laid down to guide the selection of suitable and deserving candidates :-259. Admission for the First time.
- Ordinarily no child under the age of five should be admitted to a primary or junior basic school. The admission of new beginners must be completed each year before date not later than the last day of February to be determined by the District Education Officer concerned. When a child is admitted for the first time to a primary or junior basic school, the father or duly accredited guardian should accompany the child and should declare that the .child has never before attended any school. He should also, if the child has no horoscope, declare in writing the age of the child in years, months and days, calculated according to the English method.(G.O. no. 1695-E., dated the 17th September 1915.)Note. - (1) If the age declared by the father or guardian is in the opinion of the teacher not in accordance with the child's physical appearance he should point this out to the father or guardian. If the father or guardian adheres to his first declaration, the teacher should record it but should draw the attention of the Sub-Inspector to it at his next visit. If the Sub-inspector agrees with teacher he should add to the age-entry "appears to be X years old" and should initial the entry.260. Admission fees.
- No admission fee should be charged in primary schools.261. Transfer Certificate.
- When a pupil is admitted to primary school from another school, he is required to produce a transfer certificate from the head teacher of the school in which he was last reading. The parent or guardian should accompany the boy. Failing this the boy should produce a letter or application from his parent or guardian for admission.(R &. O. page 3107.)262. Procedure for granting Transfer Certificates.
- Applications for transfer certificate must be made by the parent or guardian of the pupil, either personally or by letter. The head teacher must give the certificate on the day on which the application is received. Whenever a transfer certificate is refused, a statement of the grounds for refusal should be given to the applicant in writing.(R. & O. Page 311-II.)Note. - (1) No fee is charged for granting a transfer certificate.(R. & O. page 311-IV.)263. Class in which a pupil is to be placed.
- On admission to a school a pupil must not be placed in a class higher than that in which he was in the school he has quieted. If, however, he has passed the annual examination for promotion, he may be admitted into the next higher class.(R. & O. page 311-VII.)264. Boys with Transfer Certificates from Primary Schools may be tested on admission to other schools.
- Head teachers of schools to which boys coming from primary schools with transfer certificates wish to be admitted are not bound to take them into the school for which they are said to be fit in the transfer certificate. An entrance examination of such candidates for admission may be held by the head teacher of the school to which the boy is to be admitted, and if his examination is not favourable to the candidates they may be given the option of joining a lower class or of going to other schools.(D.P.I.'s circular no. 113, dated the 11th August 1905.)265. Questions regarding Transfer Certificates.
- All questions arising under these rules should be referred to the Sub-Inspector of the circle, from whose decision an appeal may be made to the District Education Officer whose decision will be final.(R. & O. page 311.)266. Admission for the first time.
- When a pupil is admitted for the first time to any school other than a primary or junior basic school, the father or natural guardian of the boy should accompany him and declare in writing that the boy has never before attended any school and should declare also in writing the age of the boy in year, months and days, calculated according to the English method. Where it is not possible for the parent or natural guardian to accompany the pupil, a person authorised in that behalf in writing should do so.Notes. - (i) A copy of the record of age thus made will be given or sent to the father or guardian. (A foil and counterfoil book should be kept in the school for the purpose.) No application for alteration by the parent, guardian or other interested party will be taken into consideration unless it is filed within six months of the date of the original entry. Such applications must be supported by sufficient evidence of the incorrectness of the original entry and an adequate explanation of the reasons of the mistake along with an affidavit sworn by the parent or guardian and if in any case the school authorities so require, by a medical certificate signed by the Civil Surgeon of the district in which the boy resides, or the school is situated. The duly authorised alterations, if any, will be recorded beneath the original entry and no second alteration will on any account be permitted. The Civil Surgeon's certificate must include (a) a statement of age (in years and months) claimed to be correct, together with (b) the statement of the Civil Surgeon that he has examined the pupil and that the age so stated appears to him approximately correct. Each application for the correction of an age-entry should be accompanied by a fee of one rupee.267. First admission to Higher Classes.
- The Headmaster or the Principal if he is satisfied as to the antecedents, of the pupil, may then admit him to the class for which he considers him fit, but if the admission is to class VI or VII of a High school, he should mark the entry in the admission book with an asterisk. When the Regional Deputy Director of Education, the District Education Officer, the Sub-divisional Education Officer next visits the school he should satisfy himself that the pupils whose names are thus marked have been admitted to the proper classes/ No one should be admitted to a class higher than class VII of a recognised High school unless he/she produces a transfer certificate from another recognised school or appears at and passes the annual examination of the next lower classes of the school. The system of admission examination is necessary for improving the quality of work in the High school and the results at the Secondary School Examination. The examination should be conducted carefully and impartially and records of the results kept.Note. - Admission of girl students in classes VIII and IX who have not got transfer certificate or could not appear at and pass the annual examination of the class next below at the beginning of the session may be done after a special test within a fortnight of the opening of the school every year; the special test should be of a proper standard and only deserving girls should be admitted.(G.O. no, 27761-E., dated the 7th August 1954.)268. Admission of Aboriginals, Harijans and Backward Muslims.
- The cases of admission of Aboriginals, Harijans and Backward Muslims should be considered sympathetically and somewhat leniently and a fair number of them consistent with the minimum standard of attainment should be admitted. The Headmaster/Principal should not refuse admissions to these students.Note. - In the case of Adivasis,-Headmaster/Principal should not only refuse admissions of Adivasis but should also give them preference in admission over boys from other sections of the communities.(D.P.I.'s letter no. 5112, dated 10th June 1947 no, 7900, dated the 24th September 1948, and no. 14484, dated the 9th July 1952.)269. Admission of Linguistic Minorities.
- In every High, Higher Secondary, middle and primary schools, a register should be maintained in which applications for admission received from the linguistic minorities should be entered. Such applications may be entertained even six months ahead of the prescribed date of admission. Applications so received should be scrutinised by the school authorities, two months preceding the date of admission and it may be seen whether in view of the large number of applications it would be possible to provide an additional teacher for the teaching of non-language subjects through the medium of that language. If possible the school authorities should wait till the date of final admission and take action for the appointment of additional teachers.After the expiry of the last date of admission, if it is found that the total number of students whose mother language is other than the language which is used as medium of instruction in that school; is 10 or more in any class or 40 and above in the whole school, provision should be made for one teacher who will take classes in non-language subjects through the medium of that language.If the number of such students is less than the limit prescribed above, they may be given full facility to seek their admission in some other schools according to their needs or read in the same school through the language which is used as medium of instruction in that school.(D.P.I.'s letter no. 580, dated the 5th February 1960.)270. Admission from another school.
- When a pupil is admitted into any school from another school he should be accompanied by or should produce a letter from his father or natural guardian. He must also produce a transfer certificate from the school which he last attended. Cases in which pupils apply for admission with transfer certificate later than one month after the date of issue of the transfer certificate should be investigated and such pupils should not be admitted unless the Headmaster/Principal is satisfied that they are fit for the class to which they seek admission.(R. & O. page 312, D.P.I.'s letter no. 61-T., dated the 23rd August 1934,)271. Record of examinations on Admission.
- When a pupil is examined on admission to a school under Article 267 of the Code the examining officers' opinion and recommendations must be duly recorded and signed by them and initialled by the Headmaster/Principal in a register kept for the purpose. The Headmaster/Principal will record in the same register the class to which the pupil is admitted. This register must invariably be shown to the inspecting officer when he visits the school.(D.P.I.'s circular no. 41, dated the 12th September 1917.)272. Admission from another State.
- A pupil from a school in another State who wishes to join a recognised school in Bihar must produce a transfer certificate countersigned-273. Grant of Transfer Certificates.
- Application for a transfer certificate should be accompanied by the fee payable, if any, and should be made in writing by the parent or guardian of the pupil.(R. & O. page 315, para. 111.)274. Fee for Transfer Certificates.
- A student quitting a High school except at the close of a session, or after appearance at the Secondary School Examination, will be liable to pay a fee before obtaining his transfer certificate. The transfer fee must not (except under special order of the department) exceed the ordinary monthly fee of the class. No fee is charged for granting transfer certificate at middle schools.(R. &. O. page 316 VIII.)Notes. - (i) Sons of teachers in Government schools, when they are transferred from one Government school to another, are exempted from payment of transfer and admission fees.275. Restriction as to intervention by Interested Schools.
- The authorities of an institution which a student wishes to join should on no account take any part in securing his transfer certificate from the institution which he intends to leave.(R. & O. Page 315, note to para. III)276. Period within which a certificate must be granted.
- A transfer certificate must be granted by the Headmaster/Principal on receipt of an application, except only in case of a pupil (i) who has been expelled from the school for misconduct, (ii) whose school fees or other dues have not been fully paid. In the second case, when all sums due to the school are paid, a certificate must be granted.At middle schools certificate must be granted on the day when the application is received and at High schools within three days.(R. & O. pages 313 and 315.)277. Appeals against refusals to issue Transfer Certificates.
- If the transfer certificate is withheld for reasons other than the above, an appeal will lie to the District Education Officer, who may, after making full enquiries, instruct the Headmaster/Principal to issue the certificate. Pending the result of the enquiry, the District Education Officer may, if he feels justified in doing so, authorise the temporary admission of the pupil into another school.278. Date of application for Transfer Certificates is ordinarily the date upto which fees may be charged.
- For the purposes of the transfer certificate, the date of the receipt of the letter applying for transfer will be regarded as the date upon which a student's connection with the school ceased, and no fee will be charged to him for any subsequent month. But if the student does not pay the sums due from him to the school within three days of his receiving intimation of their amount he will be treated as absent without leave until such sums are paid subject (as regards any further sums so accruing) to the limit stated in Article 291.(R. & O. page 315, V.)279. Fees payable in certain cases.
- If a student leaves a school on any date after the first working day of the month, he is required to Day the class fee up to the end of the month, and if after the Durga Puja vacation upto the end of the session. In the latter case the Headmaster/Principal of the school is, however, authorised for go^d and sufficient reason to remit the fees for the period beyond the month in which the student left the school. When fees are paid up to the end of the session no transfer fee should be demanded. In all cases the date up to which payment has been made should be clearly stated in the transfer certificate.(G.O. no. 468-E., dated the 31st March 1917.)280. Transfer Certificate from unrecognised schools.
- Transfer certificates from schools not recognised by the Department must not be accepted unless countersigned either (i) by the District Education Officer of the district in which such schools are situated in the case of unrecognised secondary schools or (ii) by the Sub-divisional Education Officer of the subdivision in which such schools are situated in the case of other unrecognised schools.Note. - High schools recognised by Universities in other States may be treated as recognised schools.281. Duplicate Transfer Certificates.
- When an original certificate has been lost a duplicate transfer certificate may be granted to student on payment of a fine of one rupee, but to guard against the possibility of abuse, particular should be taken in issuing the duplicate. Such enquiries as the Controlling Officer considers necessary should be made and a statement signed by the guardian should be obtained to the effect that the student has not been admitted to any other school since the issue of the first certificate. The parent or guardian should be required to sign a statement to the effect that the original certificate has been lost (or accidentally destroyed, as the case may be) and that since the issue of the certificate the student has not attended any school; also that he is aware that under the provisions of Article 288 of the Code the student is liable to expulsion if any part of this statement is subsequently found to be false.(R. & O. page 315, II; G. O. no. 3146-E. dated the 24th April 1928 )282. Particulars to be entered in Transfer Certificate.
- Every transfer certificate must contain a statement of the reasons owing to which the pupil is leaving the school. On the back of the certificate, over the signature of the Headmaster/ Principal should be noted the marks secured by the pupil at the last terminal examination at which he has appeared, with the date thereof.(Orders of D.P.I. embodied in the first edition of the Code. D.P.I.'s circular no. 8, dated the 8th June 1937.)283. School Year.
- The school year runs from January to December. For students permitted to appear at the Secondary School Examination, the session ends in the month in which the first day of that examination falls.(Government Resolution no. 943, dated the 25th March 1958.)284. Admission Fees.
- The amount to be charged as an admission fee is fixed for each school by the managing committee. In no case, however, should the amount exceed the school-fee charged for one month in the class to which the pupil is admitted.(Orders of the D.P.I. embodied in the first edition of the Code.)285. Class in which a pupil is to be placed.
- A pupil on admission must not be placed in a class higher than that in which he was reading at his former school unless-286. Degradation of Unfit Pupils.
- If on the result of his class work for the first month after admission a pupil is considered by the Headmaster unfit for the class to which he has been admitted, he may be placed in the next lower class. Cases dealt with under this rule should be recorded in the register prescribed under Article 271.(D. P. I.'s circular no. 41, dated the 12th September 1947.)287. Equivalence of Classes.
- The following table shows the equivalence of classes in the different types of schools for purpose of inter-school transfers of pupils:-| Lower Primary. | Upper Primary. | Middle including middle sections of HighSchools. | Basic. | High Schools. | Sarvodaya High schools. |
| 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 |
| XII | |||||
| X | XI | XI | |||
| X | X | ||||
| IX | IX | ||||
| VIII | VIII | Special (a) | |||
| VII | VII | ||||
| VI | VI | ||||
| V | V | V | |||
| IV | IV | IV | X | ||
| III | III | III | III | ||
| II | II | II | II | ||
| I | I | I | I |
288. False Documents or Statements.
- If a student is found producing a false document or making a false statement as to his attendance at any school he must be reported to the Department and he will be liable to fine, rustication, expulsion or exclusion, temporary or permanent from any recognised school.(R. & O. page 318 XX; G.O. no. 1067-E., dated the 26th July 1917.)289. Dispute between Headmasters/Principals regarding transfers.
- All questions arising between the Headmaster/Principal and another with regard to the interpretation of these words must be referred:-290. Late Attendance or Absence.
- Boys coming to school late but arriving within the first period may be fined three Paise., those coming after the first period should be marked absent. The fine for absence is six paise, a day. Absence in continuation of (before or after) a vacation or holiday is subject to double fine.Note - Sunday is to be considered a dies non not a holiday.(D.P.I.'s letter no. 879, dated the 11th July 1929.)291. Leave.
- Formal leave will be granted to pupils by the Headmaster/Principal on receipt of a satisfactory written letter of excuse, duly signed or countersigned by the father or authorised guardian of the pupil, or by the Superintendent in the case of boarder. The decision as to whether the excuse is satisfactory or not will lie with the Headmaster/Principal. Such permission will entitle the pupil to be marked as on leave, not as present. Leave may, at the Headmaster/Principal's discretion, be granted with retrospective effect, if application be made within fifteen days from the commencement of the absence. If a pupil absents himself without leave for fifteen days consecutively (or for ten days consecutively from the beginning of session in January) the Headmaster/Principal may strike his name off the roll. A pupil whose name is thus struck off will be liable to pay fees, together with fines for absence for the period of his absence without leave.(D.P.I.'s circular no. 49, dated the 24th November 1914; G.O. no. 1163-E., dated the 11th August 1917, and G.O.no. 1454-E., dated the 29th October 1936.)292. Concerted absence.
- In the case of concerted absence without leave on the part of pupils, on or before the third day of such leave the names of the absentees will be struck off the school rolls. Pupils absent on such occasions will not be re-admitted except under the usual rules of admission unless they bring sufficient excuse in writing signed or countersigned by a parent or authorised guardian and may be excluded at the discretion of the Headmaster/Principal. The decision as to the sufficiency of the excuse will lie with the Headmaster/Principal. On such occasions, the school will on no account be closed. The roll of each class will be called as usual.(D.P.I.'s circular no. 49, dated the 24th November 1914.)293. Malafide Transfers.
- A student withdrawing from a school in the month immediately preceding that in which a vacation recognised by the Department and of more than fifteen days duration commences will be liable, except in the case of bonafide transfers, to pay fees in that school for the vacation.(R. & O. Page 316 IX.)Note. - By bonafide transfers are meant actual transfer, i.e., transfers which are immediately followed by admission to other institutions so that there is no possibility of escaping payment of fees for the vacation.294. Restrictions on transfers in certain cases.
- The transfer of students will not ordinarily be permitted within six weeks of the time for holding the second terminal examination nor may transfers between secondary schools within a radius of five miles from one another be permitted after the 31st January in any year.Note. - In special cases the District Education Officer has power to sanction transfers between secondary schools within a radius of five miles from one another after 31st January in any year. Applications should be endorsed by the Headmasters/Principals of both the schools concerned before submission to the District Education Officer.(R. & O. page 317 XI (a), D.P.I.'s circular no. 26, dated the 8th August 1919 and D.P.I.'s circular no. 12, dated the 12th July 1934 and D.P.I.'s circular no. 14929, dated the 17th July 1952.)295. Students who have not undergone the Annual Examination.
- The fact of a student applying for admission, without having undergone the second terminal examination at his old school, must be regarded, unless the reverse is certified by his former Headmaster/Principal as sufficient evidence of his not having been fit for promotion. He may not, therefore, be admitted into a class higher than that in which he was in the other school.(R.& O. page 317 XV.)296. Provisional Admission.
- No student may be provisionally admitted to any school without the sanction of the District Education Officer.(R. & O. Page 317 XVII.)297. Fees to be paid from the beginning of the session.
- Except in cases of admission for the first time to any school, every new student on admission should in general pay fees from the beginning of the session, but he may not be charged for any month for which he has already been legitimately charged in the institution from which he has taken a transfer certificate, or for any period during which he has been prevented to the satisfaction to the school authority from attending school by illness, or other good cause. In the case of exemption being claimed on account of illness, a medical certificate satisfactory to the school authority must be submitted.(R. & O., page 818 XXIII.)298. Fees payable for re-admission.
- A student whose name has been withdrawn or removed or struck off for non-payment of fees should be required on readmission to the same school, to pay any fees due from the beginning of the session, or for the period for which he has not already paid, whichever period is less, and a fee for re-admission, unless he can show to the satisfaction of the Headmaster/Principal (a) that he has been reading in an equivalent class of another institution or (b) that he has been absent owing to sickness or other good cause.(D.P.I.'s order, dated the 7th August 1929, in file no. 8T-9-29.)299. Transgression of the transfer or admission rules.
- Wilful transgression by a school of any of the above rules will render it liable to severe penalties. Any such cases should be immediately reported to the Director.300. Admission forms.
- Three application forms have been prepared for use by applicants for admission to Government or aided high schools, according as they intend to live (a) with a parent or natural guardian, (b) with a recognised guardian or (c) in a school hostel or mess. Every applicant for admission must forward the appropriate form duly signed with his application.(D.P.I.'s circular no. 2, dated the 6th January 1915.)301. Re-admission after failure in the Secondary School Examination and the Higher Secondary School Examination.
- No fee for admission should be levied from a student who has failed (or who, having paid his admission fee, has been prevented by sickness or other cause from appearing) at the next preceding Secondary School Examination or the Higher Secondary School Examination if he applies for admission to the Government school from which he was sent up within a week of the date from which the session for such students begins. The managing committees of other recognised High schools may adopt a similar rule.Note. - (1) The session for students who have failed at the annual examination begins with the re-opening of their respective schools after the summer vacation or a week after the publication of the results of the examination, whichever is later. No such student, who rejoins school later than August 1, may be sent up for the Secondary School Examination or the Higher Secondary School Examination of the following year unless, in case of late publication of the results, a later date is notified by the Director.(D.P.I's circular no. 185, dated the 19th January 1912 and letter no. 6861, dated the 9th July 1932.)302. Failure at Test Examination.
- A pupil who has failed at the test examination of any school may not be sent up for the ensuing annual or supplementary Secondary or Higher Secondary School Examination, as the case may be, either as a pupil of another school or as a private student.(R. & G., page 317 XVIII.)303. Fees payable by candidates who fail at the Test Examination.
- If a pupil who has failed at the text examination wishes to take a transfer certificate he must pay fees up to the end of the month in which the results of the test examination are announced. He should not be required to pay a transfer fee if he takes his transfer in the month.(Cf. Article 248.)304. Payment of fees by candidates for Secondary or Higher Secondary School Examination.
- The application of a pupil for permission to appear at the Secondary or Higher Secondary School Examination must not be forwarded to the Secretary of the School Examination Board, until he has paid all sums due to the school in which he has been reading, including fees up to the end of the month within which the first day of the Secondary School Examination falls.(R. & O., page 317, Paragraph X.)305. Private candidates for Secondary School Examination.
- The admission of private candidates to the Secondary School Examination is regulated by the following rules :-(D.P.I.'s notification no. 5068, dated the 9th May 1917.)306. Fees rates for Government High/Higher Secondary Schools.
- The following is the scale of fees prescribed for Government High/Higher Secondary Schools;| Rs. | |||||
| Class VIII | .. | .. | .. | .. | 3.75 |
| Class IX | .. | .. | .. | .. | 3.75 |
| Class X | .. | .. | .. | .. | 4.50 |
| Class XI | .. | .. | .. | .. | 4.75 |
| (G.O. no. 2055 dated the 12th June 1965.) | |||||
| Class VII | .. | .. | .. | .. | 3.25 |
| Class VI | .. | .. | .. | .. | 2.50 |
| (G.O. no. 3535-E., dated the 21st May, 1949.) |
| Rs. | |||||
| Class XI and X | .. | .. | .. | .. | 2.25 |
| Class IX | .. | .. | .. | .. | 2.00 |
| Class X | .. | .. | .. | .. | 1.75 |
| Class VII and VI | .. | .. | .. | .. | 1.25 |
| (G.O. no. 3535-E., dated the 21st May, 1949.) |
307. Fees rates for other Government Schools.
- (i) The following is the scale of fees prescribed for Government Middle Schools:-| Rs. | |||||
| Class VII | .. | .. | .. | .. | 2.50 |
| Class VI | .. | .. | .. | .. | 2.50 |
| (G.O. no. 9097-E., dated the 31st December1949.) |
| Rs. | |||||
| Class VII | .. | .. | .. | .. | 0.61 |
| Class VI | .. | .. | .. | .. | 0.50 |
| (G.O. no. 3535-E., dated the 21st May,1949.) |
308. Fees rates for Secondary School including Sarvodaya High Schools aided by Government.
- The following are the standard fees prescribed for High/Higher Secondary and Middle Schools aided by Government.| High (Secondary) Schools | |||||
| Classes XI and X | .. | .. | .. | .. | 4.50 |
| Class IX | .. | .. | .. | .. | 3.75 |
| Class VIII | .. | .. | .. | .. | 3.25 |
| (G.O. no. 2055, dated 12thJune,1955 | |||||
| Class VII and VI | .. | .. | .. | .. | 2.50 |
| Non-Government Middle Schools | |||||
| Class VII and VI | .. | .. | .. | .. | 2.50 |
| (G.O. no. 9097-E, dated the 31stDecember, 1949.) |
309. Fees rates for Girls' High/Higher Secondary Schools, Government-Aided.
-| Name of Class. | Rate of monthly fee | ||||
| Rs | |||||
| Class VI | .. | .. | .. | .. | 2.00 |
| Class VII | .. | .. | .. | .. | 2.25 |
| Class VIII | .. | .. | .. | .. | 2.50 |
| Class IX | .. | .. | .. | .. | 2.75 |
| Class X | .. | .. | .. | .. | 3.25 |
| Class XI | .. | .. | .. | .. | 3.50 |
| (G.O. no. 3535-E., dated the 21st May, 1949.) |
310. St. Margaret's High Schools.
- In St. Margaret's High School for girls at Ranchi the following special rates are charged to pupils of backward Tribes :-| Rs. | |||||
| Class VI | .. | .. | .. | .. | 0.61 |
| Class VII | .. | .. | .. | .. | 1.00 |
| Class VIII | .. | .. | .. | .. | 1.50 |
| Class IX | .. | .. | .. | .. | 2.00 |
| Class X and XI | .. | .. | .. | .. | 2.50 |
| (G.O. no. 3535-E., dated 21st May,1949.) |
311. Fee rates for Secondary Schools maintained by Local Bodies or aided out of District Education Fund.
- The following is the scale of fees prescribed for middle schools maintained by District Board, or aided out of District Education Fund.Middle Schools| Rs. | |||||
| Class VI | .. | .. | .. | .. | 0.61 |
| Class VII | .. | .. | .. | .. | 0.50 |
312. Scholars Fund.
- No High/Higher Secondary Schools including Sarvodaya High Schools should realise any monthly amount from students in addition to the school fee except for the following purpose at the rates mentioned against each :-| Purpose. | Amount fixed for each student. | ||
| (i) | Game fee including scouting .. | Rs. 2.50 in two instalments of Rs. 1.25 each. | |
| (ii) | Common-room, Magazine, Radio, Cultural activities like Dramas,Music, etc. | Rs. 1.50 in two instalments of 75 paise each. | |
| (iii) | Examination fee .. .. | Rs. 2 for two examinations in classes VIII to XI; Re. 1 for twoexaminations in classes VI and VII and 50 Paise for twoexaminations in classes IV to V. | |
| (iv) | Poor boys' fund .. .. | Purely voluntary and as such no rates have been fixed. |
313. Management and disbursement of Scholars Fund.
- For proper management and the disbursement of the funds mention in article above, each High/ Higher Secondary School should have a Central Committee consisting of (i) the Headmaster/Principal; (2) teachers' incharge of each of the items (i), (ii), (iii) and (iv) mentioned in the first paragraph in the above article; (3) students' secretaries for each of items mentioned in (2) above and (4) general students' secretary. The money will be deposited in the Savings Bank account in the joint name of Headmaster/Principal and another member of the Central Committee. The Headmaster/Principal should not spend any amount more than Rs. 10 (Rupees ten) without the approval of the Central Committee. The teacher and students' secretary for each item will submit a budget to the Central Committee for approval. There should be no committee for the fund relating to examination fee. It should be administered entirely by the Headmaster/Principal who may take the help of such teachers as he likes. No student should be associated with this fund.(D. P. I.'s letter no. 59, dated the 9th January 1956.)314. Special concession to pupils of the Scheduled Castes.
- Pupils of the Scheduled Castes, as defined in the Code, must until further orders, be excused fees at all Secondary Schools managed or aided by Government in which less than half of the pupils belong to backward tribes or Scheduled Castes. Local bodies are authorised to grant the same concession in such schools under their control.(G.O. no. 912-E., dated the 27th February 1931,)315. Collection of fees.
- The fees for each month should be collected on the 5th, 10th and 15th of that month. After the 15th, fees should be collected on the 20th, the 25th and the last working day of the month, and a default fine of 25 Paise should be charged on all collection days after the 15th. If the 5th, 10th, 15th, 20th or 25th of the month is a holiday, the collection due on that should be made on the next working day. If the fee and the default fine are not paid by the last working day of the month, the pupil's name should be struck off the rolls and he should only be re-admitted on payment of all back dues and a re-admission fee. He will not, however, be required to pay a default fine in addition to a re-admission fee. Fees for the month in which a vacation begins, and for the following month if the school is to be closed for the whole of that month are due before the vacation begins and, if payment is not made before the vacation, or on the first fee collection day after the school re-opens, the pupil's name should be struck off the rolls. If the vacation begins before the 15th of the month, the last working day before the vacation is the last day on which fees can be accepted without a default fine, and in every case when fees due before a vacation are paid after the vacation a default fine of Re.1 should be charged. If the school is to re-open after the 15th of the month, the Headmaster/Principal should, before the vacation, fix the fee collection day or days for that month. The default fine for payment on any day so fixed after the first should be 25 Paise.(G.O no. 4648-E., dated the 13th September 1930, D. P. I.'s letter no. 4879, dated the 9th May 1931; and D. P. I.'s circular no. 20, dated ,the 30th November 1931.)Note. - (i) Fee includes all dues to schools which have been approved by the Department, viz., tuition fees, absence fine, athletic charges, etc., and should be paid on the date fixed in the above article. In case of default in payment, default fine may be charged in accordance with the rules laid down in this article. Default fine may, however, be exempted at the discretion of the Headmaster/Principal.(D.P.I's. letter no. 16755, dated the 24th July 1953.)316. Free-studentships.
- Free-studentships are granted by Headmaster/Principal in the case of Government High/Higher Secondary Schools and by the managing committee (or by the Headmaster, if there is no managing committee) in the case of all other recognised schools to a limited number of poor pupils who have shown ability, good conduct and good progress in their studies. In Government schools the grant of a free-studentship will be made strictly contingent on proved poverty.(Government Resolution no. 3961-E., dated the 19th November 1925.)317. Number of free studentships admissible.
- The admissible number of free-studentships in Secondary schools is 15 percent of the number of pupils on the roll. These free-studentships should be awarded to the most deserving boys irrespective of class distinctions. Two half free-studentships are permissible instead of one free-studentship. But one-fourth free studentship should not be allowed.(Government Resolution no. 6362-E., dated the 29th August 1$49.)Notes. - (1) The limit of 15 per cent is exclusive of ex-scholars to whom free-studentships have been granted in accordance with the rules contained in Article 641.318. Special concessions to Educational Officers.
- Teachers in Government employ drawing salaries not exceeding Rs. 100 a month are permitted to have enrolled in the school in which they are employed one son free and one son at half the usual rate of fees. This privilege may be extended to the children and orphans of retired teachers and inspecting officers of the Department whose pensions do not exceed Rs, 30 a month and to the orphans of teachers and inspecting officers who died in the service of the Department while in receipt of pay not exceeding Rs. 100 a month.(G. O. no. 2080-E., dated the 16th September 1903, paragraph 15 and no. 132-E. R., dated the 24th June 1922; R. & O. page 302, and G.O. no. 871-E.R., dated the 24th August 1928.)Note. - The concessions enjoyed by the teachers in Government employ under this article are extended to the ministerial officers serving in the Government schools on condition that the concessions granted do not raise the total number of free-studentships above that permissible and no additional expenditure is incurred on this account.(G.O. no. 1261-E., dated the 2nd June 1942.)319. Special concessions to Female Teachers.
- Children of female teachers are. entitled to free-studentships in the schools in which their mothers are serving and, if the salary of the mother does not exceed Rs. 100 a month, in schools of all grades under the direct control of Government.(G. O. no. 1557-E, dated the 16th October 1917.)Note. - (1) The concessions granted in Articles 318 and 319 must not be allowed to raise the total number of free-studentships above that permissible.320.
The Bihar High Schools (Control and Regulation of Administration) Act, 1960. [Please under caption "Allied Acts and Rules".]Section VIRules to be Observed by Recognised High/Higher Secondary/Multipurpose schools including Sarvodaya High Schools under Private Management321. Rules.
- The following rules must be observed in every recognised High/Higher Secondary/Multi-purpose Schools including Sarvodaya High Schools under private management:-323. Disciplinary action against the teaching staff.
323. Disciplinary action against the teaching staff.
324. Appeals.
- The appeal of the person concerned shall be heard by the President of the Board of Secondary Education, or any member of the Board of Secondary Education duly nominated by the President, or any officer ordinarily not below the rank of the District Education Officer. The appellant and the Secretary of the Managing Committee may be heard in person by the President Board, of Secondary Education, or his nominee who may even authorise them to be represented by a representative.(G.O. No. 5172, dated the 7th September 1955.)Note. - In case the Managing Committee violates these rules or fails to carry out the orders and instructions of the Board of Secondary Education, or give effect to the decisions of the Board, the Board shall have the right, to withdraw recognition of the school or suspend the grant or take such other action as it may think fit.State Government's Interpretation of Rule (5) [Equivalent to Rule 16] in Appeal cases.[*Regarding :- Appointment and Service Conditions of teachers in non-Government High/Higher Secondary Schools.The attention is drawn to Government Notification No. 5172, dated 7.9.1955 published under notification no. 1050, dated 21.3.1959 in the Bihar Gazette, Extraordinary, dated 23.3.1959 which embodies rules for appointment and service conditions of teachers in non-Govt. High schools and those rules are deemed to be rules under Section 8 (2) of the Bihar High Schools (Control & Regulation of Administration) Act, 1960. Rule (5) [equivalent to Rule 16] of these rules lays down that when an appeal has been preferred, the order of discharge or dismissal shall not be given effect to till the disposal of the appeal by the President, Board of Secondary Education, Bihar.2. It appears that this particular provision alongwith correlated ones are variously interpreted in the situation arising out of dismissal or discharge of teachers by the managing committee. I am, therefore, to say that the rule 16 may be treated to connote the following -
3. I am to request that appeal cases pertaining to dismissal or discharge and matter having direct bearing to it, may for the present be considered wherever necessary on the above lines and the matter be dealt with most expeditiously.
(G.O. No. II/M 3-0164E, 1956 dated 5th May, 1964)325. Agreements.
- Every teacher on appointment shall be required to execute an agreement in the prescribed form. This agreement may be terminated at any time by either the Managing Committee or the teacher on giving to the other party one calendar month's notice in writing of intention to determine the same, or by paying one month's salary in lieu of such notice, provided that the Managing Committee shall be entitled to terminate the services of the teacher without notice in the event of gross misconduct. The service of the teacher shall not, however, be so terminated for gross misconduct unless he has had an opportunity of making a defence. In such a case the Managing Committee shall cause notice in writing to be given to the teacher to submit his defence to the Managing Committee within one week from the date of receipt of the notice. If the teacher submits his defence in writing within the aforesaid period of one week, the Managing Committee shall consider the defence and shall pass such orders as it may think fit, If the teacher does not submit the defence in writing within the aforesaid period of one week,the Managing Committee may terminate his service without further delay. If the service of the teacher is terminated for gross misconduct, he may submit an appeal to the District Education Officer within ten days of receiving the order so terminating it. If the District Education Officer agrees with the Managing Committee, he shall inform the appellant and no further action will be taken. If the District Education Officer disagrees with the Managing Committee, he shall forward the appeal to the Secretary of the Board of Secondary Education with the remarks of the Managing Committee thereon and his own opinion. The decision of the Board of the Secondary Education shall be final.(G.O. no. 736-E., dated the 10th February 1936.)Note. - In the case of girls' schools the appeal lies to the Inspectress of Schools, Bihar.326. Headmaster/Principal liable to pass the departmental examination.
327. Teachers liable to pass public examination in Hindi, Urdu and Bengali.
- No person shall be appointed to teach in a High/Higher Secondary school unless he has passed a public examination in Hindi or Urdu, or in a school in which the medium of instruction is Bengali, unless he has passed a public examination in Bengali; provided that teacher who has not passed such an examination may be appointed if he gives an undertaking to pass within 18 months from the date of his appointment, and that if he fails to comply with the undertaking he shall not be confirmed in his post, provided also that a school authority may in an exceptional case make an appointment not covered by this rule subject to the approval of the District Education Officer or Inspectress of schools, as the case may be. A candidate shall be deemed to have passed a public examination in a language at the Matriculation or Secondary School Examination or at any higher examination held by a University.(Government notification No. 1927-E., dated the 21st October 1937 and notification No. 5086-E., dated the 29th June 1949.)328. Model scale of pay to teachers of different qualifications.
- The following scale of pay has been prescribed for staff of all non-Government High Schools with effect from the 1st April, 1957:-| Rs. | |||||
| 1. | (i) Headmaster | .. | .. | 175-10-275 (upto 200 pupils). | |
| (ii) Ditto | .. | .. | 200-10-300 (more than 200 pupils). | ||
| 2. | Trained Graduates | .. | .. | 100-5-125-EB.-4-145-EB.-3-175. | |
| 3. | (i) Untrained Graduates | ||||
| (ii) I.A., I.Sc. or I.Com. trained | .. | .. | 70-3-85-E.B.-4-105-2-115. | ||
| (iii) Acharya and Fazil | |||||
| 4. | (i) I.A., I.Sc., I.Com. | ] | |||
| (ii) Matric Trained | .. | .. | 50-2-70-E.B.-2-90. | ||
| (iii) Shastri and Alim | |||||
| 5. | (i) Untrained Matriculate | ] | |||
| (ii) Madhyama | .. | .. | 40-2-50-E B.-1-60 | ||
| (iii) Maulvi | |||||
| 6. | V.M.C.T. | .. | .. | 40-2-50-E. B.-2-75. | |
| 7. | Non-Matriculate Trained | .. | .. | 40-2-50-E.B.-2-75. | |
| 8. | I.A., I.Sc., I. Com. holding certificate in PhysicalEducation. | .. | .. | 60-2-80-E.B.-2-100. | |
| 9. | Matric holding certificate in Physical Education. | .. | .. | 45-2-55-E.B.-2-75. | |
| 10. | Clerks | .. | .. | 45-2-55-E.B.-2-75. | |
| 11. | Menials | .. | .. | 221/2-1/2-271/2 |
329. Model Scale of pay for non-Government Higher Secondary and Multi-purpose schools.
- The following scale of pay has been prescribed for staff of all non-Government Higher Secondary/Multi-purpose Schools with effect from the 1st April, 1957:-| (1) | Principal .. .. .. | 200-10-300-E.B.-10-450. |
| (2) | Master's or Honour's degrees in Arts, (i) Science or Commerce(trained or untrained). | 150-10-200-E.B.-10-250. |
| (3) | Master's or Honour's degrees in Arts, Science and Commerce(untrained) in Multi-purpose school teaching Humanities, NaturalScience and any vocational subjects. | 100-5-125-E.B.-4-145-E.B.-175. |
330. Age of Superannuation of teachers.
- The age of superannuation of teachers in non-Government High/Higher Secondary/Multi-purpose schools has been raised to 60 years.(Government Resolution no. 1507, dated the 2nd April, 1957)331. Recognition of certificates from National Universities.
- Examinations conducted by National Universities enumerated in column I of the following Table should be treated as equivalent to the degrees granted by a recognised University mentioned opposite each in column II and that candidates who have passed any of the examinations mentioned in column I up to the end of the year 1947, should be treated as eligible for appointment to a post or service under Government for which success at any of the corresponding examination of a recognised University is laid down as qualification for appointment to that post or service :-Table| Names of Examinations of National Universities. | Names of Examinations of recognisedUniversities. | ||||
| I | II | ||||
| 1. | Bihar Yidyapith (Patna) | ||||
| (1) Praveshika .... | .... | Matriculation. | |||
| (2) Snatak .... | .... | B.A. | |||
| 2. | Kashi Vidyapith (Banaras) | ||||
| (1) Vishard .... | .... | Matriculation. | |||
| (2) Shastri .... | .... | B.A. | |||
| 3. | Jamia Milia Islamia (Delhi) | ||||
| (1) Jamia Junior .... | .... | Matriculation. | |||
| (2) Jamia Senior .... | .... | I.A. | |||
| (3) Degree .... | .... | B.A. | |||
| 4. | Gujrat Vidyapith (Ahmedabad) | ||||
| (1) Vinit .... | .... | Matriculation. | |||
| (2) Snatak .... | .... | B.A. | |||
| 5. | Hindi Vishwa Vidyalay (Allahabad) | ||||
| (1) Prathma .... | .... | Matriculation. | |||
| (2) Madhyama .... | .... | I.A. | |||
| (3) Uttama .... | .... | B.A. | |||
| 6. | Hindi Vidyapith (Deoghar) | ||||
| (1) Praveshika .... | .... | Matriculation. | |||
| (2) Sahitya Bhushan .... | .... | I.A. | |||
| (3) Sahityalankar .... | .... | B.A. | |||
| 7. | Tilak Maharashtra Vidyapith, (Bombay) | ||||
| (1) Praveshika .... | .... | Matriculation. | |||
| (2) Visharad .... | .... | B.A. | |||
| 8. | The Prayag Mahila Vidyapith, (Allahabad) | ||||
| (1) Vinodini .... | .... | Matriculation. | |||
| (2) Vidushi .... | .... | I.A. | |||
| (3) Sarsvati .... | .... | B.A. | |||
| 9. | The Adya Diploma of the Vishwabharti (Santiniketan) | ||||
| (1) Adya .... | .... | Matriculation. | |||
| (2) Madhya .... | .... | I.A. | |||
| (3) Antya .... | .... | B.A. | |||
| 10. | Gurukul Kangri University (Hardwar) | ||||
| (1) Adhikari Examination .... | .... | Matriculation. | |||
| (2) Vidyalankar .... Vedalankar | .... | B.A. | |||
| (3) Vidya Vachaspati .... | .... | M.A. |
332. Number of pupils in a High School.
- The number of pupils should not exceed 50 in any section of a class or 40 in any section of the upper primary classes. These limits may be relaxed to the extent that not more than two pupils above the prescribed maximum may he admitted in any one class of a school where such pupils are sons or legal wards of Government servants transferred in the course of a school session to the place at which the school is situated.(G. O. no. 1929-E., dated the 5th April 1928; and G. O. no. 524-E.R., dated the 26th August 1932.)Note. - The same limits (50 in class VI or any higher class and 40 in class V or any lower class) should be observed in middle and primary schools.333. Site and surroundings of the school.
334. Use of buildings.
- The school buildings should not be allowed to be used for other than educational purposes without the written consent of the managing committee. Any application for permission to use the buildings for the than educational purposes should state clearly for what purposes the buildings are required and should give a programme of any events that are to be held. If the programme includes a performance by nautch party permission should not be granted. Rules laid down in Article 427 and 428 of Section X of this Chapter should be strictly followed.335. Teaching appliance.
- Schools teaching mechanics and other scientific subjects should provide the necessary apparatus according to a scale to be laid down by the Department. The apparatus required for the study of geography should also be provided.336. Library.
- (i) Adequate provision should be made for a library and for lending books to the pupils. A sum should be earmarked for expenditure on the library every year and a definite part of this should be set aside for the purchase of books likely to interest the boys, as opposed to reference books and text-books.(Amended vide G. O. no 2205-E., dated the 14th July 1923.)337. Curriculum and Test-Books.
338. Admission, transfer and promotion of pupil.
339. Headmaster/Principal's responsibility for selection of candidates.
- The Headmaster/Principal should be responsible for the selection of candidates for the Matriculation or Secondary School Examination, subject to the general control of the District Education Officer, who should report to the Regional Deputy Director of Education any case where the Headmaster/Principal appears to have sent up for examination a student who has not regularly and diligently prosecuted his studies, or is otherwise ineligible. Should the results of the examination show that the proportion of successful candidates to the total number of boys in class XI is unusually small, the District Education Officer will be required to examine carefully whether the promotions throughout the school are properly given and if it is found that this is not the case, the school will be liable to be removed from the list of recognised schools.340. Discipline.
- Provision should be made to ensure discipline and good conduct among the pupils both within and outside the school premises and suitable arrangements should be made for their recreation. If possible, a common room should be established in which selected newspapers and journals approved by the Department should be placed. The rules regarding maintenance of discipline among the students laid down in Section II of this chapter should be strictly followed.341. Prize, reward and punishment.
342. Forbidden practices.
- The rules contained in this chapter dealing with spittings, smoking, gambling, etc., politeness to masters or visitors, membership of clubs and societies, and attendance at political meetings, should be enforced.343. Conduct and progress to be communicated to parents/guardians.
- Arrangements should be made to secure that at the end of each term the parent or guardian of each pupil is informed of the progress and conduct of his or her son or ward.344. Fees and free-studentship.
345. Holidays.
- The number of holidays shall not exceed [73] [Substituted by 87 vide Resolution No. 11/R1-03/64-E-300, dated 25.1.1965.] days in a year, including any holidays which inspecting officers may grant on the occasion of their visits, but excluding Sundays. The Headmaster/Principal should submit to the District Education Officer by the 7th of January, in each year a complete list of the holidays which it is proposed to observe during that year.(G.O. no. 1485-E., dated the 14th March 1928 and D.P.I.'s letter no. 7789, dated the 23rd May 1928.)346. Submission of periodical returns.
- Every school should submit punctually in the prescribed forms such annual and periodical returns and such other reports as may be required by the Department.347. Registers and account book open to inspection.
- All schools with their registers and accounts book, shall always be open to inspection at reasonable hours by the authorised inspecting officers of the Department and by the executive officers of Government.348. Inspection.
349. Duties of Headmasters/Principals.
- (i) All questions relating to the admission of pupils, their periodical examinations, their promotion, the grant of transfer certificates and the selection of candidates for the Matriculation/Secondary School Examination, shall be decided by the Headmaster/Principal subject only to the supervision of the inspecting officers of the Department. The Committee shall, however, have a right to officer their opinion on these matters to the inspecting officers in charge of the school.350. Assistant teachers.
351. Leave rules.
- The following model leave rules have been framed by the Board of Secondary Education, Bihar:-354. Model rules of business.
353. Managing Committee of High Schools run by Missionaries and other Societies or Trusts.
- The Managing Committee shall ordinarily consist of nine members as follows :-354. Model rules of business.
- The following are the model rules of business for the Managing Committee of recognised High schools :-(D. P. I.'s circular no. Ill, dated the 2nd May 1919.)355. Functions of the Secretary of the Managing Committee.
- (i) Under the directions of the committee, the secretary shall carry on correspondence with the proper authorities on behalf of the committee. He shall keep a record of the proceedings of each meeting and submit it to the next meeting for confirmation. Such proceedings and all work done by the Committee shall be duly recorded in a book kept for the purpose. If the Secretary has to be absent for more than a month, a fresh appointment shall be made either permanently or for the period of his absence, as the committee may decide.356. Requisition for Auditor.
- The following information should be supplied to the Directorate while making a requisition for auditing the accounts of non-Government Higher Secondary/High Schools. Finance Department (Audit Section) requires these detailed informations before taking up a case for audit:-357. Legal action in case of misappropriation of funds by office-bearer of High/Higher Secondary Schools.
- In order to deal with cases of misappropriation of funds by the office-bearers of aided High/Higher Secondary Schools, it is necessary that as soon as the auditor's report is received which reveals a palpable case of misappropriation or defalcation of funds and the District Education Officer is satisfied that the funds of an educational institution have been misappropriated by the Secretary, the Headmaster/Principal or any member of the Managing Committee of the school, he should immediately report the matter to the Police for necessary investigation and action.(D.P.I's letter no. 3464, dated the 6th July 1955.)Section VIIISpecial Rules for Government Secondary Schools for Boys including Sarvodya/Higher Secondary/Multipurpose Schools357A. Constitution of managing committees.
- Every Government High/Higher Secondary/Multi-purpose including Sarvodaya High Schools is under the management of a committee which consists of the District Officer as President, the Headmaster or the Principal as Secretary, a representative of the teaching staff, the District Education Officer and three non-officials, of whom at least one must be a Muhammadan, to be appointed by Government and to hold office for a term of three years. Casual vacancies are filled by co-opted members, holding office of the remainder of the three years' term. The Regional Deputy Director of Education is authorised to attend any meeting of the Managing Committee at which he considers his presence desirable and to give his opinion on the matters under discussion.(G O. no. 719-E.T., dated the 22nd November 1916; Resolution no. 3268-E. dated the 5th December 1923; G.O. no. 690-E., dated the 4th March 1924; and Resolution no. 3961-E., dated the 19th November 1925.)Notes. - (1) The City Magistrate of Patna is an ex-officio member of the committee of the Patna City Multi-purpose School.(G. O. no, 2019-1E, dated the 18th September 1913.)358. Functions of the Managing Committee.
- The duties and power of the Managing Committee of a Government High/Higher Secondary/Multi-purpose School including Sarvodaya Multipurpose Schools are as follows :-(G.O. no. 2517, dated the 9th December 1940.)359. General duties of Headmaster/Principal.
- Subject to the advice and control of the District Education Officer, the Headmaster/Principal is responsible for the arrangement of classes, the preparation of time-tables, the conduct of annual examinations, the award of class promotions, the selection of candidates for the Secondary School Examination and all matters relating to discipline. He will refer to the Managing Committee cases of serious indiscipline which seem to merit rustication or expulsion, suspending the pupil and reporting the occurrence to the District Education Officer where delay is undesirable (vide Articles 238-244).(G.O. no. 2517, dated the 9th December 1907.)360. Charge of school in vacation.
- The Headmaster/Principal is not ordinarily required to remain on duty during the holidays but he must not leave his station unless he has received the sanction of the District Education Officer, or, in case of High school, of the managing committee to make over charge of the school office to one of the members of his staff. Applications for such sanction should be made not less than a fortnight before the vacation commences.(Government Resolution no. 3961-E., dated the 19th November 1925.)361. Standard staff of a Government Higher Secondary/Multi-purpose School.
- The standard staff for a Government Higher Secondary/Multi-purpose School with four classes and no additional section is as follows:-A Principal in the Bihar Education Service.Ten teachers (including at least two trained science graduates) in the Subordinate Educational Service.Two oriental teachers in the Subordinate Educational Service.One teacher of Arts and Crafts in the Subordinate Educational Service.One Physical Instructor in the Subordinate Educational Service.Two clerks in class III of the Ministerial Service.In the Multi-purpose school with the addition of every additional Vocational subject group, viz., Agriculture, Commerce, Science, Home Science, Elementary Engineering, etc.; two posts of assistant teachers in the Subordinate Educational Service are added.(G.O. no. 1861, dated the 9th June 1958.)362. Duplication or triplication of classes.
- On no account should triplication of classes be permitted except where three distinct languages are taught separately. When classes are so triplicated, the number of boys in all the sections of any one class should be limited to 100, so that it may be possible for all the boys promoted to remain in the school without causing the number of boys in the higher classes to exceed the prescribed limit.(D. P. I.'s circular no. 50, dated the 13th November 1913.)363. Duplication or triplication depends on the provision of the necessary accommodation.
- When duplication or triplication for languages is required and the staff or school building is inadequate, early intimation should be given to the Director so that the necessary additions may be made to the staff or plans for the necessary additions to the building be obtained. Until the necessary additions are made to the staff and to the accommodation, duplication or triplication should not be allowed.(D.P.I.'s circular no. 50, dated the 13th November 1913.)364. Failure to obtain promotion.
- Save in very special circumstances and with the sanction of the Managing Committee, no boy should be permitted to remain in a Government Higher Secondary/Multi-purpose School if he twice fails to obtain promotion from any one class.Notes. - (1) Subject to Article 367 below, there is no objection to the admission to a Government school of a boy who has failed twice to obtain promotion from any class in another Government school.365. Admission rules.
- The Managing Committee of each Government Higher Secondary/Multi-purpose School should draw up rules for the guidance of the Headmaster/Principal when admitting boys to the school. In all cases preference should be given in the first place to boys whose parents are permanent residents of the district, and secondary to other permanent resident of the State.(D.P.I.'s circular no. 50, dated the 13th November 1913.)366. Late admissions.
- Save with the special sanction of the Headmaster/Principal for reasons to be recorded in writing no student should be admitted to a Government Secondary School after the 20th January, in any year unless his case falls within one of the following classes :-(D.P.I's circular no. 29, dated the 4th September 1918, Government Resolution no. 3961-E., dated the 19th November 1925 and D.P.I.'s no. 5440, dated the 17th June 1933.)367. Age-limit for admission.
- The maximum age for the admission of boys into the different classes of Government Higher Secondary/Multi-purpose School is as follower:-| Rs. | ||||||
| Class XI | .. | .. | .. | .. | .. | 18 years. |
| Class X | .. | .. | .. | .. | .. | 17 years. |
| Class IX | .. | .. | .. | .. | .. | 16 years. |
| Class VIII | .. | .. | .. | .. | .. | 16 years. |
| Class VII | .. | .. | .. | .. | .. | 14 years. |
| Class VI | .. | .. | .. | .. | .. | 14 years. |
368. Standard establishment for Middle Schools.
- The standard establishment for a Government Middle school is-Two teachers in the Subordinate Educational Service.Five language teachers in Lower Subordinate Service.(G. O. no. 113C-E., dated the 9th June 1913.)Section VIIISpecial rules for Government Girls' Schools369. Government Girls' Multi-purpose School, Bankipore.
- The constitution of the Managing Committee of the Bankipore Girls' Multi-purpose School is as follows :-370. The Badshah Nawab Razvi Training College, Gulzarbagh.
- The constitution of the Managing Committee of the Badshah Nawab Razvi Training College, Gulzarbagh is as follows :-371.
Every Government High School for Girls except in the Bankipore Girls' Multi-purpose School and the Badshah Nawab Razvi Training College will have a Managing Committee of nine members consisting of the following :-372. Functions of the Committee.
- The powers and duties of the committees of the Government High Schools for girls are defined in the following rules.-(G.O. no. 2699-E., dated the 20th November 1913.)373. Advisory Committees of Government Primary Schools for Girls.
- The following are the rules for the appointment of, and conduct of business by, the advisory committees of Government primary schools for girls :-(G O. no. 1497-E., dated the 11th August 1915, 18568-E., dated the 19th September, 1951.)374. Managing Committee of the Government Middle Schools for Girls.
375. Definition.
- The term "aided school" includes a school which it is proposed to establish if a grant is given. A grant-in-aid may be promised to a school before it actually comes in to existence provided that satisfactory Managing Committee has been formed and that there is reasonable likelihood of continued efficient management.(Government Resolution no. 3268-E., dated the 5th December 1923.)376. Managing Committee.
- Every aided school should, unless specially exempted by the Director, be governed by a representative managing committee in accordance with the instructions of Government issued from time to time. The duly appointed Secretary to this committee will be the corresponding agent of the school recognised by Government.(G.O. no. 194-E,, dated 29th January 1915.)377. Constitution and term of office of Managing Committees.
- The rules for the constitution and term of office of Managing Committees contained in this Code should be adopted by the managing committees of aided schools subject to such modifications as the Director may approve.(D.P.I.'s circular no. 3, dated the 11th January 1918.)378. Appointment of Government servants to Managing Committees.
- The appointment of Government servant as ex-officio members of the committee of an aided school requires the sanction of the District Officer. The sanction of the Commissioner will be necessary only when the District Officer himself is to be appointed. Government servants appointed to be ordinary members should ask for the sanction of their immediate superior.(G.O. no. 3570, dated the 11th July 1955.)379. Approval to the Constitution of a Managing Committee.
- The constitution of the committee of a school seeking a grant-in-aid, or the renewal of a grant-in-aid, requires the approval of the authority competent to sanction or renew the grant, as the case may be. All intermediate resignations, removals or appointments should be reported to the District Education Officer, Inspectress or the District Inspectress, or the Sub-divisional Education Officer, as the case may be, for his or her approval.(Government notification no. 937-E. ft, dated the 12th July 1936.)380. Approval to the appointment of a President and a Secretary.
- The election of the President and of the Secretary of the committee requires the approval of the Board of Secondary Education.(Government no. 17714, dated the 28th September 1954.)Note. - In the case of grants to Sanskrit Vidyalayas, the Secretary, Board of Sanskrit Education discharges the duties assigned to the Board of Secondary Education in the above rule.381. Standard scale for the High schools.
- The standard scale of teaching staff for an aided High school/High schools including Sarvodaya High Schools, provides for 10 teachers in the case of a school which has six classes and no additional sections and for seven teachers in the case of a school which has four classes and no additional sections. One extra teacher is added for each class that is duplicated owing to numbers or for each extra language which is taught as literature only. Two extra teachers are added for each additional language which is used as a medium of instruction.382. Standard cost for High School (including Sarvodaya High School).
- The, standard cost of a school is made up of the following items :-| Basic pay. | Monthly. | Annual increment. | |||
| (a) - | Rs. | Rs. | Rs. | ||
| (i) | For a Headmaster or Principal .. | *175 | 175 | 10 | |
| (ii) | For two trained graduates including one Physical instructor .... | 100 | 200 | 10 | |
| (iii) | For two untrained graduates or I.A., C.T. .. .. | 70 | 140 | 6 | |
| (iv) | For one Acharya .. .. | *70 | 70 | 3 | |
| (v) | For one trained Matric or untrained I.A .. .. .. | 50 | 50 | 2 | |
| (b) | For a clerk .. .. .. .. | 45 | 45 | 2 | |
| (c) | For two menials .. .. .. | 55 | .. | ||
| (d) | For repairs to building .. .. .. | 50 | .. | ||
| (e) | For Prize and Library .. .. | 25 | .. | ||
| (f) | Allowance to Librarian .. .. | 10 | .. | ||
| (g) | For other contingencies .. .. .. | 30 | .. | ||
| (h) | Provident Fund (one thirty-second of the expenditure onsalary), | ||||
| (i) | For taxes .. .. | (Actual sum payable). |
| Monthly. | Annual increment. | |||||
| (a) - | Rs. | Rs. | ||||
| (i) | For Pincipal | .. | .. | *200 | 10 | |
| (ii) | For two trained graduates including Physical Instructor | .. | .. | 200 | 10 | |
| (iii) | For three untrained graduates or I.A., C.T. | .. | .. | 210 | 9 | |
| (iv) | For one Acharya | .. | .. | 70 | 3 | |
| (v) | For three trained Matric or untrained I.A. | .. | .. | 150 | 6 | |
| (b) | For a clerk | .. | .. | 45 | 2 | |
| (c) | For two menials | .. | .. | 55 | .. | |
| (d) | For repairs to building | .. | .. | 50 | .. | |
| (e) | For Prize and Library | .. | .. | 25 | .. | |
| (f) | Allowance to Librarian | .. | .. | 10 | .. | |
| (g) | For other contingencies | .. | .. | 30 | .. | |
| (h) | For Provident Fund (one thirty-second of the expenditure onsalary) | .. | .. | .. | .. | |
| (i) | For taxes | .. | .. | (Actual sum payable). |
383. Standard scale for Higher Secondary and Multi-purpose Schools.
- The standard scale of teaching staff of an aided Higher Secondary or Multi-purpose school provides for 14 teachers in case of a school which has four classes and with no additional section and 19 teachers in case of school which has six classes with no additional section. One extra teacher is added for each class that is duplicated or for extra language which is taught as literature only. Two extra teachers are added for each additional language which is used as medium of instruction. In multi-purpose school one or two posts of teachers as the case may be, should be added with the addition of every additional vocation subject group.(G. O. no. 1990, dated the 21st May 1959.)384. Standard cost for Higher Secondary and Multi-purpose Schools.
- The standard cost of a school is made up of the following items:-| Basic pay. | Monthly. | Annual increment. | |||
| (a) - | Rs. | Rs. | Rs. | ||
| (i) | For a Principal .. .. .. .. | 200 | 200 | 10 | |
| (ii) | For one trained M.A. Or M.Sc. .. .. | 150 | 150 | 10 | |
| (iii) | For four trained or untrained M.A.or M.Sc. .. | 125 | 500 | 20 | |
| (iv) | For one Acharya or untrained M.A. in Sanskrit .. | 70 | 70 | 3 | |
| (v) | For a Fazil .. .. .. .. | 70 | 70 | 3 | |
| (vi) | For one trained graduate .. .. | 100 | 100 | 5 | |
| (vii) | For four untrained graduates .. .. | 70 | 280 | 12 | |
| (viii) | For one Physical Instructor (Trained) .. | 100 | 100 | 5 | |
| (b) | For a clerk .. .. .. .. | 45 | 45 | 2 | |
| (c) | For two menials .. .. .. | 70 | 70 | 3 | |
| (d) | For repairs to building .. .. .. | 55 | 55 | .. | |
| (e) | For Prize and Library .. .. | .. | 80 | .. | |
| (f) | Allowance to Librarian .. .. | .. | 45 | .. | |
| (g) | For other contingencies .. .. .. | .. | 80 | .. | |
| (h) | Provident Fund (one thirty-second of the expenditure onsalary), | .. | 100 | .. | |
| (i) | For taxes .. .. | (Actual sum payable). |
| Basic pay. | Monthly. | Annual increment. | |||
| (a) - | Rs. | Rs. | Rs. | ||
| (i) | For a Principal .. .. .. .. | *200 | 200 | 10 | |
| (ii) | For two trained M.A. or M. Sc. .. .. | 150 | 300 | 20 | |
| (iii) | For five trained or untrained M.A. or M. Sc | 125 | 625 | 25 | |
| (iv) | For an Acharya or untrained M.A. in Sanskrit .. | 70 | 70 | 8 | |
| (v) | For one Fazil .. .. .. .. | 70 | 70 | 3 | |
| (vi) | For three trained graduate .. .. | *100 | 300 | 15 | |
| (vii) | For four untrained graduates .. .. | 70 | 280 | 12 | |
| (viii) | For one trained Physical Instructor .. .. | 100 | 100 | 5 | |
| (b) | For a clerk .. .. .. .. | 45 | 45 | 2 | |
| (c) | For a clerk-cum-librarian .. .. .. | 70 | 70 | 3 | |
| (d) | For tow menials .. .. .. | .. | 55 | .. | |
| (e) | For laboratory .. .. .. | .. | 80 | .. | |
| (f) | For prize and library .. .. .. | .. | 45 | .. | |
| (g) | For other contingency and T.A. .. .. | .. | 80 | .. | |
| (h) | Repairs to building .. .. .. .. | .. | 100 | .. | |
| (i) | For Provident Fund (one thirty-second of the expenditure onsalaries), | .. | .. | .. | |
| (j) | For taxes .. .. .. | (Actual sum payable). |
385. Grants to High Schools.
- The monthly grant to an aided High school (including Sarvodaya High school) is limited to the difference between the standard cost calculated as above and the fee income, provided that the minimum grant half of the standard cost.The standard scales will be rigidly followed by the Board of Secondary Education when assessing grants, and no allowance may be made in any circumstances for expenditure in excess of these scales without reference to Government. As an exception, the Board of Secondary Education is at liberty to make a general deduction of 10 per cent from the grants assessed and to use the funds so liberated for efficiency grants to deserving schools. Such grants shall be awarded after consideration of the following points :-386. Standard scale for Middle Schools.
- No longer in force, hence omitted.387. Grants to Middle Schools.
- The monthly grant to an aided middle school is limited to the difference between the standard cost calculated as above and the income derived from all local sources such as fees and subscriptions, provided that the minimum grants to a middle school shall be Rs. 30 a month. When school has been in existence for three years or more, the amount of the local subscriptions may for the purpose of this article be reckoned, if the school authority so desires, at the average of the full subscriptions for the last three years, instead of at the sum realised during the past year. Any subscription over that amount may go to provide a reserve fund, while the standard may subsequently be lowered in cases of genuine adversity.(Government notification no. 194-E., dated the 29th January, 1915 and Government Resolution no. 3268, dated the 5th December, 1923.)388. Grants to Special Schools.
- The monthly grant to an aided special shool (other than a training school) may not exceed two-thirds of the monthly cost of the school without the sanction of Government.(Government letter no. 104-E.R., dated the 15th May, 1926.)389. Recurring grants to schools other than High Schools.
- The power to sanction recurring grants to schools other than High schools under their control is exercised by Sub-divisional Education Officers in respect of middle schools and the hostels attached to them (except in areas where the local bodies have assumed control of such schools) and in other cases by the District Education Officer or Inspectress of Schools, Bihar subject to the following conditions:-390. Recurring grants to High Schools.
- Grants to High schools will be sanctioned by the Board of Secondary Education on the following conditions:-391. Religious Neutrality.
- Grant are given on the principle of strict religious neutrality; and no preference will be shown to any school on the ground that any particular religious doctrines are taught or not taught therein.(Government Resolution no 194-E., dated the 29th January 1915.)392. Prescribed Forms.
- Every application for a recurring grant must be made in the prescribed form. On receipt of the application a memorandum will be issued by the authority competent to make or renew the grant, and on receipt of the memorandum the committee will execute a deed of acceptance in the prescribed form.(Government notification no. 194-E., dated the 29th January 1915.)393. Period of grant.
- Grants shall be sanctioned ordinarily for a term of one year. The District Education Officer or Inspectress or, in the case of High school, the Board of Secondary Education may at any time during its currency revise any grant. Notice of a proposed reduction or suspension shall be given to the committee, who should be allowed an opportunity of stating any objection that they may have.(R. and O. page 514, paragraph 20.)394. Reduction of grant.
- Where a school does not in any month spend on salaries the full amount specified in the order sanctioning the grant, the grant for the following month may at the discretion of the District Education Officer or Inspectress, as the case may be, be reduced so as to bear the same proportion to the amount sanctioned as the amount paid on account of salaries bears to the amount approved.(Government notification no 194-E., dated the 29th January 1915; and G. O. no. 1486-E , dated the 14th April 1923.)Note. - Grant-in-aid bills are payable quarterly for one month in arrear and two months in advance.(G. O. no. 4051-E., dated the 25th November 1933.)395. Class accommodation.
- Class accommodation must not be below the I scale prescribed in the rules for capital grants.(Government notification no. 194-E, dated the 29th January 1915 and G.O. no, 1486-E, dated the 14th April 1923.)396. Course of Study and Text-books.
- The Departmental curricula as notified from time to time, must be followed, except in so far as special exemption I may be given by the Director. Text-books must be selected from the lists prescribed I by the Director in accordance with the rules for the working of the Text-book Committee.(Government notification no. 194-E., dated the 29th January 1915.)397. Drill and Drawings.
- Provision must be made in all schools for instruction is drill, and also is Secondary Schools for instruction is drawing.(Government notification no. 194-E, dated the 29th January 1915)Note. - Drill is not a compulsory subject for girls.398. Staff.
- The appointment and dismissal of every teacher must be notified to the Director or a duly authorised officer of the Department. No appointment may be confirmed until it has received the sanction of the Director or Officer authorised, who may inquire into any case regarding the dismissal of a teacher; these powers will ordinarily be exercised by the Sub-divisional Educational Officer in the case of middle schools and by the District Education Officer in the case of High schools. Government may forbid the employment in an aided school of any teacher who has been declared by the Director unfit to be a teacher.(Government notification no. 194-E., dated the 29th January 1915.)Note. - The District Education Officer and Inspectress should maintain up-to-date statements showing the staff of each aided high school under their control. Similar information regarding aided schools of lower status should be collected by the appropriate inspecting officers and should be kept up-to-date.(D.P.I.'s letter no. 7-11-C., dated the 11th January 1915.)399. Protection from small-pox.
- It is undesirable that schools should employ as a teacher or admit as a pupil any one unprotected from small-pox.(Government notification no. 194-E., dated the 29th January 1915.)400. Promotions, etc.
- All questions relating to the promotion of pupils and to the selection of candidates for the Secondary School Examination and scholarship examinations should remain in the hands of the Headmaster/Principal and should be subject to the supervision of inspecting officers of the Department.(Government notification no. 194-E., dated the 29th January 1915.)401. Fees.
- All schools, with the exception of training schools, girls' schools, night schools for adult, schools for aborigines and other specially exempted by the Director, must levy fees from all scholars, save as provided in the rules for free-studentship. (see Articles 316 to 319.)(Government notification no. 194-E., dated the 29th January 1915.)402. Holidays.
- Holidays should not exceed the number of days prescribed from time to time by the Department for Government schools of corresponding grades, except under special circumstances and with the sanction of the District Education Officer and Inspectress, as the case may be. (see Article 235.)(Government notification no. 194-E., dated the 29th January 1915.)403. Transfer Rules.
- Schools must abide by the transfer rules sanctioned by Government.(Government notification no. 194-E., dated the 29th January 1915.)404. Maintenance of Register.
- The registers prescribed from time to time for Government schools must be maintained (see Article 211) and in addition a book giving details of subscriptions.(Government notification no. 194-E., dated the 29th January 1915.)405. Receipts.
- All receipts, from whatever sources or for whatever purpose collected,must be entered in the account book of the school which must be open to examination by any officer entitled to visit the school.(Government notification no. 194-E, dated the 29th January, 1915)406. Disposal of surplus funds.
- The funds of the school may be spent only for the purpose detailed in the memorandum sanctioning the grant. All surplus funds must be deposited month by month in the Postal Savings Bank or in manner approved by the District Education Officer or the Inspectress, as the case may be the account should be made out in the joint names of the Secretary and one of the members of the committee, who will be selected for this purpose by the committee. The joint signatures of these two (members will be required for withdrawals.(Government notification no. 194-E., dated the 29th January 1915.)407. Expenditure above the sanctioned scale.
- Withdrawals over and above the sanctioned scale of expenditure must receive the sanction of the District Education Officer or the Inspectress, as the case may be, provided that the Secretary may regain a sum of Rs. 20 in the case of a high school, Rs. 10 in the case of middle school, and Rs. 2 in the case of a schools of lower grade, for expenditure on unforeseen contingencies. The expenditure should not without special reason exceed these sums in any month, and should be duly entered in the cash book.(Government notification no. 194-E., dated the 29th January 1915.)408. Inspection.
- Inspecting officers should interfere as little as possible with the management of an aided school, but they should see that the instruction is efficient, that promotions are not made so as to prejudice the working and organisation of the classes, and that the conditions on which the grant is made are fulfilled.(Government notification no. 194-E., dated the 29th January 1915.)409. Renewal and termination of grants.
- Applications for the renewal of grants should be made to the proper authority at least three months before the expiry of the current grant. Submitting officers must pass on the applications with recommendations at once. Save when prolonged enquiries are necessitated or under other exceptional circumstances, grants for the period between the expiry and renewal of the grant will not be given.(Government notification no. 194-E., dated the 29th January 1915.)410. Withdrawal of grants.
- A school which has at any time been in receipt of aid will continue to be regarded as an aided school and will be bound by these rules until the aid is formally withdrawn by the sanctioning authority or until the school committee has formally communicated to the sanctioning authority its desire to be no longer aided or bound by the grant-in-aid rules.(Government notification no, 194-E., dated the 29th January 1915.)411. Abolition of schools.
- If an aided school is abolished, Government may claim a fair share of any balance at its credit, if any difference of opinion arises as to the amount which may fairly be claimed under this rule, the matter will be referred to Government for orders.(Government notification no. 194-E., dated the 29th January 1915.)412. Grants for school equipment.
- Grants may be made for furniture, for apparatus, chemicals, maps, diagrams and models; for books for school libraries; and for exhibitions of needle work or other art or industrial school work.(Government notification no. 194-E., dated the 29th January 1915.)413. Grants may only be given for desks of an approved type.
- Grants may not be given to meet the cost of seats or desks of a pattern which has not been approved by the Department.(Government notification no. 194-E., dated the 29th January 1915.)414. Furniture grants.
- Furniture grants may be sanctioned by Regional Deputy Directors of Education up to a limit of Rs. 500 in each case and up to the extent of the funds placed at their disposal by the Director save with the special sanction of Government, the grant may not exceed half of the total cost. (Government notification no. 194-E., dated the 29th January 1915; and Government notification no. 1325-E.R., dated the 29th September 1931.)415. Submission of applications.
- Applications must be submitted in the prescribed form so as to reach the District Education Officer not later than July 31st in each year.(Government notification no. 194-E., dated the 29th January 1915.)416. Vouchers must be produced before the grant is paid.
- The grant should be paid only on submission, before the date specified in the order sanctioning the grant, of vouchers duly receipted. It should be drawn on a bill in the prescribed form.(Government notification no. 194-E., dated the 29th January 1915.)417. Abolition of a school.
- If the school is closed within five years from the payment of the grant, and if the grant exceeded Rs. 200 it shall be at the option of Government to purchase the articles at a valuation, deducting from the price an amount calculated on the proportion which the grant bore to the original cost.(Government notification no, 194-E., dated the 29th January 1915.)Section XMiscellaneous418. Forbidden practices.
- The following practices are strictly forbidden:-419. Loyalty and patriotism.
- The spirit of loyalty and patriotism should be encouraged in students by the selection of suitable books for use as literary readers by the proper teaching of Indian History, by the singing of loyal and patriotic songs, by lectures on suitable occasions and by encouraging loyalty to one's own school and the team spirit in games. The Boy Scout and Girls Guide Movements should be encouraged, and troops of boy scouts or girl guides should be formed wherever suitable and efficient leaders are forthcoming.(Government Resolution no. 3268-E., dated the 5th December 1923.)420. Respect to members of the staff.
- Students should respectfully salute all masters on first meeting them for the day. The masters will return the salute.421. Courtesy in the class-room.
- When any master or visitor enters a classroom in which the pupils are seated, the class should immediately rise and remain standing, until it is asked to be seated.422. Membership of outside clubs, etc.
- Any pupil on the rolls of a school, who wishes to join or to continue to be a member of any club, society or organisation outside the school, must obtain the approval of the Headmaster/ Principal before doing so. Any breach of this rule will be regarded as a serious offence, in granting or withdrawing recognition to clubs, societies or organisations, the Headmaster or the Principal shall be guided by instructions issued by the Director from time to time. If the Headmaster or the Principal has any doubt about the suitability of any outside club, society or organisation, of which any student wishes to continue to be a member, he shall refer the matter to the District Education Officer whose decision, subject to any orders issued by the Director, shall be final.(Government resolution no. 2264-E., dated the 22nd October .1942; and Government notification no. 287-E., dated the 5th February 1943.)423. School clubs and societies.
- No club or society may be started or maintained in any Government or aided school without the approval of the Headmaster/Principal as honorary members of all such school clubs and societies and will be required to interest themselves in their progress and welfare. No person who is not at the time a member of the school may be a member of any such club or society or attend meetings of such save at the invitation of a person authorised by the Headmaster or the Principal.424. School broadcasts.
- School students should be encouraged to take advantage of the listening of school broadcasts. In some schools perhaps the listening of school broadcasts is not well-organised or does not form part of the school time-table with the result that the school children do not get the benefit of the school programme, broadcast by the All-India Radio.(D. P. I.'s letter no. 240, dated the 29th January 1958.)425. Orientation of teaching for the development of a broad national outlook among school children.
- The need for developing a broad national outlook among students is extremely important and it can be achieved only with the co-operation of teachers in different schools who while teaching subjects like language, History, Geography and Social Studies may keep this point in view and give greater emphasis on the development of broad national outlook.(D.P.I.'s letter no. 193, dated the 22ad January 1958.)426. Use of Educational films in schools.
- With a view to ensure maximum use of film as medium of visual education and as a part of an integrated programme for education in schools at the various stages of instruction, the attention of teachers and of others using the educational film is drawn to the procedure, briefly described as follows:-427. Use of buildings of Government and Non-Government Institutions for holding of special and cultural function and accommodating Barat Parties.
428. Performance of religious functions and ceremonies in the premises of Educational Institution.
- Religious functions and ceremonies in institutions other than those run by religious minorities, should not be allowed to be performed on the institution premises except with the approval of the Managing Committee or the Governing Body of the institution concerned. In regard to institution run by religious minorities, the provision of Article 428 (B) and the Constitution may be followed which lays down that all minorities whether based on religion or language, shall have the right to establish and administer educational institutions of their choice. In such institution the special constitutional rights of religious minorities are to be respected, and no attempt should be made by others to perform any religious function or ceremony except with the permission of the authorities of the institution.(G.O. no. 706, dated the 13th March 1958.)428A. Use of Compound in schools.
- In many schools, high, middle, as well as primary, there is a compound which is not used to the best advantage of the school at present. This may be utilised to the advantage of the teachers and the students alike in growing vegetable or some other crops such a maize, wheat, according to the suitability of the soil and the seasons. Where there is a hostel within the school compound, this can be done easily by the students living in the hostel in their spare hours and the produce should be enjoyed by them. Where there is no hostel, so the boys are sure to be interested in this form of activity and healthful physical culture who will be willing to work in the garden for some hours in the afternoon in a week. Some periods can also be provided for this work, particularly for classes IX and downwards, in the time-table of the school of this labour. Each High school usually has a chowkidar to watch the building in the night and he can easily look after the garden in the night even if there be no good fencing for the compound. In the middle and primary schools of course, there is no chowkidar but the compound is not big and it may not cost much to fence it in the rural.To fence it in the rural areas with the branches of trees which may be done by the students and the teachers and then vegetables may be grown suitable for the different seasons. If there be any profit from the sale proceeds of the produce which should be refunded into the school account.In some schools the practice of supplying mid-day meals is still continuing and in such schools the produce may be utilised for this purpose, and all the students of the school by turn should be required to work in the garden if the compound is big enough.It has been brought to the notice of the Provincial Government by the Government of India that in Ceylon every school is required to grow vegetables and mid-day meal to children is supplied out of it. The scheme is stated to be a great success in Ceylon. There do not appear to be any reason why it should not succeed in India if school authorities including Managing Committees and Headmasters will pay their fullest attention to it in the interest of their schools.A report as early as possible, as to how far the Scheme has proved to be practicable, be sent.(Letter No. 9341 dated 23rd December, 1944.)429. Staging Drama on the school premises.
- The heads of schools are requested not to permit the staging of plays or organising of variety entertainments etc., by students, either on the school premises or in the school hostels or elsewhere, which are calculated to be subversive of disciplined behaviour. Before permitting any drama, etc., to be staged the heads of institutions must fully satisfy themselves that it contains nothing objectionable from the moral, political or any other point of view.(D. P. I.'s letter no. 29310-E., dated the 25th October 1952.)430. Attendance at political meetings, etc.
- Students of a recognised school are not permitted to become or to continue to be members of a political organisation, or to attend or take part in political meetings or demonstrations or in the organisation or arrangements for the conduct of any such meeting or demonstration. Any breach of this rule will be regarded as a serious offence Should any doubt arise as to whether a meeting, demonstration or organisation is or is not of a political nature, the Headmaster/Principal shall consult the local executive authority and act under its advice.(Government resolution no. 2264, dated the 22nd October 1942, and Government notification no. 287-E., dated the 5th February 1943.)431.
A teacher in any recognised school shall be disqualified for continuance of his employment if he takes any part in political propaganda or demonstration or becomes or continues to be a member of a political organisation.432.
A teacher in any recognised school shall be disqualified for continuance of his employment if he takes part in any propaganda or demonstration or campaign in connection with election to a Local Body or stands as a candidate for such election because participation in such election interferes with the legitimate moral duties: provided that a teacher in any such recognised school, other than a Government school may stand as a candidate for election to the Legislative Council of the State of Bihar from a Teachers' or Graduates' Constituency.(Government notification no. 287-E., dated the 5th February 1943; Government notification no. 8894, dated the 8th March 1952; and G.O. no. 2049, dated the 24th June 1958.)433. Other meetings.
- Headmasters or the Principals may in consultation with the President of the Managing Committee in the case of Government schools and the Secretary in the case of aided schools, prohibit pupils from attendance at any meetings which they deem unsuitable or unseemly.(D.P.I.'s circular no. 42, dated the 23rd October 1914.)434. Teachers' association.
- An Association should be formed of the teachers in each High schools in the State. Inspecting Officers stationed in the same town should also be eligible for membership. Meetings should be held on the last Saturday of each month under the presidency of the Headmaster or the principal in absence of a Vice-President to be selected by him, and the discussion should be confined to professional subjects. At the beginning of each year one of the members should be selected for the post of Secretary of the Association. The Secretary should be required to keep a record of all the work done by the Association during the year. This record should be placed before the inspecting officer in-charge of the school during his visits, and when specially useful work has been done by an Association, sufficient particulars of the same should be sent by him to the other schools under his control.(D.P.I.'s circular no. 3, dated the 9th January 1915.)435. Headmasters'/Principals' Associations.
- In places where there are several High/Higher Secondary schools, the District Education Officer should encourage the formation of Headmasters' or the Principals' Associations with a view to promoting harmony and co-operation among the different schools. It will suffice if meetings of such associations are held once a term or twice a year, but nothing need prevent more frequent meetings, if such a course seems desirable to the Headmasters/Principals.(D.P.I.'s circular no. 3, dated the 9th January 1953.)436. Educational Journals.
- Educational journals managed by private enterprise should be encouraged as affording a means of keeping educationists in touch with one another.(Government resolution no. 3268-E., dated the 5th December 1923.)437. School Libraries.
- A good library is an essential part of equipment of every Secondary School. It should in general consist of three parts, viz., (i) a reference library, (ii) a teachers' library, and (iii) a scholars' library. Adequate arrangements should be made for lending books to the pupils. It is part of the duty of every teacher to encourage his pupils to make use of the books in the school library.(D.P.I.'s circular no. 4, dated the 19th January 1915; and Government resolution no. 3268-E., dated the 5th December 1923.)438. Responsibilities for Libraries.
- The Headmaster/Principal is responsible for the library. He may, however, place selected teachers in-charge of the teachers' library and the different scholars' libraries, and the clerk if he has one, incharge of the reference library.(D.P. I.'s circular no. 27, dated the 13th September 1916.)Note. - In Government High/Higher Secondary schools, where there is a paid librarian, that officer is responsible for the reference library and teachers' library. He is also required to keep a list of the books placed in the different scholars' libraries, but each class-teacher is responsible for the books made over to him for the use of his class.439. Arrangements of Libraries.
- In Middle schools the three libraries may be combined and all the books may be kept in one room under the care of the Headmaster. In High/Higher Secondary schools the reference library should be kept in the teachers' common room while the scholars' library should possess a separate book-case containing books, other than text-books, suited to the age and attainments of its pupils.(D.P.I.'s circular no. 4, dated the 19th January 1915.)440. Library registers.
- The following registers should be kept for each school library:-441. Stock-taking.
- Every library should be closed for a fortnight in April, or May for the annual stock-taking. Each person in charge of any section of the library should then be required to submit to the Headmaster/Principal a statement showing the number of books in stock at the time of the last stock-taking, the number since received, and the number remaining in stock. If any books have been damaged, lost or not returned, he should give full details about them. On receipt of these statements the Headmaster/Principal should submit to his controlling officer a report on the results of the stock-taking. Should the annual stock-taking be omitted by the Headmaster/Principal, or should he omit to delegate his responsibility in the manner indicated in Article 439 he will be held responsible for all losses which have taken place since the previous stock taking.(D.P.I.'s order, dated the 19th June 1929, in file 4L-3-29.)442. Too many text-books should not be bought.
- Not more than two copies of any text-books should be purchased for the library of any Government or aided school. All library books should be numbered and stamped with the name of the school.(D. P. I.'s circular no. 35, dated the 29th July 1913.)443. Loss of books and damage to books.
- Any person losing or disfiguring a volume should be called upon to pay its value or replace it with a similar volume. When the volume belongs to a set or series, he should be required to pay the value of the set unless he can replace it or the value of the rest of the set, if unaffected.(R. & O. page 305 (6), D. P. I.'s circular no. 138, dated the 26th August 1907.)Note. - This rule may be relaxed at the discretion of the Headmaster/Principal in the case of a loss or accident over which the borrower had no control. Such cases should be reported to the District Education Officer.444. Precautions against unsuitable books.
- The District Education Officer and the Inspectress in the course of their inspections should scrutinise the lists of library and prize books bought during the preceding year and if they consider any book unsuitable should draw the attention of the school authority to the matter. They should also examine the catalogue and the library to see that these two correspond and that no undesirable volumes have crept in.(G.O. no. 2205-E., dated the 14th July 1923 and D. P. I.'s orders, dated the 19th June 1929 in file 4L-3-29.)Note. - (i) Headmasters/Principals of Government schools other than teachers' training schools are required to submit for the approval of the District Education Officer lists of the books which they propose to purchase.445. Libraries other than school libraries.
- The following types of libraries in the State are under the administrative control of the Superintendent of Libraries subject to such instruction issued from time to time by the Director of Public Instruction :-446. Khudabux Oriental Public Library.
- This library which is located at Patna and is the only one of its kinds in the State and has a rare and valuable collection of Arabic, Persian and Urdu books and manuscripts and paintings of medieval period, is wholly financed by the State Government and is managed by a Managing Committee nominated by Government.447. Government Urdu Public Library.
- This library is located at Patna. It is wholly financed by the State Government and is managed by a Managing Committee managed by the Government.448. Common-room.
- There should be a common-room in every Government High/Higher Secondary School and if possible, in every other recognised High/Higher Secondary School in which a selection from the periodicals and newspapers approved by Government should be placed. This list of journals so provided must be approved by the District Education Officer. A member of the school staff should be in-charge and a senior pupil may be selected as a monitor to assist him. At the end of the school year all the magazines and papers should be sold by auction and the proceeds added to the common-room fund.Note. - In addition to the appointment of a monitor for the common-room, the appointment of class monitor in High/Higher Secondary and Middle Schools is recommended.449. Informal meeting of parents and guardians.
- An informal meeting of the parents and guardians on the pupils attending each Government High/Higher Secondary School should be held annually, on a Sunday or a holiday. At these meetings the teachers should mix freely with the parents and guardians with a view to enlisting their interest in all measures for the welfare of the school and to remove any misunderstandings that may have arisen.(G.O. no. 1267-E.T., dated the 11th December 1913, and D.P.I's circular no. 54 dated the 31st December 1913.)450. Formation of parent-teachers' association.
- A parent-teachers' association may be formed in High (including Sarvodaya High School) Higher Secondary and Multipurpose schools with the following objectives:-451. Epidemics.
- With a view to preventing schools from becoming centres for the spread of disease, the following rules should be observed:-452. Physical Training.
- Drill, physical exercises and athletic tournaments in schools should be organised in accordance with the instructions given below:-453. School Medical Officers.
- The duties of the school medical officers are to inspect individually the pupils in training schools and in High schools and in those middle schools which are situated in town where there are high schools to examine the sanitation of the school premises, and to deliver lectures on hygiene which must be attended by all school candidates for the Secondary School Examination.(G. O. no. 1289-M.R., dated the 5th August 1920; D. P. I.'s letter no. 6465 and circular no. 22, dated the 6th August 1920.)Note. - (1) The lady school medical officer also visits middle and junior basic teachers' training schools for women.454. Medical Inspection of schools, boys and school buildings in municipal areas.
- In the municipalities where there are Health Officers, these officers are required to visit each High school in the municipality once a quarter to inspect the sanitary condition of the buildings and premises and also to enquire into the prevalence of infectious diseases and the Assistant Directors of Health Services when making their municipal inspection, are required to carry out a similar inspection of all the High schools in municipal areas.(G. O. no. 807-E., dated the 14th May 1917.)455. Medical Inspection in rural areas.
- The medical officers in-charge of District Board dispensaries are required to undertake the medical inspection of the middle schools within their jurisdictions. In districts where there is a Health Officer, he is required to supervise the work. No similar arrangements have been made for the medical inspection of primary schools.(G. O. no. 3951-L.S.G., dated the 24th April 1935.)456. Action to be taken on the reports of Medical Officers.
- Copies of the reports made by the Health Officers and Assistant Director of Health Services will be forwarded by these officers to the municipal authorities concerned, but District Education Officers should make it a point to ascertain that due notice is taken of their suggestions. The results of the medical inspection held during the past year should be mentioned in the annual reports on High schools and in the divisional reports.(D. P. I.'s circular no. 8456, dated the 4th November 1920.)457. Moral conditions in schools.
- The best safeguard against immorality in schools is to encourage athletics and other healthy tastes and occupation and understanding of moral values and respect for all religions. Private talks to boys whose conduct may have laid them open to suspicion may be of use in some cases. Occasionally, where definite proof cannot be established, it may be necessary or desirable to take action merely on the ground of suspicious conduct. In such cases, however, a teacher cannot be dismissed or a boy expelled on mere suspicion based on gossip or anonymous petitions, but only on real evidence of suspicious conduct. Where a definite charge of such conduct against a teacher in a Government school is made to the District Education Officer, the latter is authorised either to draw up proceedings or else to give the teacher the option of resigning but where a teacher is to be dismissed on such a charge, the proceedings must always be submitted to the Director for confirmation. When such a charge is made against a teacher in an aided school, the procedure will be the same, except that the committee will take the place of the District Education Officer.(Government Resolution no. 3268-E., dated the 5th December 1923.)Chapter V
Training Schools and Examination for TeachersSection I - Training Schools458.
The following are the different institutions for the training of teachers, other than the Training Colleges, the rules for which are given in Chapter III;-459. Purpose and control.
- These schools are intended to train teachers for middle, primary and basic schools. They are under the administrative control of the District Education Officer. The Teachers' Training School fulfils the following aims :-460. Length of courses.
- The length of the course is of two years. The session begins from July and ends in June.461. Size of classes and number of students.
- Not more than 100 candidates are admitted in a Teachers' Training School. The maximum number of stipendary students admitted every year in Teachers' Training School for men is ninety. Ten non-stipendary students are also admitted. These students are entitled to be granted, in order of merit any stipend which may fall vacant. In Teachers' Training School for women all the 100 female trainees are admitted as stipendary students. No fee is charged but the following miscellaneous charges should be levied.Note. - In 19 Teacher's Training Schools for men only, all the 100 trainees are admitted as stipendaries.462. Admission.
- Admission will ordinarily be confined to men who have passed the Secondary School Examination but non-matriculate candidates belonging to Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes and ladies can be admitted subject to the proviso that-463. Selection of candidates.
- All candidates seeking admission should apply to the Principal of the school. They are required to appear at a preliminary competitive test at selection camps to be held by the District Education Officer with the assistance of a Selection Board. Candidates will have to appear for interview before the Selection Board which will test (i) their aptitude for teaching profession, (ii) share in social life and activities, (iii) genuine interest in and love for children, and (iv) academic efficiency and desire for the improvement of physical fitness, etc. Candidates competing at the test and personal interview will be finally selected, in order of merit.464. Medium of Instruction.
- The medium of instruction in all the Teachers Training Schools shall be simple Hindi. Hindi shall be taught as a compulsory subject and for those whose mother-tongue is other than Hindi, special additional classes in Hindi shall be held to enable them to gain appreciable knowledge in the same. This intensive training in Hindi should be started from the beginning of the session and continued for three months or more according to the attainment of the pupil-teachers concerned. Such pupil-teachers whose mother-tongue is other than Hindi should be given the option of maintaining their records in their mother-tongue. They should also be given the option of writing their answers in their mother-tongue. The following instructions should also be followed:-465. Stipends.
- Male stipendiary candidates are given a monthly stipend of Rs. 20 each and female candidates are given at the rate of Rs. 25 per month. They are required to execute agreements binding themselves to complete the prescribed course, to abide by the school rules (these rules forbid students from engaging in work other than training school work) and on completion of the course to serve as teachers in Bihar for at least three years, if required to do so on an initial salary prescribed by Government from time to time.(G. O. no. 126, dated the 4th July, 1955.)466. Residence.
- Every student should reside in the school hostel, permission to live outside may in exceptional cases be granted by the Principal on good and sufficient reasons.467. Teaching staff.
- The teaching staff of a Teachers' Training School consists of.-468. Practice teaching.
- The practical teaching work is carried on in the local practising school which though maintained, or aided by the District Education Fund, or Municipalities, is placed under the control of the Principal of Teachers' Training School.The following are the subjects and syllabus for the written examination :-| (a) | Theoretical subject- | Distribution of marks. | |
| (i) | Principles of Education and History of Education. | 100 | |
| (ii) | Educational Psychology. | 100 | |
| (iii) | School Management and Principles of Community Life. | 100 | |
| (iv) | Methodology (General and Special) | 100 | |
| (v) | Detailed study of the curriculum and its subject matter ClassesI to VII-Mathematics, Social Studies and General Science. | 150 | |
| (vi) | Advance Hindi for Hindi-speaking pupils and National languagefor non-Hindi speaking pupils. | 100 | |
| (vii) | Study of Regional language (Sanskrit, Urdu, Maithili, Santhal,Oraon, Mundari and Ho ). | 50 | |
| Total .... | 700 |
| (b) | Practical subjects- | Distribution of marks. | |||
| (i) | Crafts …. | …. | …. | 300 | |
| (ii) | Practice Teaching …. | …. | …. | 200 | |
| (iii) | Community Life and Extension Service | …. | …. | 100 | |
| (iv) | Physical Training …. | …. | …. | 50 | |
| (v) | Arts and music …. | …. | …. | 50 | |
| Total .... | 700 |
469. Pass Marks.
- The minimum pass marks to be obtained by each successful candidate in different subjects will be as follows :-| Percent | |||
| (a) | Practical subjects …. …. | ... | 40 |
| (b) | Assessment …. …. | ... | 40 |
| (c) | Written examination of theoretical subjects | ... | 36 |
470. Place of examination.
- Power to conduct the examination is now vested in the School Examination Board, vide Resolution No. 1096, dated 5.4.1963.471. Private candidates.
- It is now governed by Rules of the School Examination Board.472. Transfers.
- Transfers of pupil-teachers from one training school to another are permissible with the consent of the District Education Officers.473. Holidays.
- The maximum number of holidays in a Teachers' Training School is 81.474. Leave and absence rules.
- Leave to students in a training school is granted by the Principal who should observe the leave rules laid down in Chapter IX for the grant of leave to scholarship-holders.475.
Schools under private management may be recognised by the Bihar Basic Education Board, as Teachers' Training Schools and may be permitted to send up students for the Training Examination conducted by the Board.476. Conditions of confirmation of teachers.
- No teacher appointed or transferred to a recognised high or middle school, who is not trained, be confirmed to his post unless, within two years after his joining the school, he obtains a certificate of having passed the Half-yearly Examination in Art of Teaching.(G O. no. 559-E, dated the 20th March 1937.)477. Examination of English teachers.
- An examination for teachers who teach through the medium of English will be held half-yearly by each Regional Deputy Director of Education on dates to be notified by him. Candidates who appear at this examination must have passed the Intermediate Examination or some Higher Examination and should bring their certificates with them.(R. & O., page 371, para, 1,.G.O. no. 653-E, dated the 6th February 1933.)478. Examination of language teachers.
- A similar examination will be held half-yearly for teachers of language subjects who have passed at least the Secondary School Examination. The examination will be conducted by the Principal of the Training School in the presence of the District Education Officer. Candidates should bring their educational certificate with them.(G. O. no. 1-E., dated the 2nd January 1935.)479. Examination.
- The examination for masters who teach through the medium of English will be held at a high school to be selected and notified by the Regional Deputy Director of Education. The examination for teachers of language subjects will be held at the District Teachers' Training School.(G. O. no. 1-E., dated the 2nd January 1935.)480. Nature of the examination.
- The examination both for English and language teachers will be mainly practical, and will consist of-481. Time required for the examination.
- The oral examination of each candidate need not take more than 30 to 40 minutes.(R. & O., page 372, para. 4.)482. Certificates.
- The Regional Deputy Director will grant certificates to those who, in his opinion, satisfy the tests prescribed above.(R. & O., page 372, para. 5.)Chapter VI
Oriental Education
Section I - Sanskrit Education483.
In exercise of the powers conferred by section 44 of the Kameshwar Singh Darbhanga Sanskrit Vishwavidyalaya Act, 1960 (Bihar Act VI of 1960), the Governor of Bihar has been pleased to direct that the powers of control and superintendence conferred upon the Bihar Sanskrit Association in Government Resolution no. 4124, dated the 11th August 1956, be exercised and performed by the Board of Sanskrit Education, Bihar constituted in the Government Resolution no. 322, dated the 24th January 1961, in the manner indicated therein. (See Section IX of Chapter X.)(Government notification no. 323, dated the 24th January 1961.)Section II - Islamic Education484. Classes of Institutions.
- Recognised Islamic institutions are of two kinds, viz.,485. The Madrasa Examination Board.
- The control of Madrasas is exercised through the Madrasa Examination Board, which conducts their examinations. The Board consists of 18 members, viz.,486. Functions of the Madrasa Examination Board.
- The functions of the Board are-487. Meetings.
- The Board meets at Patna twice a year, once inter alia to moderate papers and fix the dates of the examinations and once inter alia to declare the results and appoint examiners for the following year. The time and place of the meetings are fixed by the President and Secretary in consultation.(Government Resolution no. 436-E.R., dated the 4th August 1922, and notification no. 575-E.R., dated the 14th August 1922.)488. Rules of business.
- The Board has power to draft its own rules of business subject to the approval of the Director. The following are the rules at present in force.-489. Channel of correspondence.
- Correspondence between the Board and Government passes through the Director.(Government Resolution no. 436-E. R.. dated the 4th August 1922.)490. Travelling allowance.
- Non-official members of the Board are entitled to travelling allowance at second class rates for their journeys to attend meetings.(Government Resolution no. 436-E. ft, dated the 4th August 1922.)491. Scheme of studies.
- The Madrasa course covers a total period of fifteen years, viz; one-year course for the seven junior classes, of which the first three are called Tahtania (lower) and the next four are called Wastania (middle). At the end of the 7th year an examination, is held. The Wastania examination, like the higher examination, is conducted by the Madrasa Examination Board. There are four two-year senior courses followed by the Fauqania (upper), the Maulavi, the Alim and the Fazil Examinations, respectively. These five examinations are public.After passing the Fazil Examination students are allowed to undertake research work for two years and submit a thesis for the still higher title of Kamil.(Government notification no. 182-E., dated the 15th January 1923, no. 120-E., dated the 12th January 1925 and Government Resolution no. 3348-E, dated the 7th August 1935.)492. Fees.
| Name of examination | Fee. | ||
| Rs. | |||
| Wastania Examination | .. | .. | *1 |
| Fauqania Examination | .. | .. | 2 |
| Maulavi Examination | .. | .. | 3 |
| Alim Examination | .. | .. | 4 |
| Fazil Examination | .. | .. | 5 |
| Name of examination | For setting a paper. | For making a paper | |||
| Rs. | P. | ||||
| Wastania Examination | .. | .. | .. | *8 | 12 |
| Fauqania Examination | .. | .. | .. | 10 | 25 |
| Maulavi Examination | .. | .. | .. | 15 | 37 |
| Alim Examination | .. | .. | .. | 20 | 50 |
| Fazil Examination | .. | .. | .. | 25 | 62 |
493. Recognition of Madrasa.
- The following are the rules for the recognition madrasas :-494. Scholarships.
- The Madrasa Examination Board awards annually the following scholarships and rewards :-495. Governing Body.
- There is at Patna a madrasa named the Madrasa Islamia Shamshul Huda which was established by the late Shri Saiyid Nurul Huda, C. I. E., and is now managed by Government. The Governing Body of the madrasa is composed as follows:-496. Appointment of members of the Governing body.
- The State Government may remove any member of the Governing Body and any vacancy in the Governing Body caused by such removal or by resignation, absence or death shall be filled, by the State Government on the nomination of the Commissioner of the Patna Division.(Government notification no. 1929-E,, dated the 21st October 1937.)497. Fees.
- No fees are charged from the students of the Madrasa.498. Controlling Officer.
- The controlling officer of the Madrasa is the Director of Public Instruction, Bihar.(G.O. no. 3846-E., dated, the 26th May 1950.)499. Primary Urdu schools and Urdu teacher.
- A Primary Urdu school should be opened in any place where ten Muhammadan boys desiring to read in it, are forthcoming. If in any primary school six pupils desirous of learning Urdu are likely to be attracted to that school, an Urdu teacher should be appointed temporarily to be confirmed after three months, if six pupils actually attend. Similarly in any Primary Urdu school a Hindi teacher should be appointed, if six pupils desirous of learning Hindi are likely to be attracted to the school. If possible, the second teacher should be capable of teaching in both scripts, so that an extra teacher may be avoided. In the absence of an Upper Primary school in which there is provision for Urdu teaching Upper Primary classes should be attached to Primary Urdu schools if ten pupils are likely to join those classes. In such a case should there be ten Hindi pupils likely to join the upper primary classes of the Primary Urdu schools, a Hindi teacher should be for them.(Government Resolution no. 775-E., dated the 22nd February 1935.)500. Qualification required for Maulvis.
- The following are the qualifications prescribed for the different classes of posts to which Maulvis are appointed:-501. Urdu teachers in Middle schools.
- In Middle schools where there are sufficient Muhammadan boys to justify the provision of separate teaching in Urdu, it is necessary to have either (i) one extra teacher for Urdu, if two at least of the three teachers for the main language can read both Hindi (or Bengali or Oriya as the case may be) and Urdu, or (ii) two extra teachers for Urdu. The first alternative is to be preferred because it is cheaper.(Government Resolution no. 282-E., dated the 13th February 1915 and Government Resolution no. 3268-E., dated the 5th December 1923.)502. Urdu teachers in High schools.
- Some arrangement similar to that required for Middle schools is necessary for the upper classes of High schools in which the medium of language is introduced. In High schools in which Muhammadan pupils are reading, one of the graduate teachers should also be able to teach Urdu translation.(Government Resolution no. 3268-E., dated the 5th December 1933.)503. Classical teachers.
- If five boys in High schools desire to study Persian or Arabic, provision for this should be made.(Government Resolution no. 3268-E., dated the 5th December 1933.)Note. - Articles 499 and 500-503 apply mutatis mutandis to other minorities, e.g., in backward areas a Lower Primary school should be opened in any place where ten pupils desire to read in it, and in such areas Upper Primary classes should be attached to Primary schools provided there are ten boys desiring to read Sanskrit, provision should be made for it.504. The Mohsin Fund.
- From the Mohsin Fund, which owes its origin to a deed executed by Haji Muhammad Mohsin of Hooghly in 1806 a grant is made annually in favour of this State. This amount is spent in part payment of the fees of poor but deserving Muhammdan pupils in schools and colleges, the distribution being made by the Director of Public Instruction, BiharChapter VII
Hostels and Messes
Section IGeneral Rules505. Application of the Rules in this Section.
- The rules in this section apply to all hostels and messes connected with -506. Control of Students Living in Hostel or Messes.
- Students living in hostels or messes will be considered to be under the direct control of the heads of the institutions to which hostels or messes are attached, not only during school hours, but also at all other times during the school terms.(R. & O. page 564, rule 3.)507. Residence of Students.
- Every student, not living with his parents, or a guardian, approved by the Headmaster/Principal, must reside either in a hostel, or mess recognised by the Headmaster/Principal.(Government Order no. 2306-E., dated the 13th December 1944.)508. Admissions.
- A special form has been prepared for applicants for admission to Government or aided schools who also desire admission to a hostel or mess. This form duly signed must accompany their applications. Conditions for admission in any hostel should be that no caste distinction will be observed and that there will be a common kitchen and common dining hall. Those who are not prepared for it should not be admitted in the hostel.(D. P. I.'s circular no. 2, dated the 6th January, 1915, and letter no 6727, dated the 9th June, 1950.)509. Caution Money.
- No boarder will be formally admitted to a hostel until he has paid the caution money prescribed. In Government hostels for High/Higher Secondary including Sarvodaya High Schools, the caution money for pupil is Rs. 2. The caution money must not be utilised during the period of a boarder's residence for the realisation of his fees or fines. It may be utilised in payment or part payment of breakages unpaid for at the time of boarder's leaving, or of charge due after he has left. It will be forfeited in cases of expulsion. If it is not required for any such charges, it will be returned to the boarder on his finally quitting the hostel.510. Leaving Fee.
- When a boarder quits a hostel for any reason save that he is quitting the school with proper transfer certificate, he will be liable at the discretion of the Principal or Headmaster to pay a leaving fee of Re. 1, in the case of a High/Higher Secondary including Sarvodaya High school pupil.511. Expulsion from a Hostel.
- Expulsion from a hostel or the quitting of a hostel without leave involves expulsion from the institution in which the boarder is reading.512. Feeding Arrangements.
- No boarder will be permitted to take his meals in any part of the hostel except the rooms set apart for that purpose by the hostel authority.513. Supervision.
- Every Government or aided hostel must be under the immediate charge of a Superintendent. An Assistant Superintendent should be appointed if the number of boarders exceeds 30. The Superintendent and Assistant Superintendent should remain in residence during the whole year, subject to such leave as may be granted to them during vacations by the proper authority.(D. P. I.'s letter to Govt. no. 20867, dated the 18th November 1908.)514. Forbidden Practices.
- (i) The use of drugs, intoxicants, or (in school hostel) tobacco.515. Visitors.
- Only boarders are ordinarily permitted to enter hostel precincts. The following rules indicate the exceptions that may be made.-(a)With due notice to the Superintendent, guardians and relatives of boarders may visit the hostel.(b)Friends of boarders may with previous permission, be allowed to visit the hostel during a stated period in each day. Visitors may not take meals in the hostel except with the Superintendent's permission. The Superintendent should exercise great care in these matters and should refer doubtful cases to the Principal/Headmaster,(c)Persons not on the roll of school should not be allowed to occupy even temporarily any vacant place in the school hostel except-516. Common Rooms.
- There should, if possible, be a common-room in every hostel where a selection from the list of papers and periodicals approved by Government should be placed. Rules for the use of this common-room should be framed by the Superintendent.517. Leave of Absence.
- Leave of absence from the hostel must in all cases be obtained in advance either from the head of the institution or from the Hostel Superintendent, as the hostel authority may direct. It will not ordinarily be granted unless a written request is made by the parent or guardians.518. Overstaying Leave.
- Should a boarder overstay leave (a) if he brings a satisfactory written explanation from his parent or guardian he may, at the discretion of the hostel authority, be excused; (b) if no satisfactory explanation is produced he may be punished at the discretion of the Principal or Headmaster.519. Medical Supervision.
- Every Government or aided hostel must be under the charge of a proper medical authority, provided that there is a qualified doctor within two miles of the hostel, and the authority of each such hostel is bound to see that proper medical arrangements are made and medicine supplied when required. In the case of Government hostel the officer in-charge of the school to which the hostel is attached will, in consultation with the Civil Surgeon, submit to the Director through the usual channel a recommendation as to the Medical Officer to be appointed. The Director will consult the Director of Health Services before passing orders.(G. of I. letter no: 967, dated the 25th July, 1902, and D. P. I.'s order no. nil., dated the 22nd April, 1933 in the file 1H-19-1933).Notes. - (1) The same facilities are extended to the students residing in hostel attached to Teachers Training Schools.(G. O. no. 4128, dated the 7th June, 1956.)520. Registers.
- The registers to be maintained in a hostel are the following:-521. Hostel Allowances.
- The allowances admissible to the Superintendents of Government hostels are reckoned on the maximum number of students in residence in the month for which the allowance is drawn and during vacations on the number in residence in the month preceding the vacations. For the purpose of this rule any boarders for whom additional accommodation has been made available by the use, without the Director's sanction, of buildings not originally intended for hostel purposes should be neglected.(D. P. I.'s letter no. Government no. 20867, dated the 18th November, 1908 and D. P. I.'s letter no. 7676, dated the 12th August, 1918.)522. Hostel Allowances During Vacations.
- Superintendents and Assistant Superintendents will get no allowance for any period of a vacation during which they have not been placed on duty. If neither the Superintendent nor, the Assistant Superintendent remains in-charge of a hostel but there are boarders, or if other necessary duties such as repairs and overhauling of the hostel furniture have to be performed, orders granting leave and appointing an acting Superintendent should in all cases be issued. The allowance admissible to the locum teneurs will be-(a)in the case of a hostel which has a Superintendent only, not an Assistant Superintendent. - an allowance equivalent to that which would have been admissible to the Superintendent for the period during which the duty is performed;(b)in the case of a hostel which has both a Superintendent and an Assistant Superintendent. - an allowance equivalent to that which would have been admissible to the Assistant Superintendent for the period during which the duty is performed.Note. - (1) For the purposes of these rules each hostel which has a separate Superintendent should ordinarily be treated as a separate institution. Exceptions should only be made when there is the fullest assurance that the duties can be properly carried out by an officer temporarily supervising more than one institution.(D. P. I.'s circular no. 5, dated the 21st January, 1915.)523. Conditions for Grants to Hostels of aided Schools.
- The conditions on which recurring grants are given to the hostels of aided schools are as follows:-| Number of boarders. | Allowance for Superintendent. | Allowance for Assistant Superintendent. | |
| Rs. | Rs. | ||
| 20 boys or less | .. | *15 | .. |
| 21-30 boys .. | .. | 20 | .. |
| 31-40 boys .. | .. | 25 | 10 |
| 41-50 boys .. | .. | 30 | 15 |
| 51-75 boys .. | .. | 40 | 20 |
| 76-100 boys .. | .. | 50 | 25 |
| Above 100 boys | .. | 60 | 30 |
524. Amount of Grants of Hostels of aided Schools.
- School which agree to accept the above conditions may be given grants up to the following maxima:-| Number of boarders in the Hostels. | Grants Admissible | ||||
| Rs. | |||||
| 20 or less | .. | .. | .. | .. | *10 |
| 21-30 | .. | .. | .. | .. | 15 |
| 31-40 | .. | .. | .. | .. | 20 |
| 41-50 | .. | .. | .. | .. | 30 |
| 51-75 | .. | .. | .. | .. | 40 |
| 76-100 | .. | .. | .. | .. | 50 |
| Above 100 | .. | .. | .. | .. | .. |
525. Allowances to Medical Officers.
- The allowances for the medical charge of Government hostels, which includes free medical attendance on the staff students and servants, are as follows :-| Rs. per month | |||
| (i) For lessthan 25 boarders | .. | .. | 25 |
| (ii) For25-49 boarders | .. | .. | 30 |
| (iii) For50-99 boarders | .. | .. | 42 |
| (iv) For100-149 boarders | .. | .. | 55 |
| (v) For150-199 boarders | .. | .. | 60 |
| (vi) For200-249 boarders | .. | .. | 65 |
| (vii) For250-299 boarders | .. | .. | 70 |
| (viii) For300-399 boarders | .. | .. | 75 |
| (ix) For400-499 boarders | .. | .. | 80 |
| (x) For450-499 boarders | .. | .. | *85 |
526. Duties of Medical Officers.
- Medical Officers should visit the hostels in their charge at least every third day as a matter of routine. In cases of urgency they should pay as many visits as the urgency of the case may demand, but for slight ailments the boarders should attend the hospital, if any, to which the Medical Officer is attached. At each visit the Medical Officer should fill up the register prescribed in this section and should make a brief note, for the guidance of the Superintendent of the hostel, regarding the treatment to be followed.(Letter no. 1237, dated the 9th February, 1918, from the I. G. C.H, to the Civil Surgeon of Shahabad, D. P. I.'s letter no. 6556, dated the 20th July, 1934.)Section IISpecial rules for School Hostels and Messes527. Conditions of Residence.
- All school students are required to reside under one or other of the following conditions :-528. Penalty for not complying with the rules.
- Students not living under one of these conditions will be liable to be called upon to withdraw from the school, and the cause of such withdrawal will be notified in the transfer certificate given to the student.529. Management.
- When a hostel or mess is not attached to any one school it must be under a separate committee of the management of which, however, the Headmaster, or the Principal of the schools to which the students belong must be members.530. Licensing of the Hostels, or Messes.
- All messes, or hostels not directly managed by the school authority must be duly licensed or approved in writing by the Headmaster/Principal of the school as places for the residence of students. The head of the institution to which the largest number of students asking for the licence belongs will be considered to be the officer to inspect and license the hostel or mess. In the event of equal numbers coming from different institutions, the head of the senior institution will be considered to be the officer to grant the license. If, as the result of change in the residence, it is found that the majority of the residents belong to an institution other than that of the officer who licensed the hostel or mess, it will be open to him to transfer his duties to the head of the other institution. The Headmaster/Principal who has approved of the building or rooms used as a hostel or mess, will be generally responsible for the hostel or mess so approved, and for the students who live in it. Such hostels or messes will be frequently and regularly inspected by the Headmasters/Principals concerned or by the officer deputed by them. Attention will be directed at such inspection to all conditions in relation to the morality of the students and to the discipline maintained. The sanitary arrangements will also be enquired into and inspected. It will be in the power of the inspecting officer to declare that insanitary buildings can no longer be recognised for the purpose of a hostel or mess, and such declaration, when approved by the Headmaster/ Principal, will be sufficient to cause the buildings to be struck off the list of places where students are permitted to live.(R. and O. page 564, para. 4.)531. Inspection of Hostels, or Messes.
- Messes, or hostels will be open to inspection by the inspecting officer in charge of the school, or by any person deputed for the purpose by Government or by the Department. Gentlemen of influence living in the neighbourhood of such messes or hostels may also be appointed to act as visitors under the authority of the Director.(R. and O. page 565, para. 5.)532. Superintendence.
- The Superintendent of every hostel or mess should ordinarily be a teacher in the institution to which the hostel or mess is attached or which the majority of its residents attend, but in the case of private hostels or messes it is permissible for persons other than teachers to be appointed Superintendents. The students living in a hostel or mess must be bona fide students of schools. School boys are not allowed to live in the same hostel or mess.Note. - Preference should be given to N. C. C. trained officers for appointment as Hostel Superintendents in schools, other qualifications being equal to other members of the school staff.(D. P. I.'s letter no. 1342, dated the 29th August, 1950.)533. Limit prescribed for the appointment of Superintendents and Assistant Superintendents of Hostels attached to Government Schools.
- Limit of three years is fixed for the tenure of the post of Superintendents and Assistant Superintendents of hostels attached to Government schools, at the end of which period it should be deemed to be vacant and applications should be invited for the next period of three years. The incumbent who has just relinquished office may apply again if he so wishes and his application may be considered along with others. The first appointment should be on probation for six months and no one who has been a Superintendent or Assistant Superintendent for more than six years should be reappointed.(G.O. no. 499-E., dated the 15th February, 1939, from Government in the Education Department.)534. Detailed rules for hostels or messes.
- Detailed rules for the conduct of the hostel or mess should be made by the Superintendent in consultation with the heads of the institutions concerned. A copy of these, together with a copy of the daily time-table, should be supplied to each boarder and should also be hung up in a conspicuous part of the hostel.(R. and O. page 566, para. 12.)535. Common Prayers.
- The offering of common prayers by Hindus and Muhammadans separately should be arranged in the most convenient manner.(Government Resolution no. 3268-E., dated the 5th December, 1923.)536. Yearly report on hostels or messes.
- The head of each institution under whose supervision a hostel or mess is working must, at the end of each financial year, submit to his Departmental superior a report on its working, with special reference to the conduct of the residents and to the sanitary arrangements of the premises and surroundings.(R. and O. page 566, para 15.)537. Number of occupants of one room.
- Two students should not be allowed to occupy one room in a hostel or mess unless they are near relatives.538. Admission to hostels or messes.
- No student may be admitted to a school hostel till he has been admitted to the school, and no boarder may be admitted to a private hostel or mess unless he is a student of a recognised institution.539. Monitors.
- The Headmaster/Principal should appoint one or more monitors who will act under the orders of the Superintendent but the appointment of a monitor in no sense exonerates the Superintendent from responsibility.(Government Resolution no. 3268-E., dated the 5th December, 1923.)540. Duties of Headmaster/ Principal.
- The general supervision of a hostel attached to an institution is a part of the ordinary duties of the Headmaster/Principal. Such supervision will require that he should-541. Residence of Superintendent.
- The Superintendent of a hostel should ordinarily be provided with quarters within or immediately adjoining the hostel itself.542. Duties of Superintendent.
- The duties of the Superintendent are as follows:-543. Free Places.
- Five per cent of the places in school hostels may be made free for deserving boys who are really poor, provided that suitable candidates are forthcoming; this concession extends also to the charge for furniture.(Government Resolution no. 3268-E., dated the 5th December, 1923.)Note. - A capitation allowance of Rs. 1.50 for ten months in the year is paid to 24 Ho boarders at Chaibasa Multipurpose Zila School.(G. O. no. 1047-E., dated the 29th February, 1933.)544. Withdrawal.
- No boarder is permitted to take his name off the roll of a hostel without the written permission of his Headmaster/Principal, nor will such permission ever be given unless it has been requested in a formal application from the father or natural guardian of the boarder. This application should be made at least 15 days before the date on which the boarder proposes to quit the hostel and it should state the reason for withdrawal. If 15 days' notice is not given, the border may be charged the ordinary dues up to 15 days in addition to the leaving fee and other charges.545. Withdrawal late in the year.
- A boarder quitting a hostel after the Durga Puja vacation will be liable at the discretion of the Headmaster/Principal to pay the monthly fees up to the end of the session.546. Penalty for non-payment.
- The instructions contained in Article 315 of the Code, regarding the dates for the collection of the school fees and the imposition of a default fine of twenty-five Paise in case of late payment should be followed also in collecting hostel dues.(D.P.I.'s letter no. 1015, dated the 30th January, 1932.)547. Offences and their punishment.
- The punishment of offences rests with the Superintendent or with the Headmaster/Principal according to the gravity of the offence. Minor offences, such as unpunctuality, noisy behaviour or uncleanliness should be dealt with by the Superintendent. Serious offence such as moral delinquency, habitual idleness or disobedience and absence without leave should be dealt with by the Headmaster/Principal.548. Procedure in cases of illness.
- It is the duty of the Superintendent to report at once any case of disease or sickness. The Headmaster/Principal will at once take such steps as are possible to isolate suspicious cases to call in medical advice, and, should the case prove to be infectious to have the patient removed to the hospital or to a segregation ward.(R. and O. page 565, para. 7.)549. Standard allowances to Superintendents.
- The following table shows the standard allowances to the Superintendents and Assistant Superintendents of hostels attached to Government Schools :-| Number of Boarders. | Allowance for Superintendent. | Allowance for Assistant Superintendent. | |
| Rs. | Rs. | ||
| 20 boys or less | .. | 15 | .. |
| Between 21 and 30 | .. | 20 | .. |
| Between 31 and 40 | .. | 25 | 10 |
| Between 41 and 50 | .. | 30 | 15 |
| Between 51 and 75 | .. | 40 | 20 |
| Between 76 and 100 | .. | 50 | 25 |
| Above 100 | .. | 60 | 30 |
550. Appointment of Hostel Superintendents.
- The sanction of the Director is required for the appointment of officers as Superintendent or Assistant Superintendents, if their total emoluments will exceed Rs. 240 and that of Government if their emoluments will exceed Rs. 550. In other cases the appointments are made by the District Education Officer in charge of the school provided that in the case of a Government High/Higher Secondary, the sanction of the Managing Committee will suffice, if the total emoluments do not exceed Rs. 125 a month.[Cf. Article 28(11), 45(2) and 66(xx), Government Resolution no. 3961-E., dated the 19th November, 1925.]551. Arrangements at Teachers' Training Schools.
- In each Teachers' Training School, boarders should be divided into groups of 50 and that each such group of 50, should be in charge of a Hostel Superintendent. The following table shows the standard allowances to such Superintendents :-| Number of Boarders. | Allowances. | |||
| 20 boys or less | .. | .. | .. | Rs. 15 a month. |
| Between 21 and 30 | .. | .. | .. | Rs. 20 a month. |
| Between 31 and 40 | .. | .. | .. | Rs. 25 a month. |
| Between 41 and 50 | .. | .. | .. | Rs. 30 a month. |
552. Room-rent and furniture-rent.
- Subject to a minimum of Rs. 1.50 for each boarder in the case of a High/Higher Secondary School and Re. 1 for each boarder in the case of a Middle School, the room rents to be charged in the hostels attached to Government schools are fixed by the District Education Officer. The Principals of the Training Colleges at Ranchi and Bhagalpur also exercise this power for the schools under their control. Pupils of the Scheduled Tribes and Scheduled Castes have been exempted from the payment of seat rents. No room-rent or furniture rent is charged in the hostels attached to Teachers' Training Schools.(G. O. no. 4008-E, dated the 28th October, 1926; and G. O. no. 256-E.R.. dated the 30th May, 1933 and G. O. no. 97-E., dated the 6th January, 1940 and G. O. no. 1558, dated the 4th August, 1954.)553. Rent for Electric fittings.
- The charge made, or to be made for electric fittings are as follows :-| Name of the institution. | Annual rent. | Sanctioned number. | Order date. | Remarks. | |
| 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | |
| Rs. | Paise | ||||
| Bankipur Multipurpose Girls School | 4 | 50 | 4008-E. | 28th October, 1926. | |
| Patna Collegiate Multipurpose School | 4 | 50 | 1948-E. | 22nd March, 1929. | |
| Gaya Zila Multipurpose School | 4 | 50 | 477-E.R. | 28th July, 1928. | |
| Bhagalpur Zila Multipurpose School | 4 | 50 | 6413-E. | 26th November, 1930. | To be reduced to Rs. 2 when the hostel is extended. |
| Monghyr Zila Multipurpose School | 1 | 12 | 2122-E | 14th April, 1936. | |
| D.S.S. College | Nil | 1653-E. | 10th April, 1931. | ||
| Arrah Zila Multipurpose School | 1 | 00 | 1679-E.R. | 13th September, 1935. | |
| Muzaffarpur Zila Multipurpose School | 2 | 00 | 314-E.R. | 1st July, 1929. |
554. Standard scale of menial establishment and contingencies.
- The following is the standard scale for the menial establishment and petty contingent charges of the hostels attached to Government High/Higher Secondary, Middle Schools, but any increase, or reduction in the present rates should be effected gradually and only to the extent found to be necessary on an examination of local requirements and conditions :-| Number of boarders. | Darwan. | Sweepers. | Water-bearers. | Contingencies per annum. | |
| 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | |
| Rs. | |||||
| 0-10 | .. | 1 | .. | .. | 50 |
| 11-25 | .. | 1 | 1 | .. | 59 |
| 26-50 | .. | 1 | 1 | 1 | 100 |
| 51-100 | .. | 1 | 2 | 1 | 200 |
| 101-200 | .. | 1 | 4 | 2 | 402 |
Chapter VIII
Educational BuildingsSection IGovernment Buildings555. General Rules.
- Whenever possible, educational buildings should be constructed according to the departmental type plans. In the case of important buildings the Director, will always consult the Director of Health Services before he gives his approval to any plan.(Circular Memo. no. 13-B., dated the 20th April 1914, from Government in the P. W. D.)556. Inflammable Buildings.
- No buildings with roofs of thatch, or other inflammable materials should be constructed within a radius of 50 yards from a building constructed of permanent materials. This radius is a minimum which should be exceeded where possible.(G. O. no. 119-T.B., dated the 26th May 1905; and R. & O. page 568, para. 13.)557. Departmental and Public Works Department Buildings.
- Some educational buildings are constructed and maintained by the Public Works Department and some departmentally.558. General Procedure.
- Any work, the cost of which is estimated to exceed Rs. 5,000 must be entrusted to the agency of the Public Works Department. It is not necessary, however, that all buildings costing less than Rs. 5,000 should be departmental; the number of departmental buildings should be kept as low as possible.(Government of India's letter no. 93-B., dated the 25th February, 1921.)559. Powers of Administrative Approval.
(a)The Director is empowered to accord administrative approval to all works other than those in connection with residential buildings up to a limit of Rs. 10,000.(b)In the case of residential buildings, the Director is empowered to accord administrative approval in respect of estimates for quarters occupied by his own department subject to the proviso that the total cost of the building is not allowed to exceed Rs. 5,000 and that the standard rent of the building calculated under Fundamental Rules or Bihar Service Code Rules, as the case may be, shall not exceed 10 per cent of the average emoluments of the class of tenants for whom it is intended and subject to the further proviso that the projects conform to the type plans duly approved by Government.(c)Water, sanitary and electrical installations. - The power delegated above does not apply to projects for water, sanitary and electrical installation in either residential or non-residential buildings, all of which require the approval of the State Government.(d)Administrative approval to all projects exceeding the limits of power given above will be accorded by the State Government in the administrative department.Note. - (1) The powers shall be exercised subject to the condition that funds are likely to be available within a reasonable period,.560. Deposit Works.
- The following officers of the Public Works Department can authorise the undertaking of deposit works up to the limits mentioned against their names for each work, provided the conditions laid down in paragraph 283 of the Public Works Department Code, for the execution of such works are fulfilled :-| Rs. | |||
| (1) | Superintending Engineer and the Chief Engineer, Public HealthEngineering Department. | 5,000 | |
| (2) | Inspectors of Works .. .. | 500 | |
| (3) | Electric Inspector, Bihar .. .. | 1,000 | |
| (4) | All Executive Engineers (including the Executive Engineers ofthe Public Department). | 200 |
561. Technical Sanction.
- Technical sanction to detailed projects will be accorded by the officers of Public Works Department (including Public Health Circle) within the following limits, provided that-(a)administrative approval has been accorded by the competent authority; and(b)the report prefacing the estimates and the principal plans attached thereto have been countersigned by the Director-| Rs. | ||||
| (1) | Superintending Engineer | .. | .. | 10,000 for each work |
| (2) | Electric Inspector, Bihar | .. | .. | 20,000 for each work |
| (3) | All Executive Engineers | .. | .. | 5,000 for each work |
562. Requisition of Estimate for the purpose of Administrative approval.
563. Preparation of estimates for the purpose of Administrative approval.
564. Submission of Estimates for the purpose of Administrative approval.
565. Communication of administrative approval.
566. Allotment of Funds.
- The Director has been given a grant for minor works from the Public Works Department budget and should allot funds for minor works, i.e., works costing up to Rs. 10,000 but for minor works in connection with his own residence the previous approval of the authority according administrative approval should be obtained to the allotment. For all works costing above Rs. 10,000 specific provision has to be made in the Public Works Department budget in the usual way, and for such works or any portion thereof the Director cannot allot funds from his minor works grant.The Director shall record the sanction to the allotment in the following form :-| Rs. Paise. | |||
| Allotment available for the | .. | .. | .. |
| Less-amount sanctioned previously | .. | .. | .. |
| Balance available | .. | .. | .. |
| Amount now sanctioned | .. | .. | .. |
| Balance of allotment still available | .. | .. | .. |
567. Selection of sites for Small Works.
- In the case of buildings estimated to cost less than Rs. 5,000 the Executive Engineer will, as soon as an estimate is called for, select a site in consultation with the District Magistrate and the local head of the department. If there is a difference of opinion among these officers, the Superintending Engineer will refer the matter to the Commissioner, whose decision will be final. The local head of the department may depute a subordinate to represent him. The Executive Engineer will consult the Civil Surgeon, if he has any doubt as to the suitability of the site on sanitary grounds. Where the land is in charge of the department, the signature of the Director on the plan will be necessary and in a Municipality or controlled area the signature of the Chairman of the Municipality, or of the President of the Local Committee will be necessary also.(P. W. D. letter no. 2772-A., dated the 7th August 1922.)568. Selection of sites for large works.
- In the case of buildings estimated to cost Rs. 5,000 or more, the Executive Engineer, unless instructed to the contrary, will as soon as he is asked for a rough estimate, request the District Magistrate to assemble a site committee then. If administrative approval is granted before a site has been selected he will request the District Magistrate, the Executive Engineer, the Civil Surgeon, an officer of the department and in a municipality or controlled area, the Chairman of the Municipality or President of the Local Committee. In outlying stations members may, on their own responsibility, depute gazetted subordinates to represent them. If an officer cannot attend the committee, his opinion will be taken separately. The proceedings of the committee will be forwarded to the Superintending Engineer who, if he agrees, will forward them to the Director for countersignature and return to the Executive Engineer through the Commissioner. If the members of the site committee are unable to agree or if the Superintending Engineer differs from their conclusions, he will, in the event of failing to come to an agreement with the President of the Committee, send the case to the Commissioner for decision, attaching his note to the proceedings of the committee. After deciding the case the Commissioner will communicate his decision to the Superintending Engineer and to the President of the Committee and will forward the plans as approved to the Superintending Engineer for disposal by the Director. If the Director's views differ from those of the local officers, the matter will be referred to Government. The Director will consult the Director of Health Services and the Chief Engineer, Public Health Engineering Department in important cases.(P. W. D. letter no. 2772-A., dated the 7th August, 1922.)Note. - Where the question of sanitary fittings and for pipe water-supply has to be considered, an intimation should be given to the Chief Engineer, Public Health Engineering Department to enable him to arrange that the Public Health Department is represented at the site committee.(P.W.D. letter no. 2249-71 -D., dated the 31st January, 1929; P.WD. Resolution no. 6390-6433-G., dated the 23rd June, 1933.)569. Repair to non-residential building.
- All annual and petty repairs that may be necessary during the intervals between quadrennial repairs to buildings borne on the books of the Public Works Department must be carried out by the agency of that department, except that the educational officer in charge of each building is responsible for all petty repairs of doors and windows, including the replacement of broken glass. He should make some person of his establishment answerable for the general condition of the building, including the glass in each room and the fixtures; for keeping a watch on the attacks of white-ants; for paying strict attention to the cleanliness of the interior and the neatness of the exterior of the building and of its surroundings, and for keeping the rainwater pipes and surface drains (where such exist) free from all obstructions. Charges for such items should be drawn by the officer concerned in his contingent bills.(Government Res. no. 57-T.A., dated the 18th May. 1906; R.& O. page 547.)570. Repairs to residential buildings.
- The instructions given in the above paragraph do not apply to residential buildings. All repairs to such buildings will be executed and accounted for by the Public Works Department, whether rent for the building is recovered from the occupier or not.(G. of B., P.W.D. no. 2845-A., dated the 6th December, 1906; R. & O page 547.)571. Restriction regarding Public Works Department land and buildings.
- Executive Engineers are responsible for all buildings and lands in their charge. No additions or alterations may be made to buildings borne on the books of the Public Works Department, and no fresh detached structures may be erected on land attached to such buildings, irrespective of the fund from which the cost of the work is to be met, without the previous sanction of the Public Works Department.(G. of B., P.W.D. letter no. 22-B., dated the 18th June, 1905; R. & O. page 570)572. Cost of repairs to Public Works Department building.
- Provision for all repairs to buildings borne on the books of the Public Works Department is included in the budget of that department. Except as provided in Article 569, no expenditure should be incurred by officers of the Education Department, out of the funds placed at their disposal for petty construction and repairs on buildings borne on the books of the Public Works Department.(G. O. no. 900-F.R., dated the 12th July, 1924.)573. General rules.
- Departmental buildings, may only be constructed with the sanction of the Director.574. Head to which the cost is debited.
- Expenditure on construction and repairs executed by officers of the department is treated as contingent expenditure when it does not exceed Rs. 2,500 in amount. When the amount exceeds that sum, and the work is still executed by the department, the expenditure is treated as "work" expenditure of the department but this can only be done if the department has been specially vested with the administrative control of the expenditure.(G. O. no. 900-F.R., dated the 12th July, 1924.)Note. - The limit of Rs. 2,500 applies to the amount of each individual estimate, whether it relates to one building or group of buildings.575. Procedure.
- When it is desired to construct a departmental building, a report should be submitted to the Director showing the necessity for the measure. This will be accompanied, where there can be little doubt of its being sanctioned, by a plan of the proposed building, a site plan showing the land and the buildings on it, both existing and proposed, with dimensions drawn to scale, and an estimate of the probable cost. Type-plans should be followed or reasons given for divergence therefrom.576. Construction of buildings.
- Departmental buildings may be constructed under the supervision of the District Engineer. When it is proposed to erect a building under the supervision of the District Engineer, the plans and estimates should be approved by him, after a local inspection of the site, before construction is sanctioned by the Director. The District Engineer will be required to supervise the construction of the whole building but he may utilise the assistance of his subordinates, although the final responsibility will be his.577. Commission Payable to District Boards.
- The fee payable to a District Board for work done for the department is calculated on the following scale:-| (1) | For complete execution, including survey, detailed plans andestimates, working drawings, supervision and construction. | 15 | Per cent | |
| (2) | For survey, detailed plans and estimates working drawings andsupervision only. | 7 | Ditto | |
| (3) | For survey, detailed plans and estimates only .. | 3 ½ | Ditto | |
| (4) | For working drawings and supervision only .. | 3 ½ | Ditto | |
| (5) | For construction only, the plans and estimates being suppliedby Government. | 11 | Ditto |
578. Register of buildings.
- A register of all departmental buildings under his or her charge and of all lands belonging to the Education Department must be kept in the office of each District Education Officer and the Inspectress of Schools, Bihar and the District Inspectress of Schools. This register should show the date on which each building or site was last visited by the District Education Officer and the Inspectress of Schools and the District Inspectress of Schools.579. Transfer of building to the Public Works Department.
- If it is desired to transfer any departmental building to the books of the Public Works Department, an application will be made by the Director to Government in that department.580. Loss or damage.
- Whenever an educational building is burnt or blown down or destroyed in any other way, an enquiry will be made by the officer immediately subordinate to the Director in whose charge the building was and that officer will submit a report to the Director explaining the cause of the disaster. In case of a fire due to improperly protected lights or negligence in cooking operations, it will be a question whether the person at fault shall not be held pecuniarily responsible for the accident,581. Repairs.
- All repairs to departmental buildings are carried out depart-mentally. The officer responsible should budget each year for the sum likely to be required for repairs during the following year.582. Cost of repairs to departmental buildings.
- Amounts sanctioned by the Director for petty construction and repairs may not be made over to an officer of the Public Works Department, either by transfer or in cash, with a view to his carrying out the work. When it is considered necessary that any work provided for in the education budget, should be done through the agency of the Public Works Department, an application should be made to the Director with a view to the matter being submitted to Government for orders. Should Government direct that the work should be done through the Agency of the Public Works Department, the charge will be met from the budget of that department. This rule does not prevent an officer from obtaining the opinion or advice of the Executive Engineer on any work to be carried out so long as the actual supervision of the work and disbursement of funds is not made over to the Executive Engineer.583. Sale.
- If an old building is to be sold as a consequence of the erection of a new building, an estimate of the amount which it or its materials is or are likely to realise must accompany the application for permission to erect the new building. Similarly, if an old site is to be given up the pecuniary result of its disposal must be stated. The amounts realised must be paid into the treasury and not to be used for expenditure.584. Application, for a draft notification.
- When the acquisition of land is desired the officer concerned, after obtaining the previous approval of the Director if the cost is likely to exceed Rs. 1,000 will apply to the Collector for a draft notification under section 4 of the Land Acquisition Act.Note. - If the land is to be acquired for buildings to be erected by, or from funds to be provided, by the Public Works Department, the Executive Engineer in charge of the work concerned, verify the officer requiring the land will apply to the Collector for the draft notification.585. Particulars to be supplied with the application.
- The application should set forth clearly purpose for which the land is required and should be accompanied by a plan. It should specify the limits of the land, should state the local names, (if any) by which the land is known and should contain such other particulars as may be necessary for the better identification of the land.(Land Acquisition Manual Chapter II, Article 10.)586. Procedure after disposal of objections.
- On receipt of the application the Collector will prepare the necessary draft notification and forward it to the requiring officer, who will send it to the Director for submission to Government in the Education Department. If Government agree, the notification will be published in the Bihar Gazette. Thereafter, if the objections (if any) are over ruled, the Director or Executive Engineer, as the case may be, will ask the Collector for a draft declaration under section 6 of an estimate. The District Officer will send these to the Commissioner of the Division who will countersign the estimate, if above Rs. 1,000 and the draft declaration in all cases. When the estimate does not exceed Rs. 2,500, the Commissioner will forward the estimate, draft declaration and plan to the requiring officer, but when the estimate exceeds Rs. 2,500 it will be submitted, after it has been countersigned by the Commissioner to the Board of Revenue also for countersignature together with the draft declaration and the plan, and the Board will forward the papers to the requiring officer.[Revised procedure under the Land Acquisition (Amendment) Act of 1923.]587. Procedure in departmental cases.
- If the land is not to be acquired for buildings to be erected by or from funds to be provided by, the Public Works Department and if on receipt of the estimate and the duly signed plan and draft declaration from the Commissioner or the Board of Revenue it is decided to proceed with the acquisition, the requiring officer will make an application to the Director, accompanied by the countersigned estimate, the plan and the draft declaration. If the Director decides to proceed with the case, he will submit the papers to Government in the Education Department for sanction. That department will sanction the acquisition and allot funds with the concurrence of the Finance Department and forward the plans and declaration direct to the Revenue Department for further action.(Paragraph 25, Chapter III of the Land Acquisition Manual and P. W. D. letter no, 2772-A., dated the 7th August, 1923.)588. Procedure in Public Works Department cases.
- If the land is to be acquired for buildings to be erected by, or from funds to be provided by, the Public Work Department and if the acquisition of the site selected by the site committee has not already been administratively approved by Government along with the building project, the Executive Engineer will submit, through the proper channel, the Land plan and estimates together with the draft declaration approved by the Commissioner or the Board of Revenue, as the case may be, for the administrative approval of Government in the Education Department. That department will, after according administrative approval, forward the land plan, etc., to the Public Works Department who, in their turn, will accord sanction to the estimate and forward the plan and estimate in original together with the draft declaration to the Revenue Department for the publication of the declaration and for the issue of orders for the acquisition of the land provided that the necessary funds are available. The amount of the estimate should be subsequently incorporated in the estimate for the project. If, however, the acquisition of the site selected by the site committee had already been administratively approved along with the building project the Executive Engineer will submit the land plan and estimate together with the draft declaration to the Superintending Engineer, for transmission to Government in the Public Works Department, who will, after according sanction to the estimate forward the plan and estimate in original together with the draft declaration to the Revenue Department for the publication of the declaration and for the issue of orders for the acquisition of the land provided that the necessary funds are available. The declaration will in all cases be published by the Revenue Department and all subsequent proceedings for the acquisition of the land will be taken in that department.(Paragraph 25, Chapter III of the Land Acquisition Manual also paragraph 179 of the P. W. D. Code; P. W. D. letter no. 2772-A., dated the 7th August, 1923.)589. Withdrawal from acquisition.
- When it is desired to withdraw from the acquisition of land in respect of which a declaration has been published in the Bihar Gazette, the officer concerned must report whether possession has actually been taken of any part of the land, and whether any compensation is to be paid for any damages sustained by the owner and any reasonable costs incurred by him in connection with the acquisition proceedings.(Paragraph 106, page 90 of the Land Acquisition Manual.)Note. - Rules to those buildings financed wholly or partly by local bodies or maintained or aided out of District Education Fund, will be found among the rules framed under Local Self-Government Act.(Vide Chapter 2 of the Code.)Section IIRules relating to grants of land and money for school sites and buildings590. Officers mainly concerned.
- The immediate conduct of proceedings in connection with grants rests with the District Education Officer in consultation with the District Officer. District Officers are specially concerned with all questions affecting land.(Government notification no. 200-E., dated the 19th April, 1919.)591. Purpose of the Rules.
- The object of the rules in this section is to ensure that grants are made for suitable objects, that they are utilized to the best advantage, that they are not wasted by reason of buildings being allowed to fall into disrepair and that the institutions which benefit by them are well managed.(Government notification no. 200-E., dated the 19th April, 1919.)592. Scope of the rules.
- The grants to be considered are in general (a) grants of land on lease, and (b) money grants for the acquisition of land, for the preparation of sites, or for the erection, extension, or purchase of buildings. Grants may be made for paying off debts incurred for school sites and buildings only in exceptional cases and with the sanction of Government.(Government notification no. 200-E., dated the 19th April, 1919.)Note. - The word "school" in these rules includes the word "hostel" unless the contrary appears from the context.593. Amount of Grants.
- Grants may not, save under general or special sanction of Government, exceed the sum subscribed locally or allotted from the balance in hand of the school.(Government notification no. 1331-E. P., dated the 29th September, 1931.)594. Outline of procedure.
- The general procedure is divided into following stages :-595. Submission of applications.
- The following rules are to be observed in the submission of applications ;-596. Terms of agreement.
- Great delay and difficulty arise if there is any misapprehension as to the conditions on which the proposed grant is to be made. As soon, therefore, as the application is approved, the terms should be placed in a clear form before the school authority, and it should be asked whether it accepts them. The statement of the terms should be divided into four parts; the first should recite the preliminaries, the second should state the general conditions, the third should specify the result following on violation of the terms of agreement, and the fourth should indicate the character of the legal document which the school authority must execute in order to make the terms binding. The following rules are for guidance in drawing up the statement of terms:-597. Sanction to the grant.
- Draft terms of agreement in each particular case should be drawn up by the District Education Officer, or his subordinates in consultation with the school authority. Any special stipulation required should be inserted and explained. The draft agreement when completed should be formally accepted by the school authority, so that there may be no possibility of misapprehension. The accepted draft should then be forwarded to the Director, through the District Magistrate and the Commissioner, for sanction to the grant. The sanction of the Director suffices except in the following cases :-598. Preparation of Plans and Estimates.
- Whilst the consideration of the terms is in progress, questions relating to the site, plans and estimates may be settled. If it has been decided that the buildings will be erected by the Public Works Department, the Director will request that department to prepare rough plans and estimates in consultation with the District Education Officer. When these are completed, they should be countersigned by the school authority to show that it agrees. If the work is to be carried out by the school authority itself, then the rough plans and estimates will be prepared by it and the District Education Officer in consultation. If the proposed site is on Government land in charge of the Public Works Department, the plans and estimates should be referred to that department, even though they are not required to undertake the work.(Government notification no. 200-E., dated the 19th April, 1919.)599. Particulars required.
- The plans and estimates to be prepared as above should include a site plan, ground plan of all premises including out-houses, latrines, etc., elevation plans, and in addition the following :-For both school and hostel buildings.600. Scale of accommodation required.
- In preparing plans and estimates the prescribed type plans should be followed in so far as they are applicable and deviation from them should be explained. The rules regarding the space to be allotted should be observed in all cases. The following minimum scale is prescribed.For class rooms in primary school, 8-10 superficial feet per pupil, 80-100 cubic feet per pupil.For class rooms in secondary schools, 10-12 superficial feet pupil, 100- 120 cubic feet per pupil.For hostels of all classes of schools, 90 superficial feet per pupil, 750 cubic feet per pupil. Where large dormitories are provided, these figures may be reduced by one-third {vide Article 639).(Government notification no. 200-E., dated the 19th April, 1919.)601. Detailed estimates.
- In no case should detailed estimates be prepared until the rough plans and estimates have received the administrative approval of the authority competent to sanction the grant.(Government notification no. 200-E., dated the 19th April, 1919.)602. Examination of Plans and estimates.
- On receipt of the plans and estimates the Director will forward them to the Superintending Engineer concerned for professional opinion, approval, and return. It the cost of the scheme is beyond the powers of sanction of the Superintending Engineer, he will send them to the Chief Engineer for approval. In the event of the scheme being drawn up by an architect approved by the Chief Engineer, no reference will be made to the Public Works Department and payments from the money grant will be made on certificates given by the architect. The Director will obtain the opinion of the Director of Health Services in all cases.(Government notification no. 200-E., dated the 19th April, 1919.)Note. - If the cost of the work exceeds Rs. 5,000, the Director when forwarding the plans and estimates to the Superintending Engineer or Chief Engineer, as the case may be, will enquire whether it will be possible, having regard to the situation and size of the work, for the construction to be supervised by the Public Works Department in such a way as to render the employment of a wholetime Overseer unnecessary. If not, the Superintending Engineer or Chief Engineer will add to the estimate, provision for the employment of a wholetime Overseer on a pay of [Rs. 100-5-130-EB-6-190-10-250] [Now as per Replacement Scales.] (as may be thought desirable) for the period which he considers should be necessary, if the work is not completed within that period the Overseer must be employed until the work is completed, but the balance of his salary will not be treated as part of the cost of the work, unless the Superintending Engineer considers that an extension of time is justified. The overseer should have the qualifications required for the Subordinate Engineering Services. He should be employed by the school authority, who should advertise the vacancy; they may, if they desire, ask the Executive Engineer to assist them in choosing a suitable man, but any assistance so given by the Executive Engineer will not render that officer responsible for the quality of the Overseer's work. Where two grant-in-aid buildings are being constructed close together, the possibility of their sharing the services of one Overseer should be considered.(G. O. no. 3150-E., dated the 17th May, 1927.)603. Grant of Government Land.
- A grant of Government land should ordinarily be made in the form of a lease for a nominal rent such as Re. 1 a year. Formal application for the grant may be made after the terms have been settled as prescribed above. It should be made by the District Officer and should contain the following particulars:-604. Land acquisition proceedings.
- Land acquired by Government for a school site should ordinarily be bonded over to the school authority on a lease at a nominal rate of rent. Formal proceedings for the acquisition may be initiated after the terms of agreement have been sanctioned by the Director. They should commence with a formal application to the District Officer from the Director, who should ask for a draft notification under Section 4 of the Land Acquisition Act. The application should be accompanied by a plan of the land which it is proposed to acquire. The draft notification will be submitted by the Director to Government in the Education Department. After it has been published and if the objection, if any, are over-ruled, the Director will ask the District Officer for a draft declaration under Section 6 and an estimate. The District Officer will send these, through the usual channel, to the Director for submission to Government in the Education Department. If the proposal is approved, the Revenue Department will publish the draft declaration and issue orders for the acquisition of land. In cases where the land is to be acquired for buildings to be erected by, or from funds to be provided by, the Public Works Department, that department will move the Revenue Department to publish the declaration and issue the necessary orders for acquisition.(Government notification no. 200-E., dated the 19th April 1919. Revised procedure under the Land Acquisition (Amendment) Act of 1923.)605. Grant of money.
- If the grant of money is required for the extension of existing buildings or the construction of buildings on land belonging to an educational institution and exceeds Rs. 10,000 Government before passing orders-will consider the title of the committee to the land or buildings and their powers to mortgage, sell or otherwise dispose them of and will determine the type of agreement to be executed. If the grant does not exceed Rs. 10,000 the case will be disposed of by the Director in the same manner.(Government notification no. 200-E., dated the 19th April, 1919.)606. Completion of Preliminary Conditions.
- If the grant is a simple money grant, further action will ordinarily be taken by the District Education Officer; if a grant of land acquisition proceedings are involved, the District Officer will be responsible. Before the final step is reached, it is necessary (1) that the private funds promised shall be made available, (2) that the legal position of the school authority and its title to the property involved shall be ascertained, and (3) that the legal documents enforcing the conditions shall be executed.607. Final Stage of Proceedings.
- (i) The preliminary conditions having now all been fulfilled, the final operations may be carried out. That is to say-608. Payment of Grants.
- Grants for the preparation of sites should be given out in the way as building grants. In the case of grants for the purchase of buildings, the money should be paid out at the time of transfer of the property.(Government notification no. 200-E.. dated the 19th April, 1919.)Section IIIMiscellaneous609. Grant of free quarters.
- The conditions for the grant of free quarters to Government officers are contained in Fundamental Rules 45-A (v) and 45-B (v) and rule 134 of the Bihar Service Code (1952 edition).The State Government are authorised to grant, at their discretion, free quarters on the school premises to teachers employed in Government schools on condition that definite duties as regards the supervision of pupils out of school hours are assigned to each master thus permitted to reside on the school premises.610. Officers entitled to free quarters.
- The following officers at present receive free quarters in terms of the above rules :-611. Privilege regarding Municipal Taxes.
- In addition to free quarters the following officers are entitled, under item 45 of Annexure A of Appendix 5 read with Appendix D ibid of the Bihar Financial Rule (Volume II) to the privilege of having the occupier's share of their municipal taxes paid by Government, if their salaries do not exceed Rs. 150, if their salaries exceed Rs. 150 they are required to pay so much only on the occupier's share of the municipal taxes as would be payable on a rental equal to 10 per cent of their salaries :-612. Rent payable in certain cases.
- Superintendents and Assistant Superintendents of hostels, occupy bachelor's quarters consisting of one room or more in the hostel itself, similar to the accommodation provided for boarders, are charged rent at the following rates :-613. Allowances instead of free quarter.
- Besides their fixed rates of pay the mistress of Government Primary Girls' Schools may also be granted, when necessary and when trained female teachers can not be secured on these rates of pay, house allowance equivalent to 25 per cent of their monthly pay, if free quarters on the school premises are not provided or the teacher cannot reside at her own home.Note. - (1) Remunerative local allowances equivalent to 25 per cent of her monthly pay may also be given to the holder of a junior certificate and to 5 per cent of the fixed monthly rate of pay.614. Procedure to be followed.
- The Director is authorised to dispose of applications for the erection of busts and statues in Government school building, but before sanctioning such erections he shall consult the Superintending Engineer concerned and ascertain that there is no engineering objection to the proposals in reference either to the site selected or to the mode of erection proposed.(G. O. no. 2534, dated the 12th November, 1906 R & O., page 550.)615. Circuit Houses.
- Circuit Houses in Bihar are intended for occupation, free of charge, by the officers of the State Government when travelling on duty except in case of the Governor, who is entitled to occupy the entire Circuit House, the Ministers, Judges of the High Court, District and Sessions Judges and other officers named in part 'A' are entitled to occupy only half of the Circuit House and the other half of the Circuit House shall be available for reservation of other officers. The officers named in parts B, C and D are privileged to reasonable accommodation in a circuit house, free of charge, provided that an officer named in part D will be entitled to accommodation in the Circuit House only if he has obtained a written order from the District Magistrate. No officer not named in any of the parts A, B, C or D is entitled to occupy any part of Circuit House, and in no circumstances may do so without the written order of the District Magistrate. The members of an officer's family travelling with him have the same rights of occupation as the officer himself, provided that an officer named in parts B, C and D either travelling alone or with family shall, in no case, occupy the entire Circuit House.Note. - (1) The words "free of charge" wherever they occur in these rules mean "free of rent for occupation" and not "free of rent for the occupation of electric current" which is separately charged under rule 9 of these rules whether or not an occupant uses the electric lights or fans.| A. For Circuit Houses other than atJamshedpur. | ||
| From the 1st November to the 15th March. | 50 Paise a day (of 24 hours or any period inexcess of three hours). | |
| B. For the Circuit House at Jamshedpur. | ||
| From the 16th March to the 31st October. | Rs. 1.25 a day (as above). |
| From the 1st November to the 15th March. | 25 Paise a day. | |
| From the 16th March to the 31st October. | 62 Paise a day. |
Part A – Minister of Education.
Part B – Secretary to Government, Education Department.
Vice-Chancellor, Patna University.Vice-Chancellor, Bihar University.Vice-Chancellor, Ranchi University.Vice-Chancellor, Bhagalpur University.Director of Public Instruction, Bihar.Part C – Regional Deputy Directors of Education.
University Inspectors.Deputy Directors of Education.Deputy Directress of Girls' Education.Inspectress of Schools, Bihar.District Education Officer.Part D – Assistant Director (Sanskrit) of Education.
Assistant Director (Islamic) of Education.Lady School Medical Officer.(Rules corrected up to the 31st March 1952.)(d)Accommodation, lighting, ventilation, etc.A - Class-rooms.616. Accommodation.
- The accommodation of a class-room depends not merely on its area but also on the lighting, the shape of the room, the furniture and the position of the doors. For Secondary schools 10 to 12 square feet for each pupil and 100 to 120 cubic feet are sufficient; for primary schools 8 to 10 square feet and 80 to 100 cubic feet. Rooms should, as a rule, not to exceed 21 feet or be less than 15 feet in breadth.(R. & O., page 548 Hygiene Conference.)617. Furniture.
- Furniture should be so designed as not to interfere with the physical development and health of the pupils. In primary schools little furniture are necessary and in no case should benches be provided, unless desks are also used. In schools where desks are used, each scholar should be allowed 18 inches of desks space and gangways of 18 inches where possible should be allowed between each desk and the walls. Desks should be arranged in parallel rows and there should be no rows at right angle to the rest. They should be so arranged that the light may come from the left. A strip of floor space, at least seven feet wide, should be allowed for the teacher and his table.(Government Resolution no. 3268-E., dated the 5th December, 1923.)(R. & O. page 348 Hygiene Conference.)618. Blackboard.
- The Blackboard should be on a side of the room where there are no windows. Cement blackboards, if properly made, are satisfactory and last well. Detailed instructions have been circulated as to the manner in which they should be constructed.(D. P. I.'s letter no. 189, dated the 7th July, 1923.)619. Lighting.
- As far as possible building should be made to face north and south. Every part of a class room should be lighted and as far as possible light should be admitted from the north.(D. P. I.'s letter no. 3189, dated the 7th July, 1923.)620. Verandahs.
- The interior of class rooms should be white-washed. A verandah should be provided on the southern side, but no verandah is necessary on the northern side. The addition of verandahs on the east and west is desirable in Secondary schools.621. Ventilation.
- The class room should be in a single row and not more than 4 feet of space should be left between the top of the windows and the roof; all windows should be made to open completely.(Hygiene Conference : R. & O. page 548.)622. Water-rooms.
- At every school separate rooms should be built in which water can be kept, together with any food that the pupil may bring for their mid-day meal. The floors of these rooms should be of brick, stone or concrete. For Primary schools, it is not necessary to build separate water-rooms, but a small portion of the verandah may be enclosed for the purpose.(Hygiene Conference.)623. Wells.
- There should be a separate brick well for each school with more than 100 pupils, irrespective of its status. The well should be at least 4 feet in diameter and should be provided with a well-top of an approved pattern.(Hygiene Conference.)624. Sanitary conveniences.
- Four per cent of urinals and two per cent of latrines should be provided for each day school and in addition a separate latrine and urinal for the teachers. For schools in rural areas no such provision is necessary.(Hygiene Conference.)B. Hostels.625. Size of rooms.
- In school hostels large dormitories should be provided rather than smaller rooms for all boys, particularly for younger boys and in the absence of dormitories four-seated rather than one-seated rooms.(Government Resolution no. 3268-E., dated the 5th December, 1923.)626.
-627. Common rooms.- Where practicable in existing hostels and when new hostels are built, separate rooms other than the common room should be set apart for prayer for Hindus and Muhammadans. Every care should be taken to avoid accidental contamination of these rooms.(Government Resolution no 3268-E., dated the 5th December, 1923; and D. P. I.'s Circular no. 17, dated the 24th June, 1924.)628. Accommodation.
- In large dormitories 40 square feet of floor space should be provided for each pupil, and in smaller rooms 60 square feet. These measurements may be somewhat relaxed if the roof is so constructed as to admit of free ventilation. Damp-proof courses should always be provided.(Hygiene Conference; P. E. C. Section 32 R. & O., page 508.)629. Lighting and ventilation.
- The lighting and ventilation should be designed in the same way as for school buildings.(Hygiene Conference.)630. Furniture.
- Each pupil should be provided with a bed, a table, a chair, a book-shelf and a set of clothes pegs. He should be required to provide himself with a mosquito net. In hostels where there is no electric installation good lamps should be provided either one for each boy or a large lamp to light the whole room.(Hygiene Conference.)631. Water-supply.
- Whenever a competent mistri is available, all wells should be sealed over with a cover which cannot be opened except for repairs and a strong pump should be provided with which to lift the water into an overhead cistern from which it can be delivered by a pipe line to the kitchen, to the bathing platform to the Superintendent's quarters and wherever else it may be required. At the bathing platform, wherever the supply of water and arrangement for drainage permits of this being done a long covered cistern should be provided with taps for 10 per cent of the boys and capable of holding a maximum of 4 gallons of water per head for bathing and washing platforms should be covered over.(Hygiene Conference.)632. Sanitary conveniences.
- Sanitary conveniences should be provided for hostels on the scale of at least 3 per cent of urinals and 8 per cent of latrines. They must be placed as far away as possible from the kitchen and dining rooms and a covered receptacle in which to store the night-soil during the day-time must also be provided. Small dust bins are also required to hold the sweeping0 for the school rooms and the kitchen refuse.(Hygiene Conference.)633. Drainage.
- Masonry drains should always be provided to carry off the waste water from the bathing platform, the kitchen and the dining rooms, and they should be connected up either with a municipal masonry drain or with a large covered cess-pit without any masonry bottom, which can be cleaned out from time to time.(Hygiene Conference.)634. Infirmary.
- One small room should be reserved in each hostel for use in cases of emergency as an isolation ward. It is advisable that such a room should be at the end of a verandah or at the end of a line of buildings. It is not necessary that this room should remain unused in ordinary times, but it should be distinctly marked and must be immediately vacated when required for use as an isolation ward.Note. - The above rule does not apply in places where there is suitable hospital accommodation available within convenient reach or where isolation rooms have already been constructed.635. Disorderly houses, etc.
- The following extracts are taken from Bengal Act III of 1906 (the Bengal Disorderly Houses Act, 1906.)2. (i) When any Magistrate of the first class receives information-
636. Liquor shop.
- If in the opinion of the District Education Officer a liquor shop in the vicinity of a school is exercising a corrupting influence on pupils, he should address the local Executive Officer with a view to its removal.(D. P. I.'s letter no. 547-51, dated the 15th January, 1915.)Chapter IX
Scholarships
Section IGeneral RulesNote. - In these rules the term "recognised" means "recognised by the Department or by the Department of Industries".637. Grades of scholarships.
- These rules relate to scholarships of the following grades :-638. Where school and college scholarships are tenable.
- School scholarships are tenable only in recognised schools in Bihar which have adopted in full the syllabus prescribed by Government. Junior college scholarships are ordinarily tenable only in recognised colleges in Bihar.Notes. - (i) This rule does not apply to special junior college scholarships for girls. In these cases the scholarship must be held at an institution approved by the Director, or by the Universities of Bihar, Patna, Magadh, Ranchi and Bhagalpur. Junior college scholarships may, in exceptional cases with the special sanction of the Director, be held in other States.639. Action to be taken by persons who hold, or are candidates for, scholarships when the recognition of a college or school is withdrawn.
- Pupils reading in a school or students reading in a college from which recognition has been withdrawn are ordinarily entitled to retain, or are eligible to compete for, Government scholarships if they migrate to a recognised institution within one month of the date of the order of withdrawal or a fortnight after the commencement of the next term. Pupils or students who fail to migrate within the specified period or who join the institutions after the order of withdrawal of recognition, will forfeit their Government scholarships and be ineligible for a Government scholarship for a period of two years after their transfer to a recognised institution.(Government notification no. 2246-E., dated the 3rd November, 1914, and Government notification no. 3292-E., dated the 8th May, 1930.)640. Tuition fees.
- Scholarship holders, whether reading in colleges or in schools, are ordinarily required to pay the usual fees. A college or school authority may give to any individual scholar, in addition to his scholarship, one of the free studentships admissible under the ordinary rules, but such concessions must not be allowed to raise the total number of free studentships above the authorised number.(G. O. no. 828-35-E. R., dated the 21st August, 1931.)641. Free tuition after the scholarship period.
- The privilege of free tuition may be granted for two years to lower or upper primary scholars on the expiry of their scholarships. At a Government High/Higher Secondary Schools (including Sarvodaya High School) the privilege may be sanctioned by the Headmaster/Principal. In the case of privately managed or board schools the extension requires the sanction of the Managing Committee of the school or of the Chairman of the Board or the District Superintendent of Education as the case may be. These free-studentships may be granted in addition to the number admissible under the ordinary rule for Government and aided schools and applications for them must be accompanied by a fee similar to that required in the case of the transfer of a scholarship.(Government notification no. 2200-E., dated the 25th April, 1927, R. & O., page 274, para 7)642. Dates from which scholarship are tenable.
- School scholarships are tenable from January 1st and Junior college scholarships from June 1st. In the case of scholarships held in other States the date of commencement of tenure will be fixed by the Director.(Government notification no. 2246-E., dated the 3rd November, 1914.)643. School scholarships tenable in other States.
- The bills of scholars -1. Bihar who hold school scholarships awarded in one, and made tenable
2. West Bengal in another State noted in the margin, should be counter
3. Uttar Pradesh, signed by the District Education Officer in charge of the district
4. Orissa, in which the scholarship is tenable.District Education Officer when making scholarships, tenable in West Bengal, Uttar Pradesh and Orissa should communicate their orders to the Accountant-General, Bihar who will in turn inform the Accountant-General of those States.
(G. O. no 2204-E., dated the 25th September, 1912, D.P.I.'s letter no. 8395, dated the 6th September, 1918 and no. 8917-18, dated the 30th September, 1918.)Note. - This rule also applies in the case of Sanskrit stipends made tenable in West Bengal. Such stipends cannot be made tenable in Ultar Pradesh.644. Migration of candidates.
- Candidates, who have migrated from one school to another of the same status within the two years preceding the examination are not eligible for scholarships unless their transfer has been sanctioned by the District Education Officer, Inspectress of Schools, Bihar or in the case of pupils reading in middle and primary schools by the Sub-divisional Education Officer in charge of the school from which the transfer takes place. It is the duty of heads of institutions to bring this rule to the notice of parents and guardians proposing to transfer their children or wards.(Government notification no. 347-E. R,, dated the 23rd July, 1923 and Government order no. 25-E. R., dated the 4th May, 1926.)Note. - (1) For the purpose of this rule the 1st February will be taken as the commencement of the school year.645. Late transfers.
- A pupil, who is transferred, within the year at the close of which the scholarship examination is held from a school of higher status to one of lower status, is not eligible for scholarship for which he would not have been eligible had he continued in the former school.646. Candidates must take the examination at the first chance.
- A scholarship will not be awarded to a candidate who has been admitted twice to the same standard of examination. A primary or middle scholarship will not be awarded to a candidate, who has read for more than one year in class III or class V or class VII, as the case may be.Note. - This rule shall apply to the students of backward tribes of the State only so long as suitably qualified candidates are available.(Government notification no. 2246-E., dated the 3rd November, 1914; Government notification no. 131-E.R., dated the 30th May, 1929; Government notification no. 27-E. R., dated the 2nd June, 1933; and Government notification no. 1509-E., dated the 2nd July, 1942.)647. Details to be recorded regarding candidates.
- In preparing the preliminary list of candidates for school scholarships, inspecting officers must record details as to the pecuniary circumstances and conduct of the candidates, and due weight will be given to these considerations in making the award.(Government notification no. 2246-E., dated the 3rd November, 1914.)648. Candidates must state where they wish their scholarships to be made tenable.
- The name and grade of the institution, in which a student proposes to read, must be stated in the lists of candidates for school scholarships submitted by inspecting officers and in the lists of candidates eligible for junior college scholarships submitted by Headmaster/Principals of High/Higher Secondary schools. The published list of scholars will show the names of the institutions in which they propose to read.(Government notification no. 2246-E., dated the 3rd November, 1914.)649. Control of scholarship-holders.
- Holders of school scholarships are under the general control of the inspecting officer in charge of the school and the holders of junior college scholarships under that of the Director.(Government notification no. 2246-E., dated the 3rd November, 1914.)650. Transfer of scholarships.
- The authority awarding a scholarship may make it tenable in a school or college other than that in which it was first held. A similar power is exercised, in respect of the transfer of upper primary scholarships from one middle school to another, by the Sub-divisional Education Officer in charge of the school from which the transfer takes place. The fee for such transfers is fifty paise in the case of an upper primary or lower primary scholarship, Re. 1 in that of a middle scholarship and Rs. 2 in that of Junior College scholarship.(Government notification no. 2246-E., dated the 3rd November 1914; Government notification no. 347-E., dated the 23rd July 1923; and G.O. no. 25-E.R., dated the 4th May, 1926.)Note. - This rule shall apply to scholarships, in the award of which merit alone has not been the deciding factor and other factors such as poverty, backwardness, sufferings due to political circumstances, etc. were also taken into consideration. This rule shall also apply to scholarships sanctioned by the Welfare Department.The kind of merit scholarships (Primary, middle or junior) to which these newly created scholarships correspond will have to be determined and transfer fee charged accordingly.651. Period within which scholarship holders must join their Institutions.
- Scholarship-holders must join the institutions in which their scholarships are tenable within one month of the date of the publication in the Gazette of the scholarship list, or on the date from which the scholarship is tenable, whichever is later. Failure to comply with this rule will entail forfeiture of the amount due up to the date of joining. It will also entail forfeiture of the scholarship unless satisfactory reasons are given to the inspecting officer or to the Director, as the case may require.Note. - If the list of Junior college scholarships is published before the end of June, such scholars may, without penalty, join the institutions in which their scholarships are tenable at any time before the end of July.(D.P.I.'s letter no. 5492, dated the 2nd August, 1922.)652. Scholarships awarded to pardanashin girls.
- If a Hindu or Muhammadan girl obtains a primary or middle scholarship and is unable to attend any recognised school owing to the customs obtaining in Bihar or to the circumstances of the particular class to which the scholar belongs or to distance from any suitable school, then if the scholar still prosecutes her studies to a higher stage and submits to a half-yearly examination to be held by the District Inspectress of Schools, she may draw the scholarship for the six months previous to each such examination, provided that the examiner is satisfied with her progress.(R. & O. page 401, F.E.C. Report.)Note. - 'Where the District Education Officer is satisfied that the village in which a lower primary scholar lives is so situated that the District Inspectress of Schools cannot visit it every six months, without seriously interrupting her other work or for any other reason, she may request the Sub-divisional Education Officer to conduct the examination (either personally or through the medium of the Deputy Inspector of Schools or Sub-Inspector of School appointed by him) if the parents have no objection.653. Withdrawal of scholarships.
- Scholarships may be withdrawn at any time if the progress or conduct of the scholar is unsatisfactory. Authority to withdraw a scholarship will be exercised by the Inspecting Officer in the case of school scholarships and by the Director in the case of Junior College Scholarships. In the case of scholarships paid by District Board the authority will be exercised by the Board acting on the recommendation of the District Education Officer.(Government notification no. 2246-E., dated the 3rd November, 1914.)654. Re-award of Scholarships.
- When a scholarship which has been awarded has not been taken up or has been vacated owing to the death of the scholar, or for any other reason, a re-award may be made at the discretion of the Director, or in the case of school scholarships, at the discretion of the District Education Officer. In such cases the scholarships will be tenable from the date of the award to the end of the period for which the scholarships was originally awarded.(Government notification no. 2246-E., dated the 3rd November, 1914; and D. P. I.'s letter no. 8614, dated the 9th November, 1920.)655. Procedure for drawal of scholarships.
- The students to whom scholarships, stipends and book grants, etc., are sanctioned by the Education Department and tenable at Government and private institutions may be divided in the following categories.-(a)Students reading in institutions outside the State but within India.(b)Students.receiving education in Government institutions within the State.(c)Students reading in private institutions (other than under Universities) within the State.(d)Students reading in institution under Universities within the State.656. Drawing and disbursing officers for drawal of scholarships, stipends and book-grants.
- The following officers have been declared to be drawing and disbursing officers in respect of all kinds of scholarships, stipends and book-grants including Political sufferers' stipend, etc., sanctioned by the Education Department and tenable at Government and private institutions, category-wise as indicated in the following table :-| Nature of the charge. | By whom to be countersigned before payment drawn | By whom to be | ||
| 37. - Education | ||||
| Scholarships, stipends including Politicalsufferers' stipends, book-grants, etc. | ||||
| Category "A". | ||||
| Institutions outside the State but within India. | Countersignature not necessary. | Director of Public Instruction. | ||
| In Government Institutions- | ||||
| (a) | In Training colleges at Ranchi, Bhagalpur and Turki,Veterinary College, Patna, Government Ayurvedic College, Patna,Government Tibbi College, Patna managed directly by Government. | Countersignature not necessary. | Heads of the Institution. | |
| (b) | In Government High/Higher Secondary, Multi-purpose HigherSecondary school for boys and girls. | Countersignature not necessary. | Heads of the Institution. | |
| (c) | In Government Basic schools. | Ditto. | Subdivisional Education Officer. | |
| (d) | In Government Girls' Middle Schools. | Ditto | District Inspectress of Schools. | |
| (e) | In Government Arabic and Sanskrit Institutions. | Ditto | District Education Officer. | |
| (f) | Special Institutions like the schools for Deaf and Dumb, alsoGovernment school of Arts Patna, etc. | Ditto | Heads of the Institution. | |
| Category "C" | ||||
| In Private institutions other than Universities- | ||||
| (a) | In Boys' High/Higher Secondary/Multi-purpose Higher SecondarySchools. | Ditto | District Education Officer. | |
| (b) | In Girls' High/Higher Secondary/Multi-purpose HigherSecondary Middle/Basic schools. | Countersignature not necessary. | ||
| (c) | In Boys' Middle schools. | Ditto | Subdivisional Education Officer. | |
| (d) | In non-Government Sanskrit and Arabic Institutions. | Ditto | Subdivisional Education Officer. | |
| (e) | In special institutions like the school for Deaf and Dumb inrespect of non-Government schools as also-all non-GovernmentAyurvedic Institutions. | Ditto | District Education Officer. | |
| Category "D". | ||||
| In Institutions under Universities within the State- | ||||
| (a) | In Colleges and University Departments. | Ditto | Regional Deputy Director of Education. |
657. Leave, other than sick leave.
- Absence with leave up to seven days at one time will entail no loss of scholarship. Longer absence with leave, other than sick leave, will entail loss of scholarship for the whole period of absence, provided that the Headmaster/Principal may grant leave without loss of scholarship up to thirty days to a scholar who suffers the loss of a parent or wife or child.(Government notification no. 3495-E., dated the 26th June, 1929.)Note. - The period of 30 days is a maximum. If the Principal/Headmaster is satisfied that a shorter period, or two periods not exceeding 30 days in all, will suffice, he should not grant more.658. Sick leave.
- Absence on account of illness up to seven days at one time, certified to the satisfaction of the Headmaster/Principal, will entail no loss of scholarship, but if the scholar is absent on this account for short periods of more than three times in the course of one year, or if the absence is protracted beyond seven days, a medical certificate must be furnished signed by a Sub-Assistant Surgeon in the case of a school scholarship-holder and by an Assistant Surgeon in the case of Junior College scholarship-holder. If the required certificate is not produced, the period of absence will be treated as absence without leave. On the production of the prescribed medical certificate half the scholarship may be granted, if the period of absence does not exceed three months at a time. Absence for more than three months up to a limit of six months at a time will entail loss of scholarship for the period of absence. Continuous absence for more than six months will ordinarily entail forfeiture of the scholarship.(Government notification no. 2246-E., dated the 3rd November, 1914.)Note. - (i) In the case of lower primary scholarship-holders, leave is granted by the Chairman of the District Board who may delegate the power to the Headmaster/Principal of Government High/Higher Secondary schools and Sub-divisional Education Officer and Deputy Inspector of schools in respect of scholars reading in the schools under their control.(G. O. no 163-E., dated the 26th January, 1915 and G. O. no. 824-E., dated the 12th February, 1930.)659. Overstaying leave.
- If leave of absence be overstayed the leave will be cancelled unless, on sufficient reason being shown, an extension be granted. Holidays in continuation of (before or after) absence with or without leave are reckoned as absence with or without leave, respectively.(Government notification no. 2246-E., dated the 3rd November, 1914.)660. Absence without leave.
- Absence without leave for any period up to thirty days at one time will entail loss of scholarship for twice the period of absence. Absence without leave for more than thirty days at one time will entail forfeiture of the scholarship, and must be reported without delay to the inspecting officer or to the Director, as the case may require.(Government notification no. 2246-E., dated the 3rd November, 1914.)Section IIRules for different classes of scholarships661. Value and Tenure.
- Lower Primary Scholarships are of the value of Rs. 3 a month and are tenable for two years. They are paid by the District Boards.(Government notification no. 2246-E., dated the 3rd November, 1914)662. Unit of Distribution.
- The unit of distribution is the thana.(Government notification no. 2246-E , dated the 3rd November, 1914.)663. Candidates eligible.
- Lower Primary Scholarships are open to competition among pupils of recognised lower primary schools only.(Government notification no. 2246-E., dated the 3rd November, 1914.)Notes. - (i) This rule does not apply to girls who may compete for these scholarships from any recognised primary or middle schools.664. Age-limits.
- Candidates, other than backward tribes and pupils of the Scheduled Castes must not be over eleven years of age on the date of the examination. In the case of pupils of backward tribes and of the Scheduled Castes the age-limit is twelve.(Government notification no. 2246-E., dated the 3rd November, 1914 and 4001-E, dated the 8th November, 1935.)665. Examination fee.
- A fee of twelve Naye Paise is charged to each candidate,(Government notification no. 2246-E., dated the 3rd November, 1914.)666. Preliminary selection of candidates.
- The preliminary selection of candidates is made by Sub-Inspectors of Schools, who will fix centres to which teachers should send their candidates, provided always that no pupil should be required to attend a centre more than four miles distant from his school. Each Sub-inspector of Schools will forward to the District Education Officer, a list of the eligible candidates from schools under his control. The number of names in the list must not exceed eight times the numbers of scholarships available. The District Education Officer will scrutinise the list and strike out or add names if he thinks this to be necessary. Not more than two candidates may be selected from any one school.(Government notification no. 2246-E., dated the 3rd November 1914 Government notification no. 607-E.R., dated the 6th July 1926; G.O, no. 25-E.R., dated the 4th May 1926; and Government notification no. 3795-E., dated the 9th December, 1936.)667. The Examination.
- The examination of the candidates thus selected is held at the headquarters of the Sub-Inspector of Schools or at any other convenient place within his jurisdiction and under arrangements made by the Board. The examination will be limited to the prescribed course. Written answers will be required in composition and in Arithmetic, the rest of the examination will be oral. The oral part of the examination will be conducted by the Centre Superintendents appointed by the Board, who will also set and mark the Papers to which written answers are required, unless the Board prefers to make other arrangements. Both in the written and in the oral part of the examination the questions should be so framed as to test intelligent understanding rather than memory alone.(Government notification no. 2246-E., dated the 3rd November, 1914 and Government notification no. 1733-E., dated the 1st April, 1935.)Note. - Pupils of primary Urdu schools and primary Sanskrit schools should not be examined in religious knowledge.(G.O. no. 3374-E., dated the 13th May, 1930)668. Forwarding of marks.
- The marks assigned to the candidates at the oral and written examinations will be forwarded to the District Education Officer who will submit them to the Board with his views as to the award of the scholarships and with such remarks as he may consider necessary.(Government notification no. 2246-E., dated the 3rd November, 1914.)669. Award of the scholarships.
- The scholarships will be awarded by the Board in consultation with the District Education Officer and in accordance with these rules. Not more than one scholarship will ordinarily be awarded to a school in one year; provided that a boy and a girl may gain scholarships from the same school, and provided also that the Board may in other exceptional cases permit a school to secure more than one scholarship.(Government notification no. 2246-E., dated the 3rd November 1914; and Government notification no. 4167-E., dated the 7th December, 1925.)670. Special scholarships.
- Special scholarships are awarded annually to the daughters of bona fide Dais reading the lower primary course. Details of them may be obtained from the District Inspectresses.(G.O. no. 195-E.R., dated the 30th January, 1918.)671. Value and Tenure.
- Upper Primary Scholarships are of the value of Rs. 10 a month and are tenable for two years.(Government notification no; 1221, dated the 28th March, 1957.)672. Unit of distribution.
- The unit of distribution is the sub-division.(Government Notification No. 2246-E, dated 3rd November, 1914)673. Candidates eligible.
- Upper Primary Scholarships are open to competition among pupils of recognised upper primary schools only.(G.O. no. 1195, dated the 27th March, 1957.)Notes. - (i) This rule does not apply to girls, who may compete for these scholarships from any recognised upper primary or middle school. Also girls who have gained lower primary scholarships and have studied at home to the upper primary standard are eligible to compete for Upper Primary Scholarships, provided that they appear at the examination held at the end of the period for which their original scholarships were given.(Government notification no. 3185-E., dated the 1st May, 1930.)674. Age-limits.
- Candidates, other than those belonging to backward Tribes and pupils of the Scheduled Castes, must not be over thirteen years of age on the date of the examination. In the case of pupils of backward Tribes and of the Scheduled Castes the age-limit is fourteen.(Government notifications no. 2246-E., dated the 3rd November, 1914; and no. 4001-E., dated the 8th November, 1935.)675. [ Examination fee. [Now see new rate.]
- A fee of rupee one is charged to each candidate.](Government notification ho. 303-E.R., dated the 12th June, 1931.)676. Preliminary selection of candidates.
- The preliminary selection of candidates is made by the Sub-divisional Education Officer. He should make his selection after consulting the Headmaster concerned. The Sub-divisional Education Officer will fix centres at which the preliminary selection will be made and to which headmaster will send their candidates for examination; provided always that no pupil be required to attend a centre more than six miles from his school. The number of candidates selected must not exceed ten times the number of scholarships allotted to each subdivision, and not more than two candidates may be selected from any one school.(Government notification no. 2246-E., dated the 3rd November, 1914, G. O. no. 25-E.R., dated the 4th May, 1926 and Government notification no. 3795-E., dated the 9th December, 1936.)Note. - In the case of girls' schools which observe pardah the District Inspectress of Schools and in the case of other schools the District Education Officer may select not more than one candidate from each middle and upper primary school that has one or more girls in class V but it should be understood that it is not necessary to select a candidate from every such school, if suitable candidates are not forthcoming.(D. P. I.'s order dated the 18th September, 1930 in file 2S-37-1930.)677. The Examination.
- The examination of the candidates thus selected is held at the Sub-divisional headquarters or at any other place within each subdivision that may be found more convenient. The District Education Officer will make arrangements for the examination and will appoint Superintendents to conduct it. The examination will be limited to the prescribed course. It will be conducted by means of written papers, except that there will be an oral examination in mental arithmetic for boys and a practical examination in needle-work for girls. The oral examination will be conducted by the Superintendent. The written papers will be sent by the School Examination Committee and the answers and needlework will be valued by examiners appointed by the District Education Officer.(Government notifications no. 2246-E., dated the 3rd November, 1914; G. O. no. 576-E. R., dated the 15th July, 1925 and no. 3961-E., dated the 19th November, 1925.)678. Distribution of marks.
- The marks for the examination are distributed as follows:-| Name of subject. | Full marks. | Time assigned | |
| Language.- | Hours | ||
| (a) Literature | 50 | 100 | 2 ½ |
| (b) Grammar | 30 | ||
| (c) Second Modern Language orSanskrit. | 20 | ||
| Mathematics.- | |||
| (a) Arithmetic | 70 | 100 | 2 ½ |
| (b) Practical Geometry | 20 | ||
| (c) Book-keeping and Householdaccounts. | 10 | ||
| Social Studies.- | |||
| (a) History | 40 | 100 | 2 ½ |
| (b) Geography | 40 | ||
| (e) Civics | 20 | ||
| General Science.- | |||
| (a) Hygiene and Sanitation | 50 | 100 | 2 ½ |
| (b) Nature study. Study of Plant,Soil and Manure. | 50 | ||
| Drawing | 30 | 1 | |
| Spinning onCharkhaorTakli.- | |||
| (a) Speed | 10 | 120 | 3 |
| (b) Evenness | 10 | ||
| (c) Strength | 10 | ||
| Sewing and Designing.- | |||
| (a) Sewing | 10 | ||
| (b) Designing | 10 | ||
| Articles for fulfilling the life | 20 | ||
| Physical Training and games | 30 | ||
| Music | 20 | ||
| Records of Works. | |||
| (a) Record of Physical exercisesand games. | 20 | 50 | ... |
| (b) Record of crafts work | 20 | ||
| (c) Record of Social service | 10 |
679. Forwarding of marks.
- The marks assigned to the candidates will be forwarded to the District Education Officer, who will award the scholarships in accordance with these rules. Not more than one scholarship will ordinarily be awarded to a school in one year, provided that a boy and a girl may gain scholarships from the same school and provided also that the District Education Officer may in other exceptional cases permit a school to secure more than one scholarships.Notes. - (1) A list of the scholarships awarded should be published in the Gazette by the District Education Officer.680. Value and Tenure.
- Middle Scholarships are of the value of Rs. 15 a month and are tenable for 4 years. They are not tenable in a Training School.(G. O. no. 2935-E., dated the 5th May, 1949.)681. Unit of distribution.
- The unit of distribution will be the district.(G. O. no. 2935-E., dated the 5th May, 1949.)Notes. - (i) No scholarship should be reserved for the pupils of the Scheduled Castes, Momins and Backward Tribes.682. Candidates eligible.
- Middle Scholarships are ordinarily open to competition among pupils of the recognised middle schools only. Also girls who have gained Upper Primary Scholarship and have studied at home to the middle standard are eligible to compete for Middle Scholarships, provided they appear at the examination held at the end of the period for which their original scholarships were given.(G. O. no. 2935-E., dated the 5th May, 1949.)683. Age-limits.
- Candidates other than Scheduled Tribes and pupils of the Scheduled Castes must not be over fourteen years of age on the date of examination. In the case of Scheduled Tribes and pupils of the Scheduled Castes the age-limit will be sixteen.(G.O. no. 2935-E., dated the 5th May, 1949.)684. List of Schools eligible.
- Each District Education Officer should publish annually in the Gazette list of the recognised Middle Schools in each district corrected up to April the first. No school should be allowed to send up candidates for scholarships unless its name is included on April the first of the year in which the examination takes place, in the appropriate list,(G. O. no. 2935-E., dated the 5th May, 1949.)685. Examination fee.
- An examination fee of Rs. 2 will be charged from each candidate.(G. O. no. 2935-E., dated the 5th May 1949.)686. Preliminary selection of candidates.
- The preliminary selection of candidates for Middle Scholarships will be made by the District Education Officer, in case of boys' schools and by the District Inspectress of Schools in the case of girls' schools. He/She should make selection after consulting the Headmaster/Principal/Headmistress concerned The District Education Officer will fix centres at which preliminary selection will be made and to which Headmaster/Principal will send their candidates for examination, provided always that no pupil will be required to attend a centre more than 6 miles distant from his school. The number of candidates selected must not exceed four times of the number of scholarships allotted to each district and not more than two candidates may be selected from one school.(G. O. no. 2935-E., dated the 5th May, 1949.)687. The Examination.
- The examination of the candidates thus, selected will be held at the sub-divisional headquarters or at any other place within each subdivision that may be found convenient. The District Education Officer will make arrangements for the examination and will appoint Superintendents to conduct it.(G.O. no. 2935-E., dated the 5th May, 1949.)688. Distribution of marks.
- The examination will be limited to the following subjects and the marks for the examination will be distributed as follows :-| Name of subject. | Full marks. | Time assigned | |
| Theoretical | |||
| Language.- | Hours | ||
| (a) Literature | 50 | 100 | 2 ½ |
| (b) Applied Grammar andComposition | 30 | ||
| (c) Desire language | 20 | ||
| Mathematics.- | |||
| (a) Arithmetic | 50 | 100 | 2 ½ |
| (b) Book-keeping | 20 | ||
| (c) Geometry | 30 | ||
| Social Studies.- | |||
| (a) History | 40 | 100 | 2 ½ |
| (b) Geography | 40 | ||
| (e) Civics and current events | 20 | ||
| General Science.- | |||
| (a) Mechanics and Theory ofSpinning, gardening and Agriculture (Boys) | 50 | 100 | 2 ½ |
| or | |||
| Theory of Domestic Science(Girls) | |||
| (b) Study of Nature | 30 | ||
| (c) Hygiene and Sanitation | 20 | ||
| Parctical | |||
| Spinning onCharkha | |||
| (i) (a) Speed | 20 | 100 | 1 ½ |
| (b) Evenness | 20 | ||
| (c) Strength | 20 | ||
| (ii) Carding and making silvers | |||
| (a) Speed | 20 | ||
| (b) Evenness | 20 | ||
| Drawing an designing | 50 | 1 | |
| Preparation of articles for the ordinary needs of life (forboys) | 50 | 2 ½ | |
| or | |||
| Domestic Science (for girls) | |||
| Records of Works. | |||
| (a) Record of Physical exercises | 20 | 50 | ... |
| (b) Record of Social service | 10 | ||
| (c) Record of crafts work, yieldincome and expenditure | 20 |
689. Method of award.
- The marks assigned to the candidates will be forwarded to the District Education Officer, who will award the scholarship in accordance with the rules. Not more than one scholarship will ordinarily be awarded to a school in one year, provided that a boy and girl may gain scholarship from the same school and provided also that the District Education Officer may in other exceptional cases permit a school to secure more than one scholarship. A printed copy of the award list will be supplied to each school and the certificate signed by the District Education Officer will be sent to the successful candidates through the Head of the Institution. The District Education Officer should not use facsimile stamp on the certificate.(G. O. no. 4335, dated the 24th November, 1958.)Note. - (1) Two Primary or Middle Scholarships can be given to a school in exceptional cases such as the following690. Value and Tenure.
- Junior College Scholarships are of three grades of the value of Rs. 20, Rs. 15 and Rs. 10 a month, respectively. They are tenable for two years.(Government notification no. 2246-E., dated the 3rd November, 1914.)691. Distribution of scholarships.
- First grade Junior College Scholarships are open to pupils of recognised High/Higher Secondary schools throughout the State; second grade scholarships are distributed by division, and third grade scholarships by districts. The allotment of third grade scholarships will be made annually by the Commissioner of each division in consultation with the District Education Officer and will be notified by the former in the Gazette not later than the 1st of September in each year. The Director will award the scholarships.(Government notification no. 2246-E., dated the 3rd November, 1914.)692. Candidates eligible.
- Junior College Scholarships are open only to pupils of High/Higher Secondary schools recognised by the Department.(Government notification no. 2246-E , dated the 3rd November, 1914.)693. Procedure regarding forwarding of list of candidates.
- The merit list of candidates should be prepared by the Bihar School Examination Board and same within 6 weeks of the publication of the annual results to (i) Government of India, (ii) Director of Public Instruction, Bihar, (iii) Headmaster/Principal and Lady Principals concerned and (iv) Regional Deputy Director of Education. The Head of the Institutions should send to the Regional Deputy Director a full report (pro forma) about the candidates included in the merit list within 15 days and the Regional Deputy Director of Education should send this report in the prescribed form to the Director of Public Instruction within a fortnight. The Department will announce the list within one month of the report from the Regional Deputy Director of Education and the candidates concerned should apply within 30 days through their principals claiming the award.Note. - The two years' rule regarding eligibility has been relaxed. The only condition should be that the candidates should have passed the Secondary School Examination in the first instance.(D. P. I.'s letter no. 3293, dated the 13th August, 1959.)694. Reserved scholarships.
- In addition to the ordinary Junior College Scholarships several scholarships of this class are reserved for the pupils of Backward Tribes and of the Scheduled Castes, and for girls. There are also certain scholarships payable from trust funds; particulars of these will be found in the "Brief account of the Educational Endowments and Trust Fund in Bihar'. All of these scholarships are awarded (in the case of trust fund scholarships, so far as the terms of the trust permit) on the same conditions as ordinary Junior College Scholarship.695. Merit-cum-poverty scholarships to students.
- Merit-cum-poverty stipends to students tenable in schools and colleges have been sanctioned by Government. Scholarships to students reading in classes VI and VII are awarded by the District Education Officers concerned and those for classes VIII to XI by the Regional Deputy Directors of Education concerned after inviting applications from poor and meritorious students in recognised schools. Scholarships to students reading in colleges are awarded by the Director.(G. O. no. 1221, dated the 28th March, 1957.)696. Special scholarships to deaf, dumb and blind students including inamtes of Anathalayas.
- Government have sanctioned Scholarships to the Deaf, Dumb and Blind students reading in Patna Deaf and Dumb school and Blind school and also to the inmates of the Anathalayas. These scholarships are sanctioned by the Regional Deputy Director of Education.(G. O. no. 1221, dated the 28th March, 1957.)Chapter X
The Board of Secondary Education, The Board of Bihar Basic Education. The Text-Bokk and Education Literature Committee. The Board of Adult (Social) Education. The State Board of Physical and Health Education. The Rashtra Bhasha Parishad. The School Examination Committee. The Board of Sanskrit Education. The Board of Cultural Education (Sanskritik Shiksha Parishad), Bihar.
Section IThe Board of Secondary Education697. Functions of the Board.
- The Board of Secondary Education exercises administrative control over High, Higher secondary and Multi-purpose Schools (including Sarvodaya High Schools). The following shall be the functions of the Board namely :-698. Constitution.
- The Board will consist of a number of members not exceeding fifteen and the term of office of members shall be three years from the date of publication of their names in the Official Gazette:Provided that until such Board is established, the Board of Secondary Education constituted under Government resolution no. 541, dated the 31st January 1956, read with Government orders no. 4708-E., dated the 28th August, 1956, no. 2088-E., dated the 21st September 1959, 3rd October, 1959 and no. 3766-E., dated the 21st September 1959 shall be deemed to be the Board established under this section.699. Right of Government to address the Board.
- The Board will have the right to advise the State Government in regard to any matter with which it is concerned. The State Government will have the right to address the Board with reference to any of its work and to communicate to it their views on any matter with which it is concerned. The Board shall report to the State Government, such action, if any, as it is proposed to take or has been taken upon their communication. The State Government may issue such directions as they think fit in cases when after considering any explanation furnished by the Board they find that the Board has not taken action to their satisfaction and the Board shall comply with such directions.(Government Resolution no. 846-E., dated the 5th May, 1937.)700. Rules for the Conduct of Business.
- The rules for the conduct of business are as follows ;-701. Procedure as regards Inspection.
- The inspection of High Schools is ordinarily carried out through the Government inspecting staff. A sub-committee consisting of three members of the Board is appointed annually to scrutinize the inspection reports thus received; the reports are circulated among the members of this sub-committee, and they advise in what cases further inspection by a Board is required. The inspection of those High Schools to which intermediate classes are attached is carried out by a board of two inspectors, one appointed by the University and one by the Board of Secondary Education. Boards are also appointed in all cases of applications for recognition or for new grants, and in cases where it is proposed to withdraw recognition or grants.(G.O. no. 570-E.R. dated the 12th August, 1922, Resolution of the B.S.E., dated the 8th December, 1924.)702. Expenses.
- No member of the Board is entitled to any remuneration for work, done in connection with the Board, but travelling allowance for attendance at meetings is admissible to members who do not reside at Patna, and for members of inspecting boards. The Director is authorised, under rule 246 of the Bihar and Orissa Service Code, to determine the class to which each of the nonofficial members should belong, and to countersign the travelling allowance bills of the members.(G O. no. 570-E. R., dated the 12th August 1922; and no. 3356-E., dated the 18th November, 1924.)703. Delegation of Power to the Secretary.
- The Secretary of the Board of Secondary Education is empowered:-704.
The following is the text of the Bihar Basic Education Board Statutory Rules framed by Government in exercise of the powers conferred by Section 18 of the Bihar Primary Education (Amendment) Act XVII of 1946 and the Bihar Act IV of 1959.(Government notification no. 8934-E., dated the 21st December, 1949.)Bihar Basic Education Board (Exercise of Powers and Functions) Rules, 1949.1. Short title and commencement. - These rules may be called the Bihar Basic Education Board (Exercise of Powers and Functions) Rules, 1949.
2. They shall come into force at once.
3. Definition. - In these rules, unless there is anything repugnant in the subject or context :-
4. Powers and functions of the Board. - Subject to the control of the State Government, the Board shall have power to organise, inspect, control and superintend Basic Education in the State and in the exercise of the said powers, it shall be competent -
5. Channel of correspondence. - The Board shall ordinarily correspond with the State Government through the Director, but in matters requiring immediate action the Board may correspond direct with the State Government, copies of the correspondence in each case being sent to the Director simultaneously.
6. Rules for the conduct of business. - (1) The Board shall ordinarily meet once in six months but in order to transact urgent items of business, it may meet as often as necessary. The date, time and place of meeting of the Board shall ordinarily be fixed by the Secretary in consultation with the Chairman but if three members make a requisition in writing to the Chairman for a meeting of the Board for considering any urgent item or items of business, the Chairman shall convene a meeting within fifteen days of the receipt of such requisition for the disposal of such item or items of business.
705. Duties of Secretary.
- Subject to any general or special order of the Board, the functions of the Secretary who is assisted with an Assistant Secretary shall be as follows :-706. Rates of remuneration.
- The following are the rates of remuneration to paper setters, examiners and tabulators in connection with the Teachers' Training School Course Examination conducted by the Bihar Basic Education Board744. State Board of Physical and Health Education.
- Government have established a Board of Physical and Health Education of which the function and composition will be as stated below.745. Functions.
746. Composition.
- The composition of the Board will be as follows :-747. Rules for Recognition of Akharas and other Athletic Organisations.
- Recognition will be given to Akharas and other athletic organisations which are established in the State of Bihar, by the Board of Physical Education, Bihar, Patna provided they fulfil the following conditions:-748. Rules and Conditions for Grant-in-aid.
- (i) Only recognised Akhara or physical organisation will be eligible for grant-in-aid if it applies in the form prescribed by the Board.749. Rules regarding the Recognition and Grant-in-aid to Physical Culture Institutions.
- The Institution of physical culture (school or college) may be recognised by the State Government on the recommendations of the Board of Health and Physical Education, Bihar, if it fulfils the following conditions :-750. Functions.
- The Bureau will function under the control of the Director of Public Instruction. The functions of the Bureau will be as follows:-751. Educational Guidance.
- Educational Guidance will be provided in the Multipurpose school specially for the purpose of allocation of pupils to the diversified courses. The need is stressed to explore the all-round potentialities of the pupils, their abilities, aptitudes, interests and skills, that suit the differential requirements of the diversified courses. The resulting knowledge, rather than mere examination marks, has to form the basis of the allocation to the courses.752. Vocational Guidance.
- Educational Guidance is not to be separated from vocational guidance. From the practical point of view the ultimate purpose of education is to prepare an individual to take up a vocation or calling in life. Educational guidance should not be devoid of an understanding of the vocational implications of the educational course and subjects of study. Vocational guidance would attempt to broaden the child's horizon of knowledge by providing him comprehensive information regarding the world of work before he tries to get himself fitted therein.753. Organisation of Educational and Vocational Guidance.
- Education and vocational guidance is a co-operative undertaking and pre-supposes a spirit of team work pervading the entire school system, including the Managing Committee of the School. In order to obtain this condition the formation of a Guidance Committee in the school may be treated as a very effective first step.754. Guidance Committee.
- The Guidance Committee should consist of the (1) Secretary of the School who should be the ex-officio President of the Committee, (2) Headmaster/Principal, who should be the ex-officio Vice-President, (3) Teacher Counsellor who should be the ex-officio Secretary and (4) other teachers of the school who volunteer their co-operation in the administration and guidance in the school. The size of the committee should range between seven and nine.755. Function of the Committee.
756. Building and Location.
- A separate room should be provided within the school premises, preferably in a remote corner. This should be used exclusively for guidance work and called 'Guidance Room'. The room should be furnished with an almirah for keeping the test materials, the cumulative records of pupils, and other materials to which there should be no free access. In addition, the room should have small table with drawers, at least two chairs, and a book-shelf. The room should not be crammed with other articles to give the impression of a store room. Where it is not possible to find a room in the school building, ways and means should be found to construct at least a 10' x 10' room. Pending the construction, a corner in a hall or verandah which is out of the way and generally not frequented by visitors or passers-by may be partitioned out and used as the 'Guidance Room'.757. Maintenance of cumulative record.
- The school should maintain a continuing comprehensive record about each pupil. Preferably, this record should cover a period of five years, four years of the Higher Secondary stage and one year preceding it.758. Career classes.
- In the regular class time-table, there should be set apart at least one period per week during which pupils should be informed about the various occupations related to the different educational levels, and about the academic and technical training courses available before and after the completion of the Higher Secondary stage. Separate talks should be prepared for this purpose on separate occupations or courses. The talks should be simple and within the easy comprehension of the average pupil of the class. Teacher Counsellors have been trained at the Bureau in organising such talks and other teachers may follow their example in preparing their talks.759. Occupational information corner.
- A corner in the library or elsewhere, but not in the Guidance Room, may be provided for the purpose of display of occupational information materials. Some method should be devised for making such materials accessible to teacher, pupils and interested guardians. Part of such materials will be regularly supplied to the school by the Educational and Vocational Guidance Bureau. The rest has to be provided by the school itself.Note. - (i) Career conference, occupational film shows and such other media of dissemination of occupational information have to be tried by the school at regular intervals. In all such matters, full co-operation will be extended to the school by the Bureau.760. Educational Guidance.
- Types and sources of data to be used for the purpose of allocation to the diversified courses.1. Tests. - (a) Tests of General Ability.
2. Examination marks. - Examination marks are not found to be very reliable sources of information in most cases and there is a tendency to discredit them. But they have their own value in comprehensive scheme of educational guidance. The marks will throw additional light on the pupil's strength and weaknesses.
3. Objective observation. - Observation of behaviour of pupils in the class-room and out of the class-room situation is to be used for the purpose of assessing their personality, special aptitude and interest. The school should introduce a number of small group extra curricular activities in each class. These will provide opportunities for the Teacher Counsellor and other teachers to observe the behaviour and aptitude of pupils in concrete situations.
4. Interview. - Each pupil is to be interviewed by the Teacher Counsellor who has been trained in the method of interviewing. A schedule should be prepared beforehand, providing each pupil to remain absent from the class for a total of two to three periods during the session. These three periods are to be distributed among three different subjects so that a pupil misses only one class in a subject on this account. The purpose of the interview will be two-fold; (1) to supplement pupil data gathered from other sources and (2) to verify the said data. Facilities should be granted to a Teacher Counsellor to interview special pupils for their personal problems if he so desires. But this is not to be treated as a part of his normal duties.
5. Home visit. - A Teacher Counsellor should be encouraged to visit pupils' homes in order to obtain data on the home background of the pupil or for other relevant purposes.
6. School records. - Teacher Counsellor should have access to school records whenever he finds it necessary to do so in preparing the pupils' cumulative record.
761. Procedure for allocation to the diversified courses.
2. Fine Arts (artistic aptitude, interest and quality). - In making his recommendation, the Teacher Counsellor should take into consideration other data from the cumulative records of the pupils such as (a) pupil's interest (b) pupil's physical and health condition, (c) his vocational plan, (d) parent's vocational plan for pupil, (e) parent's wishes concerning course of studies,(f) teacher's judgment regarding aptitude, and so on.
Note. - Parent's wishes have to be specially respected and where these are not found to be in accord with his recommendation, the Teacher Counsellor should try to explain the relevant pupil data to the parent and persuade him to accept the recommendation made A right approach to the parents is generally expected to bring about the desired outcome.762. Marked disparity in achievement of a pupil.
- Whenever a marked disparity is noted between the overall achievement of a pupil in the school subjects and his scores in the tests of general ability the test administration should be repeated. If the disparity persists, under-achievement should be taken to Indicate most probably lack of interest in and application to class work on the part of the pupil. In case of over-achievement, the pupil has perhaps been over compensating for his inferior ability by hard work at home and, therefore at the expense of his all round social and physical development. Both types of pupil need special help and may, where possible, be referred to counsellor for this purpose.763. Vocational Guidance.
- Vocational guidance to school leavers should on the following principles;-764. Code of Professional Conduct.
- A Teacher Counsellor has to observe a strict code of professional conduct. His success as guidance worker will depend upon the degree to which he can secure the trust and confidence of pupils. He has to prove himself worthy of the trust. He should keep strictly confidential all information regarding a pupil and should pass on to the Guidance Committee or to any other person, including the parents, only that part which can be used in the best interest of the pupil. For example, he may come to know from the pupil some secrets about his family, or obtain a picture of the family economic condition that does not tally with the school or other record and so on. In all such cases, the Teacher Counsellor should keep the information strictly to himself. He should not use the information to the detriment of the pupil's interest even after he has left the school. It is also recommended that a Teacher Counsellor is not to be consulted in matters of award of free-studentship or any other poor boys' aids to the pupils with whom he has been working, as far as practicable.765. Duty of Teacher Counsellor.
- A Teacher Counsellor should devote to guidance work at least one-third of the total number of his hours of work. He should be relieved of his teaching work to that extent. Regular hours should be fixed for guidance work and shown in the time-table. Those hours are not to be utilised in any other manner. Guidance work should not be done in a period that happens to be vacant on a certain day on account of the absence of a teacher. A school may decide to give more relief to a Teacher Counsellor from teaching, that is beyond the minimum prescribed above. But it is not to be considered desirable for a Teacher Counsellor to be completely relieved of teaching, i.e., the Teacher Counsellor should do some amount of teaching also.Section VIIThe Rashtra Bhasha Parishad766. The Bihar Bashtra Bhasha Parishad.
- The following is the text of Rules for the Bihar Rashtra Bhasha Parishad.(Government notification no. 5556, dated the 21st November, 1959.)1. Tittle. - The name of this institution is "Bihar Rashtra Bhasha Parishad"
2. Centre. - Its centre is in Patna.
3. Objects and functions. - The Bihar Rashtra Bhasha Parishad has been established with the object of developing the literature of the modern Indian languages, publishing the original and useful bookS of Science and other subjects and arranging for the proper research in principal dialects of Bihar. For the fulfilment of these objects, the Parishad will do the following work:-
4. Managing Committee. - There shall be two bodies to manage the work of this Parishad :
5. Constitution of the General Council. - The General Council of the Parishad will consist of the following :-
6. Duties and powers of the General Council. - It shall be the duty of the Council to determine all general questions of policy and programme of the Parishad and to sanction annual budget. It shall have the power to make necessary changes in any determination and decision of the Control Board. But the approval of the Bihar Government shall be necessary for giving effect to such decisions and determinations as are opposed to the approved policy of Government and those relating to annual budget.
7. Ordinary meeting of the General Council. - The General Council shall meet at least twice, and ordinarily thrice a year, and notice of every meeting, with a list of items to be considered, shall be given to the member at least three weeks before the date of the meeting.
8. Extraordinary meeting of the General Council. - An extraordinary meeting of the General Council shall be held in special circumstances, by the order of the President of the General Council or at the written request of at least two-thirds of the members. A week's notice to the members shall be sufficient for such a meeting.
9. Consideration of items of subjects proposed by the members. - If in an ordinary meeting of the General Council besides the list of items on the agenda submitted by the Director for consideration, any member wants any other item to be considered by the General Council, he has to send written requisition on receipt of the notice to the Director about the items to be considered two weeks before the date fixed for the meeting together with an explanatory note. If the President approves its inclusion in the agenda it shall be the duty of the Director to send its copy to all the members at least three days before the date of the meeting.
10. Communication of the proceedings of the General Council. - After the approval of the President, the proceedings of every meeting of the General Council will be sent to all the members and the Director of Public Instruction, Bihar for information.
11. Duties and powers of the President. - It shall be the duty of the President to preside over the meetings of the General Council of the Parishad and to supervise and control generally all the work of the Council. In addition to his own vote the President shall have a casting vote. If he likes he may postpone implementation of any resolution of the Control Board and put it before the General Council for necessary guidance within a month.
12. Duly of the Vice-President. - It shall be the duty of the Vice-President to preside over the meetings of the General Council, in the absence of the President.
13. Election of President in the event of the President and Vice-President being absent. - In the event of the President and the Vice-President being absent at a meeting of the General Council, the Council shall have the right to elect its own President for the day's meeting.
14. Constitution of the Control Board. - The Control Board of the Parishad shall be constituted as below :-
15. Duties and powers of the Control Board. - It shall be the duty of the Control Board to make proper arrangement for the fulfilment of the aims and objects of the Parishad in accordance with the policy and programme laid down by the General Council and when necessary with the approval of the Bihar Government. It shall also be the duty of the Control Board to sanction expenditure on reward, grants to institutions, prizes on books, reward to old literature's, and encouragement prizes to young literature's, and grants from the Rajendra Nidhi, within the approved budget and beyond the powers delegated to the Director. It shall have powers to frame such bye-laws for the smooth disposal of its work as are not opposed to these rules and may by a resolution delegate any of its powers to its Chairman and Vice-Chairman. The bye-laws shall need prior approval of Government.
16. Communication of the proceedings of the Control Board. - The proceeding of all the meetings of the Control Board held after the last ordinary meeting of the General Council will be put up before every ordinary meeting of the General Council.
17. Meeting of the Control Board. - An ordinary meeting of the Control Board shall be held every month. At least one week's notice will be given to the members. In special circumstances, an emergent meeting of the Control Board can be held. Three days' notice for such meeting shall be adequate. It shall be obligatory to call an emergent meeting of the Board on a written requisition of at least half the members of the Control Board.
18. Proceedings of the Control Board. - After its approval by the Chairman the proceeding of every meeting of the Control Board shall be communicated to all its members, President of the General Council and the Director of Public Instruction, Bihar for information.
19. Duties and powers of the Chairman. - It shall be the duty of the Chairman to preside over the meetings of the Control Board and to supervise and control all its work and in special circumstances to approve of any important work (notice of which shall be given in the next meeting). The Chairman shall have a casting vote in addition to his own vote.
20. Duties of the Vice-Chairman. - In the absence of the Chairman the Vice-Chairman shall preside over the meetings of the Control Board.
21. Duties and powers of the Director. - The Director of the Parishad shall be a paid Government servant appointed by the Bihar Government and shall have to perform and exercise such duties and powers as are entrusted and delegated to him by Government. Ordinarily he shall have the same administrative and financial duties and powers as are performed and exercised by the Regional Deputy Director of Education (previously known as Inspector of Schools).
22. Office Secretary. - It shall be the duty of the office Secretary to perform and exercise such duties and powers as are entrusted to him by the Director from time to time.
23. Budgetary procedure. - (a) The entire expenditure of the Parishad shall be borne by the Government of Bihar.
24. Revision or amendment of rules. - The Bihar Government alone shall have the power to make amendments in and additions to these rules. The General Council may, however, send its suggestions regarding revision of rules to Government for approval.
(Government notification no. 5556, dated the 21st November, 1959 and Government Order no. 1/P 1-015/59-E.-5640, dated the 25th/27th November, 1959.)Section VIII[767 to 774. [Articles 767 to 774 not printed as these are no longer in existence, in view of the 'Examination' being conducted by 'School Examination Board'.]The School Examination Committee.]Section IXThe Board of Sanskrit Education775. Scope.
- The State Government have constituted a Board of Sanskrit Education which shall exercise control and superintendence over the recognised Sanskrit institutions imparting instruction only up to Madhyama standard except tols.776. Constitution.
- The Board of Sanskrit Education consists of the following members :-777. Term of office.
- The members of the Board other than ex-officio members shall hold office for a term of three years with effect from the date of their nomination. Any casual vacancy occurring during the term shall be filled up in the same manner for the remaining period of the term only. Any casual vacancy in the Board shall not nullify the proceedings of the Board on that account.778. Meetings.
- The Board shall ordinarily meet quarterly as a rule. For ordinary meetings 15 (fifteen) days' clear notice shall be given to the members of the date, time, place and agenda for the meeting. Emergent meetings may be called, if necessary, by wire with at least five days' notice with prior approval of the President. Five members including the President and the Secretary shall form a quorum.779. Travelling allowance to non-official members.
- The non-official members of the Board shall be paid travelling allowance for attending the meetings of the Board at rates admissible in case of first class officers of the State Government. The Secretary of the Board shall be the drawing and disbursing officer for this purpose and the President shall be countersigning authority.780. Powers and functions of the Board.
- In addition to the powers conferred upon the Board in Government notification no. 323, dated the 24th January, 1961 (see Chapter VI) it shall have such other powers as may be determined by the State Government from time to time.(Government Resolution no. 322, dated the 24th January, 1961.)Section XThe Board of Cultural Education (Sanskrit Shiksha Parishad), Bihar781. Board of Cultural Education.
- The State Government have constituted a State Board of Cultural Education (Bihar Sanskritik Siksha Parishad) for the organisation, development and promotion of Dance, Drama, Music, Fine Arts and all other cultural activities in the State.(Resolution no. 421, dated the 17th February, 1961.)782. Aims and objects.
- The Board of Cultural Education shall be an Advisory Body and if the Government so desire, may execute any scheme of Cultural Education formulated by it and approved by the State Government. The Board shall advise the Government on its own initiative or on a reference from the Government on the following matters :-783. Functions of the Board.
- The Board shall formulate schemes and advise the Government on any matter referred to above and may implement and execute any scheme formulated by it and approved by the Government if the latter so desire, for which necessary funds shall be placed by the Government at the disposal of the Board.(Resolution no. 421, dated the 17th February, 1961.)784. Status of the Board.
- Like other Boards under the Education Department the Board of Cultural Education shall be a Government body and shall deal with the Government through the Director of Public Instruction, Bihar.(Resolution no. 421, dated the 17th February, 1961)785. Headquarters and office of the Board.
- The headquarters of the Board shall be at Patna and its office shall be located in the premises of the State Theatre which is to be constructed very soon pending which it will be located in a Government building or a rented building for which a maximum monthly rental of Rs. 150 may be sanctioned by Government.(Resolution no. 421, dated the 17th February, 1961.)786. Members and office-bearers.
- (i) The Board shall have a General council of 43 (forty-three) members and a Executive Board of 14 (fourteen) members including the office-bearers and shall have a President, Vice-President and a member-secretary. The office-bearers of the General Council shall ipso facto be the office bearers of the Executive Board, but the designations of the President and the Vice-President of the General Council shall be Chairman and Vice-Chairman in the Executive Board. The member-secretary shall be a class I officer of the Education Department posted at Patna and shall be nominated by the Government to hold charge of this office, in addition to his own duties, for which the Government will sanction him an allowance not exceeding Rs. 100 per month.787. Constitution of the General Council.
- Total strength - 43.| (1) | President .. .. | Minister of Education. | ||
| (2) | Vice-President .. .. | Deputy Minister of Education. | ||
| (3) | Member-Secretary .. | Nominated by the Government. | ||
| (4) | 40 nominated members of different categories as indicated below:- | |||
| (i) | Ex-officiomembers | 12 | ||
| (ii) | Representative of Chow Dance (Special Art) | 1 | ||
| (iii) | Representatives of Tribal Arts | 3 | ||
| (iv) | Representatives of Cultural institutions to be nominated byrotation, one from each division of the State. | 4 | ||
| (v) | Representatives of Parliament and State Legislatures. | 4 | ||
| (vi) | Representatives of public men interested in Art and culture. | 16 | ||
| Total .. .. | 40 |
788. Constitution of the Executive Board.
- Total strength - 14.| (i) | Chairman | .. | Minister of Education. |
| (ii) | Vice-Chairman | .. | Deputy Minister for Education |
| (iii) | Secretary | .. | Member-Secretary of the General Council. |
| (iv) | 11 members of the General Council covering different categoriesof the member to be nominated by the Government, of which oneshall be the representative of the Chow Dance and one shall befrom among the representatives of the tribal arts. |
789. Term of the office of the members and office-bearers.
- The term of the office of all categories of members and office-bearers shall be of three years from the date of notification.(Government Resolution no. 421, dated the 17th February, 1961.)790. Travelling allowances to members.
- Non-official member coming from side Patna for attending the meetings of the Board (General Council and Executive Board) shall draw travelling allowance and haltage as permissible to class I officers and halting allowance at the rate of Rs.7 per night halt. Members of the Legislatures and Parliament shall draw travelling allowance and haltage as admissible to them. Members of the Legislatures shall not however, draw any*travelling allowance and haltage for attending any meetings of the Board when the Legislature is in session at the place where the meeting is held.(Government Resolution no. 421, dated the 17th February, 1961.)791. Meetings of the Board.
- The General Council of the Board shall meet not more than twice a year. The Executive Board shall meet as often as required.(Government Resolution no. 421, dated the 17th February, 1961.)792. Administrative Control.
- The Board of Cultural Education shall be under the administrative control of the Education Department and all its advice and recommendations shall be submitted to the Government through the Director of Public Instruction.(Government Resolution no. 421, dated the 17th February, 1961.)793. Powers of the Board.
- Apart from the powers delegated to it by the Government, the Board shall have the following powers :-Chapter XI
Departmental Organisation and Procedure.
Section IRules Relating to Educational Officers(a)Appointment794. Different services.
- The department comprises officers of the Bihar Subordinate and Lower Subordinate Services. It also contains a number of officers in posts outside the graded services on fixed or incremental pay.795. Appointment to Bihar Education Service.
- Appointments to the Bihar Educational Service (Class I) and the Bihar Educational Service (Class II) shall be made-796. Power of appointment to the department.
- With the exceptions as laid down in the preceding article the Director is competent to make appointment to all duly sanctioned posts under him within or outside the graded service. Similar powers are by delegation exercised by the Governing Bodies of Government Professional Colleges, District Education Officer and the Regional Deputy Director of Education in respect of posts the initial salary of which is Rs. 190 or less; by the Sub-divisional Education Officer in the case of posts in inferior service, or outside the grades, or in the Lower Subordinate Service; and by the District Inspectress, Principals of Government Higher Secondary schools and the Deputy Inspector and the Deputy Inspectress of Schools in respect of posts outside the grades services whose pay does not exceed Rs. 30 a month.Note. - The Principal of Government Training Colleges exercise powers of appointment similar to those exercised by the District Education Officer in respect of posts in the institutions under their control.(G. O. no. 6-T., dated the 4th November 1912 and no. 141- E.R., dated the 18th May, 1927.)797. Age-limits.
- The age-limit for appointment to the Subordinate Educational service is 26 years in the case of candidates who have successfully completed a one-year course at a Training College, and 27 years in the case of candidates who have successfully completed a two-year course at a Training College. For all other posts in the department in superior pensionable service the age-limit is 25. In the case of candidates belonging to the Scheduled Castes and Backward Tribes, the age-limit is increased by three years. The sanction of the Director is necessary for the appointment of a person whose age exceeds the limit prescribed.(G. O. no. 3685-E., dated the 19th October 1935, rule of the Bihar Service Code and G. O. no. 2492-A.,dated the 24th May, 1946.)Notes. - (1) When, in the opinion of the appointing authority, a person appointed m the first instance in an officiating or temporary capacity to be made permanent at a later date, the question of exemption from age-limit, if necessary, should be considered at the time of the first appointment, though formal sanction to the exemption may be accorded at the time the person is confirmed in Government service.(Note to rule 54 of the Bihar Service Code.)798. Method of filling vacancies.
- Except as specified in Article 800 of this Code all vacancies in the department whether permanent or temporary, which are not filled by promotion within the same office, or by the appointment of a probationer already admitted to the office in accordance with this and the succeeding rule, must be duly advertised in the prescribed form in the Bihar Gazette. The Press will supply spare copies of the advertisement for circulation to the principal newspapers in the State.(G. O. no. III-A., dated the 12th February 1923.)Note. - This rule does not apply to posts in the Lower Subordinate Service or posts for inferior service.(G. O. no. 1823-E., dated the 28th October 1918.)Candidates for employment should apply to the person specified in the advertisement.799. Appointment of District Superintendent of Education and Sub-divisional Education Officers.
- Appointments to the post of the Sub-divisional Education Officers and District Superintendents of Education are made as follows:-| 50 per cent | ... | ... | By promotion of officers of the Upper Division of theSubordinate Educational Service. |
| 25 per cent | ... | ... | On the result of Public Service Commission. |
| 25 per cent | ... | ... | By open advertisement. |
800. Appointment to the Subordinate Educational Service.
- All vacancies occurring in the Subordinate Educational Service shall ordinarily be advertised and filled by selection from among the candidates who reply to the advertisement or are nominated by the Principals of the Training Colleges. The District Education Officer shall furnish to the Director, by the 15th April each year, the particulars of qualifications, categories, etc., of all vacancies that are likely to occur in the following year. These vacancies shall then be advertised by the Director before the 1st May and a division-wise list of applicants suitable for appointment shall be drawn up by the Central Selection Board by the 31st May. The District Education Officers shall make appointments out of this list. The list shall ordinarily remain valid for one year but its validity may be extended, if necessary, by the State Government. In the event of urgent and unforeseen vacancy, District Educational Officer may make temporary appointment without reference to the Director for a period not exceeding three months, but when the need is so urgent as to make it difficult for an appointment to be made out of the list, the District Education Officers may permit the managing committee of the school to make an appointment for a period not exceeding one month after advertising the post locally.(G. O. no. 790-E., dated the 12th June 1919, G. O. no. 1627-E., dated the 30th January 1954, and G. O. no. 18362-E., dated the 29th October 1954.)801. Preliminary enquiries.
- Before any officer is appointed permanently or temporarily to the Subordinate Educational Service enquiries must be made as to his character in such form as the State Government may from time to time prescribe, and no candidate should be appointed by a District Education Officer unless he has been found to be eligible for appointment as the result of these enquiries. A statement, in the prescribed form, of the appointments made in each calendar year by each authority empowered to make appointments to the Subordinate Educational Service should be submitted to the Director in the second week of the following year.802. Initial qualifications for appointment to the Subordinate Educational Service.
- None but trained graduates may be appointed to the Subordinate Educational Service except in posts reserved for classical teachers or other posts requiring special qualifications of a technical nature and in purely temporary vacancies when it would be impossible to obtain a trained graduate without undue delay. This rule may be relaxed only with the previous sanction of the Director.(G. O. no. 3685-E., dated the 19th October 1935.)803. Different scales of pay.
- In Articles 804 to 811 which follow three separate scales of pay are shown for each of the different services in the Department:-804. Pay of the Bihar Educational Service.
- The pay of the Bihar Educational Service is as follows:-| Item. | {| |
| *Existing scale| OldNew |
| Rs.360-40/2/600-E.B.-50/1-1-1,250Rs.300-35/2-440-40-640-E.B.-40-1,000 |
| Rs.325-15-475-E.B.-25-800Rs.280-12-400-E.B.-20-600-25-700. |
| Rs.250-40/20-450-50/2-550-E.B.-50/1-600-40/1-800.Rs.200-40/2-400-E.B.-30-700 |
| Rs.200-15-350-E.B.-15-500Rs.170-13-300-E.B.-13-430 |
805. Grant of advance increments in the Bihar Educational Service to Scholars with Ph.D., D.Sc. and D. Lit. degree.
- Advance increments to those Government servants in Bihar Educational Service who have obtained high academic distinction of Indian of Foreign Universities have been sanctioned as follows:-| Degree. | Number of increments. | |
| Ph. D. (Foreign) | ... | Four. |
| Ph. D. (Indian) | ... | Two. |
| D. Sc. or D. Litt (Indian) | ... | Three. |
806. Pay of the Subordinate Education Service.
- The Subordinate Educational Service has two divisions, an upper division and a lower division. It has also six branches (a) college teachers, (b) Reformatory School teachers, (e) Women, (d) the inspecting staff and (e) the teaching staff of Boys' Schools. In the case of the first three branches the number of posts in the upper division is fixed with reference to the importance of the different posts; in the case of the last two branches it is 30 per cent of the total. The pay of the division is as follows :-| Item. | {| |
| *Existing scale| OldNew |
807. Pay of the Lower Subordinate Service.
- The pay of the Lower Subordinate Service is as follows :-| Item. | {| |
| *Existing scale| OldNew |
54.
-2-60-------------------------------------Rs. 31-1-50with a selection grade on Rs. 55.| Rs. 50-2-70-E.B.-2-90 with a selection grade on Rs.60.
-2-80-E.B.-2-100.| Rs. 105-3-123-E.B.-3-129-2-145-2-155, with selection grade onRs. 115-3-133-E.B.-3-139-2-155-E.B.-2-165.|-| For trained Matriculate or Secondary School Examination passed50.
-2-70-E.B.-2-90.| Rs. 100-2-112-E.B.-2-130 (with selection grade on Rs.105.
-3-123-E.B.-3-129-2-145-E.B-2-155.|-| For trained non-Matriculate (Women).| Rs. 30-1-50----------------------Rs. 30-1-50| Rs. 45-2-55-E.B.-2-75 with a selection grade on Rs.60.
-2-80-EB-2-100.| Rs. 100-2-112-E.B.-2-130 with selection grade in Rs.160.
-7-202-E.B.-7-244-9-280|}(*Now see new scale of pay.)Note. - The total number of posts in all the selection grades together must not exceed 15 per cent of the total cadre.808. Pay of teachers in Basic institutions.
- The pay of teachers working in different types of basic schools is as follows:-| Item. | *New scales. | *Prescribed scales. | *Replacement scale. | |
| 1. | Principal of the Teacher's Training Schools. | Rs. 250-10-350 | Rs. 300-10-350. | Rs.325-30-505-E.B.-30-805-E.B.-30-985 (Minimum Rs. 445 &Maximum Rs. 925). |
| 2. | Assistant Principal of Teachers' Training School. | Rs. 170-10-250 | Rs. 250-10-300. | Rs. 250-15-340-E.B.-15-430-20-510-E.B.-29-550. |
| 3. | Senior Instructor in Teachers' Training School. | Rs. 125-5-175 | Rs. 125-8-205-E.B.-9-250. | Rs. 160-10-220-E.B.-10-320-E.B.-10-400 (Minimum Rs. 200Maximum Rs. 350). |
| 4. | Instructor in Teachers' Training School. | Rs. 100-5-150 | Rs. 100-5-130-E.B.-6-190. | Rs. 160-7-202-E.B-7-244-9-280. |
| 5. | Teachers in Teachers' | Rs. 40-2-80 | Rs. 60-2-80-E.B.-2-100 | Rs. 115-3-133-E.E.-3-139-2-155-E.B-2-165. |
| 6. | Teachers in Teachers' Training School. | Rs. 30-1 -35-3/2-50----------------------------Rs.25-1/2-30-1-35 | Rs. 45-2-55-E.B.-2-75(Non-Matric).---------------------------------Rs.50-2-70-E.B.-2-90 (Matriculates). | Rs.75-2-85-E.B.-3-115.-----------------------------------Rs.80-3-95-E.B.-4-115-3-130. |
| 7. | Music Teacher in Teachers Training School, Patna | Rs. 25-1-35 | Rs. 40-2-50-E.B.-1-60. | Rs. 100-2-112-E.B.-2-130. |
809. Pay of the staff employed in the Reformatory School, Hazaribagh.
-| Item. | {| | |
| *Existing scale| OldNew |
1205.
)|-| 2.| Deputy Superintendent| Rs. 150-15/2-240-----------------------Rs.128.
-12/2-200| Rs. 150-10-230-E.B.-15-350.| Rs. 325-30-505-E.B.- 30-805-E.B.-30-985 (Minimum Rs. 445 andMaximum Rs. 925.)|-| 3.| Workshop Supervisor| Rs. 150-5-200-----------------------Rs. 120-5-170| Rs. 125-8-205-E.B.-9-250| Rs. 160-10-220-E.B.-10-320-E.B.-10-400 (Minimum Rs. 200 andMaximum Rs. 350)|-| 4.| Assistant Supervisor| Rs.60-6/2-120-----------------------Rs. 50-5/2-100| Rs. 75-4-95-E.B.-5-120-3-150.| Rs. 115-5-145-E.B.-5-195-E.B.-5-225|-| 5.| Weaving master| ...-----------------------Rs 35-3-50| Rs. 45-2-55-E.B.-2-75.| Rs. 105-3-123-E.B.-3-129-2-145-E.B.-2-155|-| 6.| Warden| Rs. 75-5-100-----------------------Rs. 65-4-85| Rs. 70-3-85-E.B.-4-105-2-125.| Rs. 115-5-145-E.B-5- 195-E.B-5-225 (Minimum Rs. 620)|-| 7.| Housemaster| ...-----------------------Rs. 25-1-35| Rs. 40-2-50-E.B.-60.| Rs. 100-2-112 E.B.-2-130|-| 8.| Escorting| ...-----------------------Rs. 20-1-25| Rs. 28-1-(bi)-40.| Rs. 75-1/2-25.|-| 9.| Compounder| ...-----------------------Rs. 25-1-45| Rs. 35-2-45-E.B.-1-5545.
-2-55-E.B.-2-75 (passed).| Rs.85.
-1-91-E.B.-1-100-2-102-E.B.-2-110.------------------------------------Rs.100.
-2-112-E.B.-2-130|-| 10.| Male nurse| ...-----------------------Rs. 20-1-25| Rs. 21-1-(bi)-40.| Rs. 75-1/2-85.*|-| 11.| Teachers for Engineering for Diploma classes.| ...-----------------------Rs. 120-5-145-5/2-170| Rs. 125-8-205-E.B.-9-250.| Rs. 160-10-220-E.B.-10-320-E.B.-10-400 (Minimum Rs. 200 andMaximum Rs. 350.)|-| 12.| Diploma Instructor| Rs. 40-1-45-1/2-50| Rs. 50-2-70-E.B.-2-90.| Rs. 115-3-133-E.B.-3-139 -2-155-E.B.-2-165.|-| 13.| Typist| ...-----------------------Rs. 40-2-60| Rs. 50-2-70-E.B.-2-90.| Rs. 105-3-123-E.B.-3-129 -2-145-E.B.-2-155.|}(*Now see new scale of pay.)810. Pay of Officers outside the grades.
-| Item. | {| | |
| *Existing scale| OldNew |
65.
-4/2-125| Rs. 75-4-95-E.B.-120-3-150.| Rs. 115-5-145-E.B.-195- .B.-5-195-E.B.-5-225.|-| 6.| Weaving Master in practising school attached to Teachers'Training School.|| Rs. 50-2-70-E.B-2-9045.
-2-55-E.B.-75 (Non-Matriculate).| Rs.115.
-3-133-E.B.-3-13%-2-155-E.B.-2-165.-----------------------------------------------Rs.105.
-3-123-E.B.-3-129-2-145-E.B-2-155.|-| 7.| Headmistress, Practising Upper Primary School.| Rs. 20-----------------Rs. 20| Rs. 40-2-50 E.B.-1-60.| Rs. 100-2-112-E.B.-2-130.|-| 8.| Second Mistress, practising Upper Primary Schools.| Rs. 16-----------------Rs. 16| Rs. 35-45-E.B.-1-55.| Rs. 85-1-91-E.B.-1-100-2-102-E.B.-2-100.|-| 9.| Third and Fourth mistress, practising Upper Primary Schools.| Rs. 15-----------------Rs. 15| Rs. 35-2-45-E.B.-1-55.| Rs. 85-1-91-E.B.-1-100-2-102-E.B.-2-110.|-| 10.| Governess of Hostel in the B.N.R. Training College,Gulzarbagh.| Rs. 65-----------------Rs. 55| Rs. 45-2-55-E.B.-2-75.| Rs. 100-2-112-E.B.-2-130.|-| 10.| Governess of Hostel in the B.N.R. Training College,Gulzarbagh.| Rs. 65-----------------Rs. 55| Rs. 45-2-55-E.B.-2-75.| Rs. 100-2-112-E.B.-2-130.|-| 11.| House Mistressn in the Bankipore Multi-purpose Girl's School.| Rs. 30-----------------Rs. 30| Rs. 35-2-45-E.B.-1-55.| Rs. 85-1-91-E.B.-1-100-2-102-E.B.-2-110|}(* G.O. no. 6288-F, dated the 15th April, 1948) ("Vide Resolution No. PR-G2-2/65-67/F11, dated 10-3-1965 and No. PR-G2-85-65-532-F11 dated 17-7-1965.)(*Now see new scale of pay.)811. Pay of the Ministerial Service.
-| Item. | {| |
| *Existing scale| OldNew |
812. Pay of graduates.
- No graduate should be appointed to pay post in the department the maximum pay of which is less than Rs. 60 a month.(D. P. I.' orders, dated the 4th January, 1937.)813. Probationary rules.
- Every person appointed, on direct recruitment to classes I and II of the Bihar Educational Service shall be on probation for a period of two years from the date on which he joins his appointment. In case of an officer who is appointed on promotion to classes I and II of the Bihar Educational Service, State Government may prescribe a shorter period of probation which shall not be less than one year. No member of the service shall be allowed to draw any increment in the time-scale of pay during the probation period. In the case of other posts the officer appointing will at the time of the appointment fix the period of probation which should be three to twelve months.(G. O. no. 3149, dated the 18th December, 1906 and no. 6234-K, dated the 15th November, 1930.)814. Confirmation of officers.
- The member of the service appointed on probation shall be confirmed in his appointment until (a) he has completed the period of probation prescribed in his case and (b) the State Government or the appointing authority is satisfied that he is fit for confirmation. The confirmation of an officer will ordinarily have retrospective effect from the date of first appointment in that class. If, however, the probationary period of an officer has been extended on account of his unsatisfactory service, or on account of late passing of the examination prescribed by the Department, the appointing authority has the discretion to determine the date from which his confirmation should take effect. If an officer has delayed passing of the examination and has not passed the same within prescribed period, his confirmation may take effect from a date later than his substantive appointment in that class which will be determined by Government on the merit of the case. It is the duty of the Controlling Officers to submit a report on every officer appointed on probation by the Director at least one month before the expiry of his probationary period, with a recommendation for his reversion, confirmation, further probation or removal. The period of probation should not be extended beyond two years.(G. O. no. 3213, dated the 24th July, 1957, no. 790-E., dated the 12th June 1919 and D. P. I.'s circular no. 5. dated the 16th January, 1919.)815. Confirmation of Temporary Officers in Bihar Education Service.
816. General rules.
- The Director is empowered to make promotions to and within the upper division of the Subordinate Education Service. Promotions in the lower division of the Subordinate Educational Service and in the Lower Subordinate Service are made, as far as passible, at conferences of inspecting officers which are summoned by the Director.(G. O. no. 2472-E., dated the 30th October 1913.)817. Promotion to the upper division of the Subordinate Educational Service.
- The promotion of officers to the upper division of the Subordinate Educational Service is made by selection and not by seniority, only those officers being promoted who are considered fit for eventual promotion to the higher posts of the service. In making promotions, the criterion is the efficiency and capability of the officer in whatever branch of work it is displayed, and the possession of a university degree is not regarded as a qualification which merits any special consideration.(G. O. no. 2353-E., dated the 8th November, 1919 and G. O, no. 1463-E., dated the 14th April, 1921.)818. Officers liable to pass the Departmental Examination.
- An examination is held annually on the same day at each divisional headquarters, the same papers being used in each case, for all officers of the Women's School teachers and inspectors-branches of the Subordinate Educational Service (excluding Pandits, inaulvis and drawing masters) who have during the preceding-year been appointed to the upper division of the Subordinate Educational Service, and for such officers appointed to posts of Headmistress, Headmaster, Principal, District Inspectress or Sub-divisional Education Officer in the Bihar Education Service as have not passed the test previously, and also for officers promoted to class I of the ministerial service. Until they have passed the examination such officers are deemed to be on probation in the upper division of the Subordinate Educational Service or in the Bihar Education Service, or in class I of the ministerial service, as the case may be, A second failure in the examination renders an officer liable (a) if promoted to the upper division of the Subordinate Education Service to be reverted to the lower division at the discretion of the Director, (b) if appointed direct to the Bihar Educational Service, to discharge at the discretion of Government, (c) if promoted to the Bihar ^Educational Service, to be reverted to the Subordinate Educational Service at the discretion of Government and (d) if promoted to class I of the ministerial service, to be reverted to class II at the discretion of the officer who promoted him. Other I officers already in the Subordinate Educational Service in the branches in question and other clerks, except those in class III of the ministerial service who have not reached a pay of Rs. 70 of that class are eligible to sit for the examination at any time, if they wish.(G O. no. 1430-E., dated the 30th March, 1926; D. P. I.'s letter no. 3998, dated the 16th April 1927; G. O. no. 857-E. R., dated the 14th September, 1929: G. O. no. 3809-E., dated the 10th December 1936; G. O. no. 1829-E., dated the 4th August, 1945.)819. Nature of the Examination.
- The examination is conducted by a board of three persons nominated by the Director, viz., one Regional Deputy Director of Education, one Headmaster or Principal and one District Education Officer. They arrange among themselves to set, moderate and mark the papers and moderate the results. They are entitled to a fee of Rs. 50 each for this work. There are two papers, one on the relevant sections of the Education Code and/on educational statistics and the other on the relevant sections of such other rules and manuals as an inspecting officer or head teacher or head cleric is likely to require. All candidates are permitted to consult the relevant manuals (including the Education Code) and the questions will be so devised as to test their power of applying the rules intelligently rather than their faculty for memorizing. Pass marks are half of the maximum in each case. A candidate who has appeared at the examination but has failed in one paper is required, when next he sits for the examination, to take only that paper in which he has failed and not both papers. If he passes in that paper he is held to have passed the examination. Candidates are entitled to travelling allowance for their journey to the examination under rule 110 of the Bihar Travelling Allowance Rules.(G. O. no., 3484-E., dated the 14th May, 1930.)Note. - Rules regarding Departmental Examination of Headmasters of non-Government High/Higher Secondary Schools have been laid down in Section VI of Chapter IV of this Code.820. Exemptions.
- Government have power to exempt from the examination any officer appointed direct, or promoted, to the Bihar Educational Service. Similar power is exercised by the Director in the case of officers promoted to the upper division of the Subordinate Educational Service and by the promoting authority in the case of officers promoted to class I of the ministerial service.821. Date of the Examination and other rules.
- The examination is held in or about September, in each year. Officers directly subordinate to the Director should submit a statement not later than May 31st of each year showing the names of the officers required to appear at the examination and those of any other officers who wish to appear at it voluntarily. The fact that an officer has or has not passed the examination, when he should have done so, will be considered when promotions are made.(D. P. I's letter no. 5176, dated the 7th June 1934.)Note. - The object of the examiner should be to set questions which will show whether the examinees are familiar with the rules to which they are likely to refer, e.g., the rules regarding appointment, leave, pensions, joining time, travelling allowance and counter signature of bills, and in the case of headmasters regarding admissions, punishment etc., and in the case of inspecting officers regarding grants-in-aid, relations with local bodies and so on. Questions may be set on those parts of the Education Code, the Civil Service Regulations, the Bihar Treasury Code, the Bihar Service Code, the Bihar Pension Rules, the Bihar Travelling Allowance Rules, the Treasury Manual and the Budget Manual which are relevant to work of the examinee.(D. P. I,'s letter no. 5462. dated the 9th June 1926 and no. 1499, dated the 10th May 1927.)822. Passing examination in Tribal language.
- (i) A non-aboriginal Sub-Inspector appointed or posted in the district of the Santhal Parganas must pass an examination either in the Santhali or Pahariya and if posted or appointed in the Chotanagpur Division must pass an examination in Ho, Mundari or Oraon, which is conducted under the control of the Commissioners of the Bhagalpur and Chota Nagpur Divisions by the lower standard, within two years of the appointment or posting.823. The acceptance or gifts or rewards by educational officers.
- Educational Officers in common with other officers in Government service are bound by the following rules:-824. The acceptance of private tuition by educational Officers.
- Educational officers of Government are not permitted to undertake private tuition,Note. - This rule also applies equally to teachers of non-Government High Schools.(G. O. no. 1913-E., dated the 16th March 1950.)825. Grant of Testimonials by teachers.
- In no Government institutions, whether college or school, may, any member of the staff other than the head of the institution, grant a testimonial to any other member of the staff or to any ex-member of the staff with regard to his or her professional qualifications nor will the head of the institution grant such a testimonial to any such person who remains in the service of Government.(D. P. I.'s circular no. 38-E., dated the 1st June 1915.)826. Grant of Testimonials by Inspecting Officers.
- No member of the educational inspecting staff other than a Regional Deputy Director of Education may grant a testimonial to any other member of the inspecting or scholastic staff or to any ex-member of the staff with regard to his or her professional qualifications; nor will the Regional Deputy Director of Education grant such a testimonial to any such person who remains in the service of Government.(D. P. I.'s circular no. 38-E., dated the 1st June 1915.)827. Procedure for dealing with anonymous and pseudonymous petitions.
- In order to avoid needless harassment to honest officers, Government have now decided that as a general rule anonymous or pseudonymous petitions should be destroyed on receipt, and that exceptions to this rule should be very few.In a few cases it may be desirable to let the officer concerned know about the specific allegations made in a petition, in order that he may, if he wishes to do so, clarify the facts or correct some genuine mistakes, or that he may be of help in tracking a malicious persecutor hiding in anonymity. In such cases the petition, or the contents of it should be sent to the officer complained against, but without demanding any explanation from him. The decision to send such a petition or its contents to the officer complained against should be made with the approval of Government in the Department concerned.Sometimes the reading of a petition may suggest that the allegations are genuine and that anonymity has been taken because of fear and no other reason. In such cases, enquiries may be made with the approval of Government in the Department concerned if the allegations are of grave nature and are sufficiently specific. Whether the enquiry should proceed after first obtaining the officer's explanation, or whether secret enquiries should be started without his knowledge, would depend on the nature of the allegations.[G. O. (Apptt.) no. III/1-2021/58A-10251, dated the 26th August 1958.]828. Departmental punishment.
829. Proceedings.
830. Preparation of the record.
- The record is to be prepared as the case is gone into; it is not to be written by a clerk after the case has been decided.(Board's Rules, Article 167 (c).)831. Free copy of orders.
- When any orders of punishment have been passed, the officer punished shall be entitled to receive a copy of the order of punishment free of cost, and shall also be allowed to take a copy of the rest of the record, paying for the copy at the usual copy rates, or providing his own paper and copyist.(Board's Rules, Article 167 (c).)832. Orders to be based on the facts in the record.
- In order that copies of whole of proceedings may without objection be supplied to officers punished the authority conducting such proceedings must base his findings and orders upon facts and inferences appearing in or deduced from the record, and should not refer to confidential papers which cannot be embodied in the record.(Board's Rules, Article 167 (d).)833. Cases in which proceedings are not necessary.
- The above rules do not apply :-834. Difference between dismissal and removal or discharge.
- There is a broad distinction between "removal" or "discharge" and "dismissal". "Removal or re-employment, but the effect of an order for dismissed officer from being employed again in public service of Government. "Removal" should be the penalty in such cases as unfitness for the duties of an office where it is not thought necessary to bar future re-employment under Government. The sanction of the State Government is required for the re-employment of a person who has been dismissed. Precaution should be taken that will prevent the inadvertent re-employment of such a person.(Board's Rules, Article 168.)835. Notification of dismissal.
- The dismissal of public servants should be notified in the Bihar Gazette only in the following cases, viz., (1) when it is necessary to notify the public of the removal from service of an officer, whether because his appointment was previously gazetted, or from any other cause, and (2) when it is specially desired to exclude from re-employment in the service of Government and public servant who has been dismissed for a heinous offence such as fraud or falsification of accounts.(Board's Rules, Appendix I.)836. Reason for dismissal only to be notified in certain cases.
- The reason for the dismissal of a public officer should not be stated in the notification regarding his dismissal, even in cases in which a conviction has been obtained in a criminal court. It will be sufficient to announce in the case of any person whose dismissal is notified in accordance with the principal laid down in the preceding article that Government have dispensed with his services, except in those cases in which the cause of dismissal constitutes a disqualification under the terms of the law regulating the tenure of a particular appointment, and it is for this reason necessary to couple with the announcement of the dismissal a statement of the grounds upon which it has been ordered.(Board's Rules, Appendix I.)837. Rules regarding the presentation of appeals by members of Subordinate Services.
- The following rules have been made by Government to regulate the discipline and right of appeal of members of Subordinate Services in Bihar with effect from 1st July 1935 :-838. Points to be dealt with in disposing of an Appeal.
- An appellate authority should ordinarily deal with those points only that are raised or pressed in the appeal.(Board's Rules, Article 173.)839. Reasons for not instituting Criminal Prosecution should be recorded.
- Cases occasionally occur in which it is considered inexpedient to undertake the prosecution of Government servants who are dismissed on account of offences for which they are liable to be criminally prosecuted. In such cases, the reasons which render it inexpedient to undertake a criminal prosecution should be recorded at the time the order of dismissal is passed. When there is no objection to such a course, the reasons should be included in the order of dismissal of which the dismissed servant receives a copy; but in every case a copy of the recorded reasons for not instituting a prosecution, when the offender was liable to one, should be forwarded with any report that may afterwards be made on the case to Government.(Board's Rules, Article 175.)840. Submission of memorials, representation, etc., to higher Authority.
- A Government servant should, in the first instance, address his immediate superior for redress of grievances. If the immediate superior unduly delays passing orders on the petition, the Government servant may address a petition to the next higher authority, but this petition should be submitted through the proper channel, i.e., through the immediate superior officer. In such a case, the Government servant may submit an advance copy of his petition to the higher authority, but the higher authority will take no action on the advance copy (except if he deems fit) to call for the papers from the lower authority. A decision will be taken by the higher authority only after receiving the papers through the proper channel.(Government (Apptt.) no. II/R1-2017/57-A-A-3213, dated the 21st March, 1957.)841. Entry of "Warning" or a "Reprimand" in character roll.
- Entry in the character roll a "Warning" or a "reprimand" without going through the procedure for recording a "censure" is to act unfairly towards the officer because the effect of such a "Warning" entered in the character-roll is hardly different from the effect of "censure". No entry of a "Warning" should be made in the character-roll of a Government servant and that a warning may only be communicated orally or in writing as deemed necessary.(G. O. (Apptt.) no. 15566, dated the 3rd December, 1959)842. Confidential reports on officers drawing Rs. 142 or more.
- All officer immediately subordinate to the Director are requested to submit to him, as soon as possible after the 1st of April each year, confidential reports in the prescribed form on those of their subordinates who draw a pay of Rs. 142 or more. District Education Officers who are not immediately subordinate to the Director should submit reports in triplicate to the Regional Deputy Director of Education, who will retain two copies and pass on the other with his remarks.(D.P.I.'s circular no. 128, dated the 31st August, 1905, and letter no. 14768 dated the 15th November, 1929, and D. P. I,'s letter no. 11613, dated 27th April, 1953.)Note. - As soon as an officer in the lower division of the subordinate educational service reaches the pay of Rs. 142, copies of all his confidential reports since he entered Government service should be sent to the Director. Thereafter, annual confidential report should be regularly sent.(D.P.I's letter no. 14768, dated the 15th November, 1929 and D.P.I's letter no. 11613, dated 27th April, 1953.)843. Confidential reports on officers drawing less than Rs. 142.
- Reports on officers drawing less than Rs. 142 should also be submitted by the Sub-divisional Education Officer and Headmaster/Principals to the District Education Officer in duplicate for transmission, to the Regional Deputy Director of Education. The confidential report on sub-inspectors should be submitted to the Regional Deputy Director of Education in the manner indicated in section 1(C) of Chapter II of this Code.(D. P. I.'s letter no. 11613, dated 27th April, 1953.)(D. P. I.'s letter no. 8670, dated the 24th August, 1942.)844. Procedure for maintenance of character-rolls of Social Education Organisers.
- The character-roll of Social Education Organisers should be initiated by the Block Development Officer who sends up his remarks to the Sub-divisional Officer for per&sal and remarks, if any. The Sub-divisional Officer will send the character-rolls to the District Social Education Organiser who will after recording his own remarks, send the same to the District Education Officer. The original character-rolls should be maintained by the District Education Officer.(G. O. no. 1799, dated the 30th April, 1959.)845. Nature of confidential reports.
- In making confidential reports officers should avoid vague language, and the favourable or unfavourable characteristic note should be specified. Mention should be made of any form of activity outside his ordinary duties in which an officer has made himself useful. In the case of a seriously adverse report it is desirable to illustrate briefly the traits unfavourably reported on. Capability for the higher work of the Department, combined with diligence, thoroughness and honesty are the guiding principles on which alone an officer should be recommended for special promotion.(D. P. I.'s circular no. 59, dated the 2nd May, 1905; and letter no. 52-G, dated the 23rd May, 1935; R. and O. page 575-79.)846. Communication of adverse reports.
- A subordinate officer is not entitled to see the confidential report on his work made by his superior but if the report is unfavourable, it must be communicated to the officer concerned, except in those cases in which the defect cannot be cured and comment on it would only cause him distress.An officer making a representation against adverse remarks must do so within six months of the communication of the remarks to him. Ordinarily, representations submitted to the immediate superior authority after a lapse of six months should be summarily rejected by the authority competent to pass final orders on such representations. In really exceptional cases, however, the time-limit may be relaxed at the discretion of the said competent authority. At the time of communicating adverse remarks to the officer concerned, the communicating authority should carefully enter in his record acknowledgement from the officer concerned.(R. and O. page 579; G. O. no. 3969-E., dated the 20th November, 1925 and G. O. no. 5064, dated the 14th April, 1959.)847. Entries in Service Books.
- The making of entries consisting of personal certificates of character in Service Books is irregular unless the Director orders those to be made.848. Recording of annual confidential report on Gazetted Officers.
849. Communication of Adverse remarks.
850. Maintenance of Character Rolls.
851. General Instruction.
852. Procedure for recording confidential remarks on officers of the Education Department.
-| Designation of officers reported upon. | Reporting authorities. | Remarks |
| Regional Deputy Director of Education; Director of K. P. J.Research Institute, Patna. | Director of Public Instruction, Bihar, | Education Department will submit forms for annual remarks tothe Director of Public Instruction to record his remarks by the1st April, each year. |
| Director of Mithila Institute, Darbhanga. Director of R. B.Parishad, Patna. | ||
| Director of the Institute of Post-Graduate Studies and Arabic& Persian, Patna. | ||
| Director of Rural Institute, Birauli. | ||
| Director, Nava Nalanda Manavihar, Nalanda. | ||
| Director of A N. Sinha Institute, Patna. | ||
| Director of Vaishali Institute, Muzaffarpur. | Director of Public Instruction, Bihar. | Education Department will submit forms for annual remarks toDirector of Public Instruction to record his remarks by the 1stApril each year. Director of Public Instruction will record hisremarks and forward the report in duplicate to Government forexamination by the 1st July, of each year. |
| Superintendent, Hazaribagh Reformatory School, Principals ofall Government Colleges under the control of Director of PublicInstruction and that of the Madrasa Islamia Shamshul Huda, Patna | ||
| Principal of the Patna School of Arts. | ||
| Superintendent of Libraries, Bihar, Secretary, BasicEducation Board, Patna. | ||
| Educational Literature Officer, Bihar. | ||
| Principal, Residential School, Netarhat. | ||
| District Education officer. | Regional Deputy Director concerned. Director of PublicInstruction. | The Regional Deputy Director of Education concerned duplicateto the Director of Public Instruction not later than the 15thMay each year. After recording his remarks, if any, the Directorof Public Instruction should forward the report to Governmentfor examination by the 1st July of each year. |
| District Inspectress of Schools and Lady Principals ofGovernment High Schools, Lady Superintendent, Headmistress ofWomen's Training Class. | Inspectress of Schools, Deputy Director of Education (Girls),Director of Public Instruction. | The Inspectress of Schools should send her remarks induplicate to the Deputy Directress of Education (Girls) notlater than the 15th May each year. After recording her remarks,if any, the Deputy Directress (Girls should for ward the reportto the Director of Public Instruction, the D.P.I, after enteringhis remarks should forward the report to Government forexamination by 1st July of each year. |
| Subdivisonal Education Officer, Principal of Sarvodaya HighSchools, Principal of Senior Training Schools, Headmaster ofZila Schools and Principals of Multipurpose Higher SecondarySchools. | District Education Officer, Regional Deputy Director ofEducation, Director of Public Instruction. | District Education Officer should send his remarks to theRegional Deputy Director of Education not later than the 15thApril each year. After recording his remarks, the RegionalDeputy Director of Education should forward the report to theDirector of Public Instruction not later than the 15th May eachyear. The Director of Public Instruction after entering hisremarks should forward the report to Government for examinationby the 1st July of each year. |
| All gazetted teachers, Assistant professors and teachersworking in Government colleges, schools and institutions. | Head of the School/ College/ Institution, Director PublicInstruction. | Head of the Schools, College and Institute should send theirremarks to Public Director of Instruction not later than 15thMay of each year. After recording his remarks the Director ofPublic Instruction should forward the report to Government forexamination by the 1st July of each year. |
853. Transfer.
- Proposals for the transfer of teachers should be made so as to reach the controlling officer before the end of September, and all transfers, except such as are urgent or are rendered necessary by the exigencies of the Service, should be made during the Christmas holidays before the commencement of the new school session.(R. and O. page 154.)854. Transfers during vacations.
- The following rules regarding joining time apply to officers transferred during vacations :-855. Time allowed for relief of non-gazetted officers.
- In the absence of any definite instructions to the contrary, a non-gazetted officer under orders of transfer should be relieved of his duties by the immediate superior within fourteen days ' of the date of intimation, which will be conveyed by notification in the Bihar Gazette, in the case of officers in the upper division of the Subordinate Educational Service and by letter in other cases. If in any case it is necessary to exceed the above limit, intimation of the fact should be given to the Controlling Officer and the probable date on which the officer under orders of transfer will be relieved should be stated.Note. - If an officer is found wilfully evading to carry out the orders, he would be suspended if necessary or otherwise suitably dealt with.(R. and O. page 154, G. O, no. 4995-E, dated the 24th June, 1949.)856. Time allowed for relief of Gazetted Officers.
- Whenever a gazetted officer is transferred without having to wait to be relieved he is expected to start within fourteen days of the date of intimation, whether by letter or by notification in the Bihar Gazette, including the days of preparation allowed under rule 225 of the Bihar Service Code. When he has to be relieved before he can move, he should be able to leave his station within a week of the date of relief, since he will usually have had ample time to wind up his work while awaiting the arrival of his successor. If in any case it is necessary that these limits should be exceeded, immediate intimation of the fact should be given to the Director through the usual channel, and the probable date of departure should be stated. If no such intimation is received, it will be assumed that the above orders have been carried out.Note. - If an officer is found wilfully evading to carry out the orders, he would be suspended if necessary or otherwise suitably dealt with.(G. O. no. 4995-E., dated the 24th June, 1949).857. Treatment of period of handing over and taking over charge as duty in cases in which several scattered works of stores and cash have to be inspected before completing transfer of charge.
- The question as to how (i) the period of taking over charge of a new post by a relieving officer is to be treated and (ii) the pay and allowances for such period should be regulated in cases where the charge transferred consists of several stores and/or scattered works and cash which the relieving and the relieved Government servants are required to inspect together before the transfer of charge is completed. It has been decided that the relieving Government servant should be treated as on 'duty' if the period sent in carrying out these inspections, is not considered excessive by the Head of the Department. While so taking over relieving officer will draw:-858. Rules for Inspecting Officers.
- All inspecting officers of the Department specially, Regional Deputy Director of Education, Inspectress of Schools District Education Officers, Sub-divisional Education Officer, District Superintendents of Education and the District Inspectresses of Schools while making over charge of their offices to their successors on the eve of their transfer from one station to another or at the time of their superannuation should make it a point to prepare a complete list of all important and complicated administrative matters relating to schools or offices under their control and fully discuss these with the relieving officers furnishing detailed background in respect of every important item. They should also submit a copy of the same to the Director for information.(D. P. I.'s letter no. 27129, dated the 29th August, 1953.)859. Application for posts in another Government Office or Department.
- The following is the text of (i) the Bihar Government Servants' Application for Posts Rules 1956 and (ii) The Bihar Government Servants, (Application for Private Employment) Rules, 1956.The Bihar Government Servants' Applications for Posts Rules, 1956. - (1) These Rules may be called the Bihar Government Servants, Applications for Posts Rules, 1956.860. The Bihar Government Servants' (Applications for Private Employment) Rules, 1956.
861. Conditions upon which a Government Officer may transfer his services to another Government Office or Department.
- The following conditions regulate the transfer of an officer in the Department to a different Government office or Department :-862. Cases in which travelling allowance is not admissible.
- An officer may not draw travelling allowance on transfer unless he is transferred for the public convenience and is entitled to pay during the period occupied by the journey. A transfer at his own request or in consequence of misconduct should not be treated as transfer for the public convenience unless the authority sanctioning the transfer, for special reasons which should be recorded otherwise directed.(Bihar Travelling Allowance Rules.)863. Applications for leave.
- Officers are required to submit their applications for leave, other than casual leave, leave on urgent private affairs or leave on account of sudden illness; in the prescribed form to their controlling officer at least three months before the date on which the leave is required. If the sanction of the Director or of Government is necessary, the controlling officer must transmit the application to the Director with his recommendation without any avoidable delay. Unless specially otherwise, ordered leave must begin within 35 days of the date on which it is granted.(D. P. I.'s. Circular no. 98, dated the 1st August 1911; S. R. 199.)Note. - If an officer under orders of transfer requires leave (other than casual leave) he must apply to the authority ordering the transfer.864. Combination of holidays with leave.
- The grant of concessions under rule 159 of the Bihar Service Code, will not be notified in the Bihar Gazette, but intimation of the concession having been granted or refused will be given to the Accountant-General.865. Special holidays.
- In addition to the ordinary gazetted holidays on which Government offices are closed, certain days are annually notified by Government as days on which Muhammedan officers may be allowed to absent themselves from Government offices. These additional holidays may also be observed as school holidays, provided that the total permissible number of school holidays is not exceeded. When possible, Brahmo officers should be allowed to absent themselves from their duties on the eleventh day of Magh in each year.(D.P.I.'s letter no 2669, dated the 9th March, 1915, Board's Rules, Article 253.)866. Cancellation of unexpired leave.
- The following are the rules regarding the cancellation of the unexpired portion of the leave of a non-gazetted officer who has been granted leave by the Director and who returns to duty before the expiry of his leave :-867. Casual leave and leave during gazetted holidays.
- The following rules regarding casual leave or leave of absence during gazetted holidays and vacations are applicable to all officers of the Department:-868. Proposal for extension or re-employment beyond the age of 55.
- The sort of reasons which should be regarded as adequate for the grant of extension of service or re-employment of retiring officers after he has attained the age of 55 would be:-869. The budgets of officers immediately subordinate to the Secretary to Government, Education Department or the Director.
- Every officer immediately subordinate to the Secretary or the Director is required to submit his budget to the Secretary or the Director not later than July the 31st of the year preceding that for which the budget is framed. These budgets should include provision for all charges which it will be necessary for Government to meet during the year for which the budget is framed. The District Education Officers' budgets should include provision for the requirements of the district inspecting staff, and should be accompanied by the detailed estimates prepared by the Headmaster/Principals of Government High/Higher Secondary and Multipurpose Schools (including Sarvodaya High Schools), the Teachers' Training Schools and Government Senior and Junior Basic Schools. These should be submitted to the Regional Deputy Director of Education who, after due checking, will transmit the same to the Director.870. Fixed and fluctuating charges.
- For the purpose of the budget all charges may be divided into two heads, viz., (i) those of which the amount can be determined exactly and (ii) those in connection with which it is necessary to form an approximate estimate of the sum required. The former includes such charges as salaries, fixed contingent grants and sanctioned recurring grants-in-aid and the latter includes such items as petty construction and repairs, non-recurring grants for buildings and other charges which fluctuate from year to year.871. Nature of explanation necessary.
- In connection with charges of the first kind any variations between the new budget and that for the preceding year need be supported only by a reference to the order sanctioning the change or by a note to the effect that an officer has been promoted or become entitled to an increment or by such other brief explanations as may be required. For variation in items of fluctuating expenditure a more elaborate explanation is necessary, for in this case it will generally not be possible to refer to any orders requiring increased expenditure. If no good grounds are shown for an increase, no such increase will be passed by the Director.872. Methods of calculating the sum required for fixed charges.
- For fixed charges, such as pay of establishment, the detailed estimate should show the full amount of the pay, including increments, which is likely to be drawn by men during the year. Provision for those who are on deputation or absent in other ways and unlikely to return to the strength within the period of the budget should be excluded. A lump deduction will be made by the Director where experience shows that a saving may be anticipated for other reasons.(Budget Manual Rule 55.)873. Method of preparing the Departmental Budgets.
- On receipt of budget from subordinate officers the Director will cause them to be agglomerated, after each item has been checked, as far as possible in his office. He will add his estimate of the expenditure under the head Direction and enter the totals of the different fluctuating charges at the amounts which he considers necessary. No new scheme or establishment will be provided for in the budget.(Budget Manual Rules 66 and 67.)874. How the departmental Budget is submitted.
- When the budget has been thus prepared, one copy will be submitted to Government in the Finance Department, and two to the Accountant-General not later than October the 1st. All variations from the budget of the preceding year should be explained as briefly as possible in each copy.(Rules of Budget Manual, and G. O. no. 4688-F., dated the 4th June, 1938.)875. Details of new schemes.
- A list of all new schemes proposed for inclusion in the budget should be prepared. The list will supply the following informations :-876. Rules for the guidance of officers, receiving, handling or spending public funds.
- Detailed instructions for receiving, handling, spending and accounting of public moneys have been laid down in Rules 85, 86, 117 to 120, 144, 299 to 304, 305, 312 to 324, 474 and 475 of the Bihar Treasury Code, Volume I, which should be invariably observed by the Drawing and Disbursing Officers in order to eliminate cases of defalcations, misappopriations, embezzlements, etc. A copy of the instructions in the aforesaid rules should be handed over to each officer receiving, handling or spending public moneys, at the time-of taking over charge of any post in which such work is involved and it would be kept by him in his personal custody. The officer, receiving the memorandum should furnish a certificate in the following form :-"Certified that I, ____________________, on assuming charge of the office of____________________________________have received a copy of the printed instructions for the guidance of officers, receiving, handling or spending public funds.SignatureDesignation......Note. - The certificate should be sent to the Controlling Officer who should retain it in a Guard File.(G. O. no. 2513-F., dated the 24th March, 1960.)877. Arrangement for holding current charge of the duties of a post by another officer during the absence of the regular incumbent of the post.
- It has been decided that an order appointing an officer to hold the current charge of the duties of a post, should in the absence of any specific direction to the contrary, be deemed to clothe the officer with all the powers vested in the full-fledged incumbent of that post, even though he may not get full pay of the post. Such officer should not, however, modify or overrule the orders of the regular incumbent of the post except in an emergency, without obtaining the orders of the next higher authority. Where the appointment to hold current duties of a post involves the exercise of statutory or such other powers conferred on the holders of the post, the appointment should also be notified in the Gazette.(G. O. no. 30485-E., dated the 21st December, 1960.)878. Cash Book.
- A. General Cash Book register should be maintained in all offices in T. C. Form no. 6 of the Bihar Treasury Code, Volume II.(D. P. I.'s letter no. 8134, dated the 5th August, 1942.)879. Countersignature of Bills.
- The rules relating to the countersignature of the bills of the Department will be found in Appendix of the Bihar Treasury Code, Volume II. Countersignature is not necessary in the case of bills for house-rent and municipal taxes, or for special contingent charges incurred under the specific sanction which is intimated to the Accountant-General for the purpose of audit.880. Permanent Advances.
- In order to meet emergent expenditure certain officers of the Department are allowed to draw from the treasury permanent advances, for which they will be personally responsible, but from which they may allot at their discretion, advances to their subordinates. The amount which may be thus drawn are determined from time to time by the Secretary to Government in the Education Department in consultation with the Accountant-General.(Bihar Treasury Code, Volume I, Rule 297.)881. Forwarding of salaries, etc., to officers in the mufassil.
- The salary and travelling allowance bills of Sub-Inspectors, and the bills of Government Middle Schools, Basic Schools and Teachers' Training Schools situated at a distance of more than six miles from the treasury are remitted by postal money order. The District Education Officer, the Sub-divisional Education Officer (or the District Inspectress in the case of Girls' Schools) presents the bills, together with the money order forms duly filled up, at the treasury, with the amount of the order and the commission thereon have been credited to the Post Office in the Treasury accounts. The Postmaster then remits the money.Notes. - (1) The District Education Officer, Sub-divisional Education Officer or District Inspectress pays the money order commission from his or her allotment for contract contingencies.(Bihar Treasury Code, Volume I, Rule 202.)882. Forwarding of grants to schools in the mufassil.
- Schools aided by Government, which are situated at a distance of more than six miles from a treasury, are allowed the option of receiving the payment of grant-in-aid bills by postal money order. The authority passing the bills should send it with a money order form, duly filled up, to the treasury which will pass it on to the Post Office. The money order commission is deducted from the bill and the balance only is remitted.[G. O. no. 745-E., dated the 28th May 1917; Bihar Treasury Code, Volume, I, Rule 243 (2).]883. Forwarding of sums realised from fees, etc., in the mufassil.
- The sums realised on account of fees or other receipts in Government Middle Schools and situated at a distance of more than six miles from a treasury, may be remitted by postal money order, charges on account of money order commission being met from the contingent allotments of the schools concerned.(G. O. no. 204-D., dated the 2nd February, 1915.)884. Purchase of books, paper, etc.
- Regional Deputy Director of Education, District Education Officers, District Inspectresses, Headmasters/Principals of High/Higher Secondary Schools and Principals of Government Professional Colleges are authorized, subject to the limits of budget provision, to sanction the purchase of books, but with the exception noted in Article 884, the Director alone can sanction the purchase of papers and periodicals.(Annexure A to Appendix 5 of the Bihar Financial Rules, Volume I.)Note. - Officers who are authorised to draw money against contract grants are also empowered to incur expenditure on such books, periodicals and newspapers as are necessary for the discharge of their official duties within the limits of their contract grants.885. Purchase of papers for common rooms.
- Principals of Government Professional Colleges and Headmasters/Principals of Government High/Higher Secondary Schools are authorised to incur expenditure on the purchase of papers and periodicals out of the fixed allotments for the Common Rooms under their control provided that the total expenditure on this item does not exceed the allotment sanctioned for the Common Rooms. Every bill presented to a treasury on this account should contain a certificate by the Drawing Officer to the effect that the expenditure is within the sanctioned allotment.(G. O. no. 1794-E., dated the 1st May, 1925.)886. Supply of Liveries.
- Liveries may be supplied every year at a cost not exceeding Rs. 12 each to the personal orderlies of the Principals of Government Professional Colleges; of Regional Deputy Director of Education; District Education Officer, Sub-divisional Education Officer, Inspectress of Schools, District Inspectress of Schools, and the District Superintendent of Education; of the Lady Principals of all Government Girls' High and Higher Secondary Schools, of the Assistant Director of Education (Sanskrit) and (Islamic Education); of the Registrar of Examinations; of the Headmasters/Principals of Government High/Higher Secondary Schools. They may be supplied every year at a cost not exceeding Rs. 8 each to the peons of the Deputy Inspectors; of the Deputy Inspectress; of the Deputy Superintendent of Education; of the Assistant Superintendent of Sanskrit Studies; of the Principal of the Madrasa Islamia Shamsul Huda. The charge should be treated as an item of regular contingencies and should not be debited to the allotment for contract contingencies. The purchase of umbrellas and blankets for menials is inadmissible.Note. - Order for the supply of liveries should be placed with the Buxar Central Jail according to the instructions issued from time to time by the State Government.(G. O. no. 3528-E., dated the 23rd November 1921; A. G. circular no. T. M. 6-2-171, dated the 16th January 1922; G. O. no. 2072-F. Ft., dated the 18th September 1923; G. O. no. 875-E., dated the 27th December 1926; G. O. no. 302-F., dated the 7th January 1927; G. O. no. 3139-E., dated the 16th May 1927; G. O. no. 1891-F. Ft., dated the 7th September 1929; G. O. no. 16184-F., dated the 11th December 1929; and G. O. no. 83-F. Ft. dated the 30th April 1935 and G. O. no. 656-E., dated the 24th January, 1956.)887. Athletic Clubs.
- The Principal or Headmaster of every Government Professional College or High/Higher Secondary School should estimate the amount likely to be raised during the current year from subscriptions among the students or from private sources for the maintenance of the athletic club attached to it, and should provide for a Government contribution of an equal amount in the budget estimates for or the succeeding year. At the beginning of the financial year, if the funds at the disposal of the Department are sufficient, each institution will receive a contribution in aid of the athletic club equal to the budget provision or the actual receipts from private sources in the preceding year, whichever is the smaller sum.(G. O. no. 2572, dated the 27th July, 1910.)888. Money not be drawn till required.
- No money should be withdrawn from the treasury unless it is required for immediate payment, it is not permissible to draw advances from the treasury either for the prosecution of works, the completion of which is likely to take a considerable time, or to prevent the lapse of appropriations.[Budget Manual Rule 107 (3)]889. Travelling allowance of Sub-Inspectors.
- The travelling allowance ordinarily admissible to a Sub-Inspector is a permanent travelling allowance of Rs. 31.25 a month.(G. O. no. 6288, dated the 15th April, 1948.)Notes. - (i) Sub-Inspectors of Schools in the upper division of the Subordinate Educational Service, who draw pay exceeding Rs. 150 a month, draw a permanent travelling allowance of Rs. 28.12 per month.(Government notification no. 2285-F., dated the 23rd February 1932.)890. Arrear Bills.
- Charges on account of travelling allowance should be billed for during the month in which they are incurred or during the following month. Arrear travelling allowance bills should be sternly discouraged and before they are admitted the bill for the month concerned should be examined to see whether the claim has been noted as outstanding. If the claim is admitted, the number of the bill in which the arrear charge is being drawn should be noted thereon and it should be certified on the office copy of the arrear bill that the charge was (or was not) shown as outstanding in the bill for the month concerned and has not since been drawn.(Government letter no. 4558-E.R., dated the 20th October, 1924; letter no. 297-F.R., dated the 18th April, 1934 and tetter no. 228-F.R., dated the 3rd June, 1941.)891. Responsibility for money.
- The Principal or Headmaster, as the case may be, is responsible for all Government or other money which may pass through his hand.(B. G. memo. no. 4597-F., dated the 10th August, 1899; R and O. page 501; G O. no. 248-E. R., dated the 14th June, 1929.)892. Checking of accounts.
- All accounts, etc., in High/Higher Secondary and Multi-purpose Schools (including Sarvodaya High Schools) and Training Schools should be checked by Inspecting Officers during their visits. Every Inspecting Officer should check, either personally or through the agency of his Bill Clerk acting under his instructions, the receipts of all Government instructions under his control once a year, and should satisfy himself that all sums which should have been paid into the treasury have been so paid.(R. & O. page 499, paragraph 1; D. P. I.'s circular no. 131, dated the 22nd July, 1908; and letter no. 4220, dated the 22nd April, 1927.)893. Disbursing of Salaries.
- As a rule all sums drawn on establishment bills for the payment of salaries should be disbursed on the same day and the payee's receipt should be taken on an acquittance roll, if, however, the payee does not present himself on that day, the disbursing officer should be guided by rule 289 of the Bihar Treasury Code, Volume I.894. Contingent charges.
- A separate register will be maintained for contingent charges as prescribed in rule 293 of the Bihar Treasury Code, Volume I. The expenditure noted therein will be met from the permanent advance, vide article 880 of this Code. This permanent advance should be recouped from time to time in the manner laid down in rule 297 of the Bihar Treasury Code, Volume I.(R. & O. page 502, paragraph 5.)895. Drawing of scholarships, where the bills are not countersigned.
- All Junior and Special Scholarships, the bills for which are not countersigned by 1 Regional Deputy Director of Education, District Education Officer and the Inspectress of Schools should be drawn on establishment bill forms, which should be supported by the following certificates :-| 3 on Rs. 20 each | … Rs. 60 {for two years from 1 st June 1959 to 31stMay 1960). |
| 2 on Rs. 15 each | … Rs. 30 (for one year from 1st July 1959 to 30th June1960). |
896. Drawing of scholarships, when the bills are countersigned.
- The bills for Middle, Upper Primary, Lower Primary and other scholarships and stipends which are countersigned by District Education Officer, Inspectress of Schools, District Inspectress of Schools and the Sub-divisional Education Officer should be drawn in nominal detail.(Bihar Treasury Code, Volume I, Rules 202 and 243; A. G. 's circular no. 99 dated the 18th September 1941.)897. Disbursement of Scholarships.
- Amounts drawn for the payment of scholarships should be disbursed in the same way as salaries.(Bihar Treasury Code, Volume I, Rule 289.)898. Payment of scholarships to schools in the mufassil.
- Schools which are more than six miles distant from a treasury are allowed the option of receiving the payment of scholarship bills by postal money order. The money order commission is paid from the contingent grant of the District Education Officer, the Sub-divisional Education Officer, the Inspectress of Schools and the District Inspectress of Schools concerned.(G. O. no. 14-E. R, dated the 12th November, 1917.)899. Private scholarships.
- The sums received at Government High/Higher Secondary Schools as the proceeds of invested funds or as subscriptions are used for scholarships. Where there is an invested fund the Headmaster or the Principal and the District Magistrate are the joint administrators. The dividends, on the trust fund or, the subscriptions, as the case may be, are paid to the Headmaster or Principal and by him into the Post Office Savings Bank, from which he withdraws such sums as are from time to time required for the payment of scholarships.(G. O. no 2439-E., dated the 13th August, 1923.)900. Fees and fines to be credited to Government.
- All fees, fines, etc., should be credited daily to Government, the challans with which such amounts are remitted to the treasury describing fully the nature of the receipts. The challan must give both in words and in figures the amount to be deposited. Both original and duplicate must be signed by the Principal or Headmaster himself and the duplicate should be shown to him after it has been received back from the treasury. In the case of institutions which are situated at considerable distances from a treasury, collections should be made only on dates to be specified beforehand, and all money collected on such dates should be remitted on the same day to the treasury.(R. & O. page 502, para. 8; and A.G.'s letter no. T. M. 426-4337, dated the 1st April, 1926.)901. Exceptions in the case of certain fines.
- The following are exceptions to the rule contained in article 899 :-902. Fee-receipts to be made out in duplicate.
- At a Government High/Higher Secondary/Multipurpose Schools including (Sarvodaya High School the fee receipts must be made out by the office and pen-carbon copies must be kept.(G. O. no. 248-E. R., dated the 14th June, 1929.)903. Verification of deposits.
- The head of every educational institutions which deposits money into the treasury should send to the treasury officer at the end of each month a statement showing the sums deposited into the treasury during that month. The treasury officer will check and return the statement.(A. G.'s letter no. T. M. 426-4337, dated the 1st April, 1926.)904. Realisation of fees for extra-curricular activities in Government Educational Institutions and accounting thereof.
- All fees realised from students in Government Educational Institutions for extra-curricular activities, e.g., riding, boating, clothing, etc., should come into the public accounts of Government. The accounting procedure, as applicable to personal ledger accounts, may be followed in respect of such deposits of the educational institutions and the head of the institutions may be allowed to withdraw from treasury by means of cheque. The treasury will, however, maintain a separate deposit account for each institution comprising deposits of all kinds of fees realised in that institution and submit plus and minus memo, of such deposits to the Central Audit. The audit office will agree the balance with the Administrator of the Deposit Account. The Deposit Account will be of the nature of a banking account as obtaining for Deposits of Local Funds. Detailed accounts will be maintained by the head of the institution which will be subject to local audit by the Accountant-General. A new minor head "Deposits of Educational Institutions" should be opened under "Receipts" and "Outgoing" subordinate to the major head "Civil Deposits" in section "S-Deposit and Advances-Part II-Deposits not bearing interest-Other Deposit Accounts-Departmental and Judicial Deposits" in the accounts of the State Government for carrying out the transactions mentioned above.(G. O. no. 769, dated the 26th March, 1958.)905. Personal ledger accounts in the name of the head of the institutions.
- The heads of the institution where fees are realised for extra-curricular activities are required to furnish the following information through the Director of Public Instruction to the Accountant-General, Bihar, who will issue necessary instructions to the Treasury/Sub-Treasury Officers concerned for opening of Personal Ledger Accounts in their names.906. Library, laboratory and workshop deposits, etc.
- All deposits received from students, such as library, laboratory and workshop deposits, should be held in a deposit account at the treasury, personal ledger accounts being opened for the purpose by the heads of institutions as indicated in the preceding article. If any part of such money is forfeited to Government, it should immediately be withdrawn from such deposit account and credited to Government. In such a case no cash transaction needs take place, but the bill or cheque on which the amount is withdrawn from the deposit account should be paid by transfer to the credit of Government at the treasury. A note of these forfeitures should be kept in the fine register in red ink with the remarks that the amount has been paid by transfer to the credit of Government, but such amounts should not be included in the total to be entered in the cash book.(Ft. & O. page 502, para. 9.)907. Hostel caution money.
- The caution money realized at Government hostels should be deposited in personal ledger account of the head of the institution in the manner laid down in the preceding article.(D. P. I.'s letter no. 5236, dated the 23rd May, 1935.)908. Hostel receipts.
- Subject to the preceding article, in all cases where hostels are managed as Government institutions, the receipts should be credited to Government and the charges should be drawn from treasury like other educational charges.(R. & O. page 503, para. 10.)909. Subscriptions to students' club.
- Subscriptions to an athletic or other students' club should be deposited in the personal ledger account.(R. & O. page 503, para 11; and G. O. no. 164-E. R., dated the 3rd June, 1929.)910. Registers.
- The following registers are necessary for the proper keeping of accounts :-General Cash Book.This book should have as many columns As there are heads of collections, for which separate subsidiary registers are maintained. The daily totals from the subsidiary registers should be entered in the cash book. The totals of several columns should be remitted to the treasury for credit to Government, or to the deposit account, as the case may be. There should be no balance in the hands of the Principal or Headmaster, except the permanent advance and any undisbursed pay or scholarship money. Such amounts must in no case be included in the cash book and remitted to the treasury.(R. & O. page 503, para. 12.)Receipt Registers Subsidiary To The Cash Book.911. Records to be maintained in Government Educational Offices.
- The following registers must be maintained in educational offices besides the other relevant records prescribed from time to time :-| (i) | Attendance register of ministerial officers and peons. | |
| (ii) | Cash book | [Balance to be verified at the end of each month andcertificate to that effect recorded over the signature of thehead of the office, vide rule 86(iv) of Bihar Treasury Code,Voll.)] |
| (iii) | Contingent register | (To be maintained in Form no. 45, vide rule 309 of BiharTreasury Code.) |
| (iv) | Bill Book | (To be maintained in Form 223 of Schedule LIII.) |
| (v) | Register of sub-vouchers | (To be maintained in T. C. Form no. 35-A, vide rule 316 ofTreasury Code, Vol. I.) |
| (vi) | Register in the prescribed form showing contingent bills forwhich sub-vouchers have not been furnished to A.G., BiharGovernment no. 1097-E., dated the 2nd February, 1952. | (To be maintained in Form no. 209 of Schedule LIII.) |
| (vii) | Stock register | (Separate stock register of furniture for DistrictSuperintendent of Education only.) Physical verification to bedone, vide rule 147 of Financial Rule, Vol I. |
| (viii) | Log book. | |
| (ix) | Allotment register (General). | |
| (x) | Allotment register (Plan). | |
| (xi) | Bill Issue register. | |
| (xii) | Acquittance Roll register. | |
| (xiii) | Travelling Allowance Bill register. | |
| (xiv) | Order book. | |
| (xv) | Register of Service books. | |
| (xvi) | Register of forms. | |
| (xvii) | Catalogue of Library books and also Issue Book. | |
| (xviii) | Register showing pending cases of pension. | |
| (xix) | Register showing pending cases of audit reports. | |
| (xx) | Register showing the disposal of Council and Assemblyquestions. | |
| (xxi) | Register showing the disposal of proceeding cases againstGovernment servants. | |
| (xxii) | Register showing important pending papers (received fromhigher offices). | |
| (xxiii) | Register showing important pending papers (received fromsub-ordinate offices). | |
| (xxiv) | Register of security bonds for Government servants. | |
| (xxv) | Register showing the repair of cycles. | |
| (xxvi) | Register showing the history card of typewriters. | |
| (xxvii) | Guard file of important circulars. | |
| (xxviii) | Casual Leave register. | |
| (xxix) | Index register. | |
| (xxx) | Register of letters received. | |
| (xxxi) | Register of letters issued. | |
| (xxxii) | Register showing the appointments given to candidatesbelonging to Scheduled Castes and Backward tribes in differentcategories of service. | |
| (xxxiii) | List of Sub-Inspectors of Schools (Subdivision-wise andAnchal-wise showing old and new posts). | |
| (xxxiv) | List of registers maintained in the office. | |
| (xxxv) | Chart showing the periodical returns and reports due to higheroffices. |
912. Securities.
- Every officer through whose hands public money passes is required to furnish security, which should be as a rule be 10 per cent in excess of the maximum amount likely to be in his custody at one time. He must also furnish two sureties. The security of officers of 20 years' pensionable service or upwards may, however, be diminished by a sum calculated on their monthly pay, multiplied by 25, with the proviso that the security will in no case be diminished by more than one-half.(Board's Rules 208 and 211.)913. Head clerks and librarians and accountants.
- Head clerks, librarians and account are ordinarily required only to execute a security bond for good and honest conduct for a sum of Rs. 250, actual money deposit being required, The forms of bond to be used under this rule are given in Appendices O. P, and Q. of the Board's Miscellaneous Rules.Note. - Head Clerk-cum-Accountant appointed in the office of the District Superintendent of Education is required to execute a security bond for a sum of Rs. 500 only.(G. O. no. 1436, dated the 22nd March, 1955.)914. Statement of securities.
- A statement of all securities taken should be maintained in the office of each controlling officer and should be kept up-to-date.(D. P. I.'s circular no. 131, dated the 22nd July, 1908.)915. Exemption from stamp duty etc.
- Security bonds executed by non-gazetted officers are exempted from the payment of stamp duty and registration fees.(Board's rule 230.)Section IIICorrespondence, Gazette Notifications, Indents and Reports and Returns916. Letters to departmental superiors.
- All official communications from a subordinate officer of the department to his controlling officer or to the Director must be addressed through his immediate superior.917. When endorsements are permissible.
- No letter to a departmental superior should take the form of an endorsement, except when a particular paper has been called for and is being forwarded.(D. P I.'s memo. no. 3092-3104, dated the 17 the March, 1913.)Note. - As a corollary to this rule all reports should be self-contained, i.e., a report should not consist merely of an enclosure and comments thereon but should give in itself a complete account of the matter on which a report has been called for.918. Cases requiring action.
- Every case requiring action, which is reported to a superior officer, should be accompanied by a definite recommendation from the forwarding officer. Proposals arising out of discussions at conferences and meetings should be carefully scrutinised with regard to the rules of the department before submission, to the Director for orders, in all such cases, the forwarding officer should record his own opinion and should submit a statement of the grounds on which the proposal is made.(D. P. I.'s memo no. 3292-3104, dated the 17th March, 1913; and circular no. 47, dated the 20th March, 1919.)919. Reminders.
- Any reminder sent by a subordinate officer should be in the form of an enquiry whether any orders have been passed on the previous letter. Except in case of urgency, such reminders should not be sent until ample time has been given for a reply.(D. P. I.'s memo. no. 3092-3104, dated the 17th March, 1913.)920. Demi-official correspondence.
- No reference to demi-official correspondence should be made in official letters. All demi-official correspondence should be treated as urgent.(D. P. I.'s memo. no. 3092-3104, dated the 17th March, 1913.)921. Requests for sanction to proposals.
- When sanction is sought to any proposal or expenditure, the rule or special order requiring such should be quoted.(D. P. I.'s memo. no. 3092-3104, dated the 17th March, 1913.)922. Proposals contrary to existing rules.
- When a proposal which is contrary to the existing rules or orders is made, this fact should be specially mentioned in the letter, together with the reasons for deviating from existing rules.(D. P I.'s memo. no. 3092-3104, dated the 17th March, 1913.)923. Bills and returns.
- It is unnecessary to send any covering letter with bills and returns.(D. P. I.'s memo. no. 3092-3104, dated the 17th March, 1913.)924. Reference to previous correspondence.
- Reference to previous correspondence should always be given when an old proposal is renewed.(D. P., I.'s memo. no. 3092-3104, dated the 17th March, 1913.)925. File and issue numbers.
- The file number of a letter issued should always be given below the issue number, and in reply to any letter so numbered the file number should be quoted as well as the issue number.(D. P. I.'s memo. no. 3092-3104, dated the 17th March, 1913.)926. Reference to different subjects in one letter.
- Reference to different subjects should not be included in one communication.927. Communication from students and pupils.
- Any communication received from any student or pupil of an educational institution in the State which has not been sent through the head of that institution should at once be returned through the Principal or Headmaster, who will treat the case as a breach of discipline. Communications received from parents or guardians must invariably receive consideration.(D. P. I.'s memo. no. 3092-3104. dated the 17th March, 1913.)928. Gazette notices.
- The following is a list of the educational officers authorised to publish notices in the Bihar Gazette without reference to higher authority :-| Designation of officers. | Kinds of notice. | |
| 1. | The Director | All kinds. |
| 2. | Regional Deputy Director of Education. | |
| 3. | District Education Officer | (i) Lists of the recognised Middleschools in his jurisdiction.(ii) Notices regarding the award of upper primary and middlescholarships. |
| 4. | Principals of Government Professional Colleges. | Notices regarding (i) Opening of sessions and (ii) Vacanciesfor students. |
| 5. | Secretary, Board of Sanskrit Education | Notices with reference to recognised examination held underthe control of the Board. |
| 6. | Secretary to the Madrasa Examination Board. | Notices with reference to recognised examinations held underthe control of the Board. |
| 7. | Secretary to the Bihar Basic Education Board. | Notices with reference to recognised examinations held underthe control of the Board. |
| 8. | All Appointing Officers. | Notices regarding vacancies which under the orders ofGovernment have to be advertised in the Gazette. |
929. Submission of indents.
- Indents for all standard educational forms required for the ensuing calendar year must be forwarded to the Deputy Superintendent of Government Printing at Gaya, on the prescribed dates [vide Appendix II (A) of the "Rules for the supply and custody of printed forms"] by officers empowered to indent. An explanation should invariably be given for any delay in submitting indents. Indents shall be prepared in duplicate, one copy being retained in indenting office and the other being submitted to the Deputy Superintendent for compliance.(G. O. no, 1341-F., dated the 28th January, 1915.)930. Kinds of indents.
- Indents are of three kinds-931. Custody and stock-taking of forms.
- Space would be specially set apart for the storage of forms and on receipt they should be arranged under lock and key. Indenting officers should, by standing orders, prescribe under which forms shall be issued for consumption in their offices. No forms shall be issued without immediate entry in the Register, that no form shall be issued except under proper authority and that no supply of forms of any kind in excess of the anticipated requirements of one month or much shorter period as may be fixed shall be issued at one time. An account shall be kept of all forms received and issued. As all forms come into or leave the store, their receipt and issue shall be promptly recorded in the Register.(Rules for the Supply and Custody of Printed Forms.)932. Officers empowered to indent.
- All officers immediately subordinate to the Director, the Regional Deputy Director of Education; the Headmasters and Principals of Government High/Higher Secondary and Multipurpose Schools; the District Education Officer; District Superintendent of Education; the Sub-divisional Educational Officer; Inspectress of Schools; the District Inspectress of Schools and Principals of Government Professional Colleges, etc., are empowered to submit indents for forms direct to the Deputy Superintendent of Government Printing, Gaya. Other officers should submit their indents through the officers to whom they are immediately subordinate.(Rules for the Supply and Custody of Forms. Appendix II (A); D. P. I.'s circular no. 47, dated the 20th November 1914; G. O. no. 6923-F., dated the 20th May 1927; G. O. no. 301, dated the 17th March, 1959 and G. O. no. 4355, dated the 24th November, 1958.)933. Non-standard forms.
- All applications for the printing of non-standard form must be submitted to the Director in the prescribed form and in accordance with the prescribed rules. If the Director decides to support the applications, he will refer them to the Government in the Finance Department.(G. O. no. 8873-F., dated the 22nd June 1917; no. 15708-F., dated the 17th November 1917; no. 4672-F., dated the 8th June, 1923 and item no. 31 of Appendix 5 of the Bihar Financial Rule, Volume II.)Note. - Other detailed instructions regarding the submission of indents will be found in the "Rules for the Supply and Custody of Printed Forms".934. Purchase of articles of stationery.
- All stationery stores required for use in Government offices and institutions should be obtained by indent from the Superintendent, Government Printing. Local purchases are strictly forbidden. The Director; Deputy Directress; Regional Deputy Director of Education; Inspectress of Schools, Bihar and Principals of Government Colleges are authorities to sanction petty purchase of articles of stationery to which they are entitled up to a limit of ten per cent of their allotment or Rs. 50 during a year whichever is less, provided that the want of such articles could not have been foreseen and included in their annual indents or that they are so urgently required that public interest will suffer by the delay involved in indenting for and waiting for a supply from the stationery office.(The Bihar, Stationery Manual.)935. Form of annual indent.
- Annual indent for stationery shall be prepared in stationery form no. 3 given in the Bihar Stationery Manual. Indents for stationery need not be sent in duplicate but an office copy shall be kept by the indenting officer. Indents must be filled in clearly and be complete in all details. Indents in which there are material defects are returned by the Superintendent. Such material defects include the following :-936. Supplementary indents.
- Supplementary indents should, as a rule, be avoided. In rare instances, where such indents are found absolutely necessary on account of unforeseen demands arising subsequent to the submission of the annual indents, the submission of one supplementary indent is allowed. The officer making such an indent shall furnish full explanation of the necessity for it and of his failure to make proper provision in his annual indent. Supplementary indents should be made in stationery form no. 4 given in the Bihar Stationery Manual which is a standard form.(The Bihar Stationery Manual.)937. Custody and issue of stationery articles.
- Stores received from the Stationery Office shall be properly arranged and placed in the custody of a responsible officer. Supplies from stock should be made only on indents signed by the heads of the sections who should see that there is no misuse of Government stationery.(The Bihar Stationery Manual.)938. Stock book of stationery.
- Two stock books shall be maintained in every office, one for articles issued very frequently and the other for articles which are only periodically or occasionally issued. This book should be kept in form no. 7 given in Appendix VII in the Bihar Stationery Manual and new books shall be opened only when the old ones have been completely used up.(The Bihar Stationery Manual.)939. Verification of stock in offices.
- Every supply of stationery shall immediately on receipt, be entered into the proper stock and issues therefrom regularly posted, i.e., each time a requisition is complied with or a fresh supply is received and entry of the issue of receipt shall immediately be made in the stock-book concerned. The balance in hand should be struck off at the end of each month and the stock-book shall be examined and initialled by the head of the office or other gazetted subordinates at the beginning of every following month.(The Bihar Stationery Manual.)940. Book credit for stationery.
- Book credit is placed by Government at the disposal of the Director each year. This lump credit is distributed by him among subordinate indenting officers, who will be supplied with stationery up to the limit of their book-credit.(B. C. circular no 8-T. Mis., dated the 26th May, 1911; The Bihar Stationery Manual.)941. Dates for the submission of indents.
- All indents for stationery must be submitted by indenting officer to the Director before the 1st July in each year. After having been checked these are forwarded to the Superintendent of Government Printing before the 31st August; the Stationery Office will supply the articles of stationery by the 31st October, and these shall be brought into use from the 15th November to the 31st October.(The Bihar Stationery Manual.)942. Method of submitting indent.
- Each indenting officer must show the value of the stationery ordered according to the annual priced catalogue issued by the Superintendent of Government Printing.(D. P. I.'s circular no. 2, dated the 28th January, 1927 and the Bihar Stationery Manual.)943. Cost of all indents to be shown.
- Each indent must show the value of the stationery ordered according to the annual priced catalogue issued by the Superintendent of Government Printing.(D. P. I.'s circular no. 2, dated the 28th January 1927; and the Bihar Stationery Manual.)944. Typewriters and duplicators.
- Sanction to the purchase of typewriters and duplicators should be applied for separately, and such items should be excluded from the annual indent.(D. P. I.'s circular no. 2, dated the 28th January, 1927 and the Bihar Stationery Manual.)945. Rubber-stamps.
- Rubber-stamps and ink for use with them should be obtained on indent from the Superintendent of Government Printing in the same way as other articles of stationery.(D. P. I.'s circular no. 2, dated the 28th January, 1927 and the Bihar Stationery Manual.)946. Indenting officers.
- The following officers are empowered to indent for stationery :- the Director; Deputy Director of Education; Assistant Directors (Sanskrit Education) and (Islamic Education); Registrar of Examinations; Superintendents of Reformatory Schools, Hazaribagh and of Libraries; Secretaries of the Madrasa Examination Board and of Government Urdu Library and Rashtra Bhasha Parishad; Regional Deputy Director of Education; District Education Officers; Sub-divisional Education Officers; Deputy Inspectors; Inspectress of Schools, Bihar; District Inspectress of Schools; District Superintendent of Education; Principals of Government Professional Colleges; Madrasa Islamia Shamsul Huda; Teachers' Training Schools and of Patna School of Arts; Lady Principals of Government Girls' High/ Higher Secondary Schools; Curator, Patna Museum and the Directors of the Institute of Post-Graduate Studies in Arabic and Persian Learning; and Nava Nalanda Mahavihar, Nalanda; Mithila Institute of Post-Graduate Studies and Research in Sanskrit Learning, Darbhanga and K. P. Jayaswal Research Institute, Patna; Text-Book Research Institute, Patna and Rural Institute, Birauli.(D. P. I.'s circular no. 2, dated the 28th January 1927; the Bihar Stationery Manual; G. O. no. 9339-F., dated the 1st December 1924; G. O. no. 2257-F. R., dated the 18th August 1924; G. O. no. 988-F. R., dated the 23rd July, 1923 and G. O. no. 2769-F., dated the 12th February, 1929.)947. Alterations may be made in indents by the Director.
- The Director of Public Instruction may make any alterations and reductions in the indents of the officers subordinate to him which appear to him to be not justified.Note. - Other detailed rules regarding the submission of indents for stationery will be found in the Bihar Stationery Manual.948. The Annual Report on Public Instruction.
- The Director of Public Instruction's annual report on public instruction contains (a) the annual statistics of educational institutions in the State in the form of the educational statistical tables prescribed on an All-India basis by the Government of India in the Ministry of Education and supplemented by a number of appendices giving additional statistical information which the Director considers useful and likely to prove of interest, and (b) the Director's report, the structure and topics of which are from time to time fixed on an All-India basis by the Government of India in the Ministry of Education. The report should be comprehensive and should contain a critical review of developments and other suitable topics in addition to those covered by the scheme of the report outlined by the Government of India, may also be dealt with by the Director at his discretion at suitable places within the framework of the scheme prescribed by the Government of India.(G. I. letter no. FI-2/53 S-8, dated 16th March, 1955.)949. Date of submission to Government.
- The annual statistics of educational institutions and the annual report on public instruction are collected and compiled by financial year. The Government of India allow the Director seven months from the close of the financial year to collect and compile the annual statistics of educational institutions which the Director is required to furnish direct to the General Ministry of Education by the 31st October, every year. The annual report is drafted immediately after the submission of the annual statistics of educational institutions by the Director to the Government of India. A copy of the report after its approval by the State Government is furnished by the Director direct to the Government of India in the Ministry of Education. The entire report (containing the statistical tables, the appendices and the Director's report), is printed and published by the Direction under the authority of Government.950. Length of reports.
- No limit is placed on the length of the report which should be comprehensive, each item being dealt with in detail giving specific reasons in every case of increase or decrease over previous years1 figures. The progress achieved and the developments and tendencies noticed in different spheres of education should be critically reviewed. The reports of the Regional Deputy Directors of Education, District Education Officers, and Sub-divisional Education Officers should be divided into chapters similar to those into which the Director's report is divided. The reports of the District Inspectress need not be divided into chapters but should follow the lines of the section relating to the education of girls and women in the Director's report.(G. O. no. F-1-2/53-S. 8, dated the 16th March, 1955.)951. General rules to be followed in preparing reports.
- The following general rules have been laid down for guidance in preparing annual returns and reports:-| Income credited to Government account:- | Entries | ||||
| Rs. | Rs. | ||||
| Tuition fee | ... | 30,000 | From Government funds | ... | 30,000 |
| Endowments, etc. | ... | 10,000 | From fees | ... | 30,000 |
| Other sources | ... | 10,000 | From Endowments, etc. | ... | 10,000 |
| From other sources | ... | 10,000 | |||
| Total | ... | 50,000 | Total and expenditure | ... | 80,000 |
| Rs. | Rs. | |||
| Total receipts. | Total Direct Expenditure | ... | ... | 20,000 |
| Recurring grant from Government | ... | 10,000 | ||
| Recurring grant from Municipal Board | ... | 5,000 | ||
| Income from fees, fines, etc. | ... | 2,500 | 20,500 | |
| Income from endowments, etc. | ... | 1,000 | ||
| Income from other sources | ... | 2,000 | ||
| Total | ... | 20,500 | ||
| The entries would be- | Rs. | |||
| From Government funds | ... | 10,000 | ||
| From Municipal Board | ... | 5,000 | ||
| From fees and fines | ... | 2,500 | ||
| From endowments, etc. | ... | 1,000 | ||
| From other sources | ... | 1,500 | ||
| Total | ... | 20,000 |
| Rs. | ||
| From Government Fund | ... | 10,000 |
| From Municipal Board | ... | 5,000 |
| From fees | ... | 2,500 |
| From Endowments, etc. | ... | 1,500 |
| From other sources | ... | 2,000 |
| Total | ... | 21,000 |
| Name of casts or group | Area of recognition | |
| 1. | Bauri | Throughout the State |
| 2. | Bantar | do |
| 3. | Bhogta | do |
| 4. | Chamar | do |
| 5. | Chaupal | do |
| 6. | Dhobi | do |
| 7. | Dom | do |
| 8. | Dusadh (including Dhari or Dharhi) | do |
| 9. | Ghasi | do |
| 10. | Halalkhor | do |
| 11. | Hari (including Mehtar) | do |
| 12. | Kanjar | do |
| 13. | Kurariar | do |
| 14. | Lalbegi | do |
| 15. | Mochi | do |
| 16. | Musahar | do |
| 17. | Nat | do |
| 18. | Pan | do |
| 19. | Pasi | do |
| 20. | Rajwar | do |
| 21. | Turi | do |
| 22. | Bhumij | Patna and Tirhut Divisions, and the districts of Monghyr,Bhagalpur, Purnea and Palamau. |
| 23. | Bhuiya | Patna, Gaya, Shaha-bad and Palamau Districts. |
| 24. | Dabgar | Shahabad District. |
| Name of casts or group | Area of recognition | |
| 1. | Asur | Throughout the State |
| 2. | Baiga | do |
| 3. | Bathundi | do |
| 4. | Bedia | do |
| 5. | Binjhia | do |
| 6. | Birhor | do |
| 7. | Birjia | do |
| 8. | Chero | do |
| 9. | Chik Baraik | do |
| 10. | Gond | do |
| 11. | Sorait | do |
| 12. | Ho | do |
| 13. | Karmali | do |
| 14. | Kharia | do |
| 15. | Kharwar | do |
| 16. | Khond | do |
| 17. | Kisan | Throughout the State |
| 18. | Kora | do |
| 19. | Korwa | do |
| 20. | Lohara | do |
| 21. | Mahli | do |
| 22. | Mai Paharia | do |
| 23. | Munda | do |
| 24. | Oraon | do |
| 25. | Parhaiya | do |
| 26. | Santal | do |
| 27. | Sauria Paharia | do |
| 28. | Savar | do |
| 29. | Shumiji Santal Parganas, Hazaribagh, Ranchi, Purulia, Dhanbadand Singhbhum Districts. |
| Name of castes or group | Area of recognition | Name of casts or group | Area of recognition | ||
| 1. | Bari | Throughout the State | 2. | Banpar | do |
| 3. | Beldar | do | 4. | Bhathiara (Muslim) | do |
| 5. | Bherihar | do | 6. | Bhuiya | do |
| 7. | Bind | do | 8. | Chik (Muslim) | do |
| 9. | Dafali (Muslim) | do | 10. | Dhanuk | do |
| 11. | Dhunia (Muslim) | do | 12. | Gorhi (including Chhabi) | do |
| 13. | Hajjam | do | |||
| 14. | Kahar | do | 15. | Kasab (Kasai-Muslim) | do |
| 16. | Kewat (Keut) | do | 16A. | Khalik | do |
| 17. | Mali (Malakar) | do | 18. | Mallah (including Surahiya) | do |
| 19. | Madari (Muslim) | do | 20. | Miriasin (Muslim) | do |
| 21. | Nat (Muslim) | do | 22. | Noniya | do |
| 23. | Pamaria (Muslim) | do | 24. | Sheikhra | do |
| 25. | Tentis (Tatwas) | do | 26. | Turha | do |
| 27. | Aghori | Patna District. | 28. | Chain | do |
| 29. | Aghori | Gaya District. | 30. | Chain | do |
| 31. | Kalandar (in Nawada) | do | 32. | Muriari | do |
| 33. | Aghori | Sahabad District. | 34. | Chain | do |
| 35. | Korku (in Bhabua) | do | 36. | Aghori | Saran District. |
| 37. | Chain | do | 38. | Dhamin | do |
| 39. | Gandharb | do | 40. | Kalendar (in Siwan) | do |
| 41. | Khatwe | do | 42. | Aghori | Champaran District. |
| 43. | Chain | do | 44. | Dhamin | do |
| 45. | Gandharb | do | 46. | Khatwe | do |
| 47. | Mangar (Magar) | do | 48. | Tharu | do |
| 49. | Aghori | Muzaffarpur District. | 50. | Chain | do |
| 51. | Dhamin | do | 52. | Gandharb | do |
| 53. | Khatwe | do | 54. | Aghori | Darbhanga District. |
| 55. | Chain | do | 56. | Dhamin | Darbhanga District. |
| 57. | Dhimar | do | 58. | Gandharb | do |
| 59. | Khatwe | do | 60. | Medara | do |
| 61. | Bediya | Bhagalpur District. | 62. | Chain | do |
| 63. | Gandharb | do | 64. | Gangauta (Gangola) | do |
| 65. | Kadar | do | 66. | Naiya | do |
| 67. | Tiar | do | 68. | Bediya | Monghyr District. |
| 69. | Chain | do | 70. | Gangauta (Gangola) | do |
| 71. | Naiya | do | 72. | Tiar | do |
| 73. | Abdal | Purnea District. | 74. | Bediya | do |
| 75. | Chain | do | 76. | Gagai (in Kishanganj) | do |
| 77. | Gangauta (Gangola) | do | 78. | Kaibartta(in Kishanganj) | do |
| 79. | Kochh | do | 80. | Namassundra (Chandal) | do |
| 81. | Naiya | do | 82. | Tiar | do |
| 83. | Banjara | Santal Parganas District. | 84. | Bediya | do |
| 85. | Chain | do | 86. | Chapota | do |
| 87. | Dhekaru (in Dumka) | do | 88. | Gangauta (Gangola) | do |
| 89. | Jadupatia | do | 90. | Kadar | do |
| 91. | Khelta | do | 92. | Konai | do |
| 93. | Kumarbhag | do | 94. | Paharia (in Rajmahal and Pakur) | do |
| 95. | Markande | do | 96. | Muriari | do |
| 97. | Naiya | do | 98. | Tiar | do |
| 99. | Bhar | Ranchi District. | 100. | Bhuinbar | do |
| 101. | Dhanwar | do | 102. | Gorait | do |
| 103. | Gulguiia | do | 104. | Kawar | Ranchi District. |
| 105. | Khetauri | do | 106. | Majhwar | do |
| 107. | Malar (Malhor) | do | 108. | Pradhan | do |
| 109. | Pahira | do | 110. | Pando | do |
| 111. | Pangania | do | 112. | Saunta (Sauta) | do |
| 113. | Tamaria | do | 114. | Bhar | Hazaribagh District. |
| 115. | Bhuinhar | do | 116. | Dhanwar | do |
| 117. | Gulguiia | do | 118. | Kawar | do |
| 119. | Khetauri | do | 120. | Majhwar | do |
| 121. | Malar (Malhor) | do | 122. | Pradhan | do |
| 123. | Tarnaria | do | 124. | Bagdi | Manbhum (now Dhanbad) District. |
| 125. | Bhar | do | 126. | Bhuinhar | do |
| 127. | Dhanwar | do | 128. | Gulguiia | do |
| 129. | Kaibartta | do | 130. | Kawar | do |
| 131. | Khetauri | do | 132. | Majhwar | do |
| 133. | Malar (Malhor) | do | 134. | Maulik | do |
| 135. | Pradhan | do | 136. | Pahira. | do |
| 137. | Tamaria | do | 138. | Agaria | Palamau District. |
| 139. | Bhar | do | 140. | Bhaskar | do |
| 141. | Bhunhar | do | 142. | Dbanwar | do |
| 143. | Gulguiia | do | 144. | Kawar | do |
| 145. | Khetauri | do | 146. | Majhwar | do |
| 147. | Malar (Malhor) | do | 148. | Pradba | do |
| 149. | Tamaria | do | 150. | Bhar | Singhbhum District. |
| 151. | Bhuinhar | do | 152. | Dhanwar | do |
| 153. | Gulguiia | do | 154. | Kaora | Singhbhum District. |
| 155. | Kawar | do | 156. | Khetauri | do |
| 157. | Majhwar | do | 158. | Malar (Malhor) | Singhbhum Dist. |
| 159. | Pradhan | do | 160. | Saunta (Sauta) | do |
| 161. | Tamaria. | do |
952. Detailed instructions issued annually.
- Other detailed instructions as to the filling in the different Educational Statistical Tables and College and School returns forms and other matters connected with the preparation of the report and returns are issued annually by the Director.Appendix IInspection Form for High (including Higher Secondary and Multipurpose) and Middle Schools(See Article 135)Note. - It is not necessary for every point to be noted on at the time of each visit, but the department should be in possession of adequate information in an easily accessible form concerning every recognised school on each of the points enumerated.| The Committee | |||
| 1. | (a) | How are the members appointed on the managing committee ? | |
| (b) | Is the committee regularly constituted according to latestGovernment orders ? | ||
| (c) | Is proper provision made for the continuance of the committee? | ||
| (d) | Are the rules of business satisfactory ? | ||
| (e) | Have the departmental rules regarding the tenure of office bymembers of the committee of aided school been observed ? | ||
| (f) | Have all changes that have occurred in the personnel of thecommittee received the approval of the proper authority ? | ||
| Staff | |||
| 2. | (a) | How many classes, including Sections of classes, are there;and is due provision made in respect of the number of teachersfor carrying on all the courses of instruction in which theschool is recognised ? | |
| (b) | In the case of high or higher secondary school, is the numberof graduate teachers adequate to meet the requirements of work ? | ||
| (c) | Is the tenure of service of the teachers such as to securecontinuity of work ? | ||
| (d) | If not, what are the reasons for the frequent changes ? | ||
| 3. | Are the teacher's service books and the confidentialcharacter-rolls kept up-to date ? | ||
| Size of classes | |||
| 4. | (a) | Are more than 50 pupils taught at the same time in classesXI-VI or any section thereof ? | |
| (b) | Are more than 40 pupils taught at the same time in class V orany lower class or any section thereof ? | ||
| Registers | |||
| 5. | Are all the registers mentioned in article of the Codeproperly maintained? | ||
| 6. | Is the method of keeping correspondency etc., satisfactory ? | ||
| 7. | Are transfer certificates always required from boys joiningthe school and granted to those leaving it ? Are the transfercertificates of boys joining the school properly filed? | ||
| 8. | Are there any records as to the ages of the pupils, and iscare taken to ascertain their correct ages ? | ||
| Departmental Rules | |||
| 9. | Are the transfer rules observed ? | ||
| 10. | Are the rules regarding free-studentships observed ? | ||
| 11. | Are the departmental circulars observed ? | ||
| 12. | If the schools receives a grant-in-aid, are copies of theforms kept ? | ||
| Courses of study and apparatus | |||
| 13. | Is the departmental syllabus followed ? If not, in whatrespects is it not followed ? | ||
| 14. | Are science subjects taught up to the secondary schoolexamination or higher secondary school examination standard ? Ifso, is the apparatus for teaching them adequate ? | ||
| 15. | Is the apparatus required for teaching other subjects adequateand in good condition ? Is there a garden for the study of plantlife ? Has any provision been made for the study of generalscience and a laboratory equipped for the purpose ? | ||
| 16. | Are the furniture, black-boards and other apparatus properlyplaced in the classroom ? | ||
| 17. | (a) | Have the pupils necessary text-books, atlases, geometricalinstruments, etc. ? | |
| (b) | Are assessment records by the pupils, class teachers and theheadmaster being maintained properly according to the recentdepartmental instructions ? | ||
| 18. | Is the system of accounts satisfactory ? Are they kept by theclerk, checked by the Headmaster, or principal and auditedregularly by a member of the managing committee ? | ||
| 19. | Have the receipts and disbursements for past financial yearbeen entered under the prescribed separate heads ? | ||
| 20. | Are payments made promptly ? Have the teachers andscholarship-holders been paid up-to-date ? | ||
| 21. | Is the teachers' acquittance roll correctly kept ? Arereceipts for sums above Rs. 20 properly stamped ? | ||
| 22. | Are separate accounts kept for the library and prize andathletic funds ? | ||
| 23. | Are the balances of the different school funds deposited inthe savings bank in the joint names of the secretary and theheadmaster ? | ||
| 24. | Are the subscription lists, if any, properly kept ? Are thedates of receipts shown ? | ||
| 25. | In the case of aided schools, has the standard scale ofexpenditure been maintained or exceeded ? | ||
| 26. | How do the fee rates compare with the standard scale ? | ||
| Headmaster's or Principal's inspections | |||
| 27. | How many hours in the week does the headmaster or principalteach ? Has he sufficient time for supervision ? | ||
| 28. | Does the headmaster or principal keep notes of his periodicalinspections of the work done in the school ? | ||
| Promotions | |||
| 29. | Is the system followed in promoting pupils from class to classsatisfactory? Is the whole record of the pupils for the yearconsidered ? | ||
| Building and Sanitation | |||
| 30. | Is the building suited to the purposes of a school ? Is it ingood repair ? | ||
| 31. | Are the site and the sanitary condition of the schoolsurroundings satisfactory ? | ||
| 32. | Are ,there any open drains etc., near and if so, are theylooked after ? | ||
| 33. | Are the school sanitary arrangements sufficient and properlykept ? Are latrines provided on the scale of 2 per cent andurinals on that of 4 per cent ? | ||
| 34. | Is the supply of drinking water satisfactory ? | ||
| 35. | Is there a separate class-room for each teacher ? | ||
| 36. | Is accommodation provided on the scale of 10 square feet foreach student in the classrooms ? | ||
| 37. | Are the rooms of such a shape that suitable desks can be used? | ||
| 38. | Is there sufficient light and ventilation ? | ||
| 39. | Are the seats arranged so that the teacher can see all theboys and approach them behind their seats to see their exercises? | ||
| 40. | Does the light come from the left side of the pupils ? | ||
| 41. | Is there a students' meeting hall ? | ||
| 42. | Has the headmaster or principal separate office-room ? | ||
| 43. | Are there sufficient playgrounds for both the senior andjunior pupils ? Are they close to the school ? | ||
| Library | |||
| 44. | Is the library accessible to the students ? | ||
| 45. | Is the library allowance always spent ? | ||
| 46. | Is there a school reference library, a staff library ? Arethere class libraries ? In what subjects are these libraries weak? | ||
| 47. | Is there a proper catalogue for the library ? Are thereseparate issue-books for teachers and students ? | ||
| 48. | Are the library books sufficiently used by-(a) The masters?(b) The boys ? | ||
| 49. | Are the library books used by outsiders ? Hostels, Messes andStudents' residences. | ||
| 50. | What hostels or messes are there connected with the school ?Is there a resident superintendent or assistant superintendent ineach hostel ? | ||
| 51. | Has each boarder 60 square feet of floor space or 40 squarefeet in large dormitories? | ||
| 52. | Does any room in the hostel contain only two boarders ? | ||
| 53. | Is there a common room in each hostel ? | ||
| 54. | Are latrines and urinals provided on the scale of 8 and 3 percent respectively ? | ||
| 55. | Does the headmaster or principal exercise any supervision overthe hostel or mess ? Are these institutions inspected ? | ||
| 56. | Are adequate arrangements made to ascertain that therecognised guardians are suitable persons to look after theirwards ? | ||
| Discipline | |||
| 57. | Are progress reports regularly Issued ? | ||
| 58. | Is discipline satisfactorily maintained in the school, in thehostel ? | ||
| 59. | What are the usual punishments inflicted ? | ||
| 60. | (a) | Is there a code of rules for the school, for the hostel ? | |
| (b) | Has the school made any provision for self-government in theschool ? | ||
| Class work | |||
| 61. | Is there any system of tutorial assistance within the school ? | ||
| 62. | Have the due portions of the work to be done, or of the booksto be read in class, been duly and properly taught ? | ||
| 63. | Do the teachers keep note-books on the subjects which theyteach ? Are the notes for the several lessons clearly dated ? | ||
| 64. | Is sufficient attention given throughout the school to writtenexercises? Are the exercise books tidy, of satisfactory quality,sufficiently uniform and carefully corrected ? | ||
| 65. | Is the use of keys and cram-books effectively discouraged ? | ||
| 66. | What are the chief defects in the teaching ? | ||
| Teachers' association | |||
| 67. | Has a teachers' association been formed ? If so, how manymeetings have been held during the year ? | ||
| Games and recreations | |||
| 68. | What games are played? Are they carefully organised ? Whosupervises them ? | ||
| 69. | Are there any clubs or associations connected with the school? If so, what is their object and are they properly controlled ?In what other activities do pupils engage in their spare time? | ||
| 70. | Has the school an A.C.C. or N.C.C. unit ? If so, are theyworking efficiently ? | ||
| 71. | What other schools of the same standard exist in theneighbourhood ? | ||
| 72. | Is the existence of the school advantageous to the interest ofeducation and discipline ? | ||
| 73. | Should the school continue to be recognised ? | ||
| Further notes | |||
| 74. | Any further remarks which the inspecting officer may deemnecessary. |
1. Brief history of the school
2. Its exact location (P. S., Subdivision, Block or Anchal).
3. When was the schools last inspected ? What were the recommendations and whether they have been implemented ?
4. Building accommodation available in the school or the hostel to be indicated.
5. Quarters for headmaster and teachers.
6. Management - Has the school a committee to manage ? If so, its Constitution to be indicated.
7. Land - The area of land in which the school building stands-whether donated by the people or purchased by Government ?
8. Enrolment - Figure for regular boys grade-wise.
9. Equipment - Government grant so far given for the purchase of equipment. Brief description of these equipments (charts, models and other teaching devices).
10. Library - (a) Total no. of books in the library indicating the total cost subject-wise.
11. Syllabus - (a) Has it been properly implemented ? Difficulties, if any, in effectively following the syllabus.
12. Method of teaching and assessment. The main feature of these to be indicated, alongwith difficulties, if any, so far experienced.
13. Staff - Is the school adequately staffed and commensurate with enrolment ? If vacancies exist, what action has been taken to fill them up ?
14. Craft - (a) The crafts (principal and subsidiary) to be indicated.
15. Co-curricular activities - The number and type of these activities and the way in which they have been organised to be indicated.
16. Social service and community uplift - The work so far done by teachers and boys to be indicated quoting facts and figures.
17. Examination - The percentage of passes at the final examination for the last three years.
18. Orientation towards Basic pattern - What specific measurement has been taken in the school to orientate teachers towards the basic pattern (difficulties, if any, to be Indicated).
19. Special problems or difficulties which have yet to be overcome.
Appendix IIIInspection Form for Primary Schools(See Article 135)1. Is the school managed or aided ?
2. In what sort of building is the school held ? Are repairs necessary ? What is the size of each room ?
3. Is there any compound ? Is there adequate gardening ? If so, how much ?
4. Upto what date have the teachers been paid ? Has there been any undue delay in payment ? Are they paid at the prescribed rates ?
5. Is the attendance register properly kept ?
6. Is there an admission book and is it kept in the proper form ?
7. Are the rules for the admission and withdrawal of pupils in primary schools (Articles 259-265 of the Code) observed ?
8. Is there any restriction on the admission of new pupils to class I.
9. (a) Is the number of teachers adequate ? What is the average number of pupils per teacher ?
10. Are more than 40 boys taught by any teacher at the same time ?
11. Are any of the pupils seated on high seats without backs? If so, have you explained how these can be converted into low single desks, the pupils then to sit on a piece of matting on the floors ?
12. Are the pupils seated close together in the class-rooms or are they separated as far as possible, so that individual work can be expected ?
13. Are there the necessary teaching appliances in the schools ? Are there any home-made devices ?
14. Has each class a black-board ?
15. What devices are used for the concrete teaching of arithmetic ?
16. Is reading taught in class I by old fashioned alphabetic methods ? If not, what improved method is followed ?
17. What kinds of hand-work craft are taught in the school? If none is taught, what suggestions have you offered to the teacher ?
18. Is there a satisfactory school garden ? If so, for what purpose is it used ? If not, why is there no garden ?
19. Are there time-tables for each class? If so, are they defective in any respect ? If there are no time-tables, have you given the necessary instructions ?
20. Is there in the time-table any provision for play in the lowest classes and games and physical training in the upper classes ? Do the teachers arrange and supervise the play and games of the pupils ? Is there a sand-patch or a swing or a see-saw in the compound ?
21. Is composition satisfactorily taught in the upper classes, i.e., is correct language insisted on and are the subjects judiciously chosen ? Are the pupils encouraged to express their own ideas ?
22. Are the pupils of class I provided with slates and those of class II and the higher classes with a separate copy book for each subject ?
23. Is the system followed in promoting boys from class to class satisfactory ?
24. Is there a disproportionate number of boys in the lower,classes ? If so, what is the explanation of this ?
25. Is the school making any contribution to literacy, i.e., does a fair proportion of pupils complete the lower primary course each year ?
26. Does the head teacher supervise or take part in teaching class I ?
27. Do the hours, during which school is held, suit the convenience of the parents ?
28. Has any attempt been made by the teachers to relieve the monotony of the bare walls by pictures, charts, diagrams, etc. ?
29. Are the children happy at school ? Do they come voluntarily or merely because they are sent ?
30. Is there a community centre or sub-centre attached to the school ?
31. Is there a local committee for the school ? Does it function properly ?
Appendix III-APrimary School Periodical Statement Form(See Article 135)4. A report of work done from..........to..........in the.........Upper Primary/Lower Primary School.
1. Name, qualification and pay of the teachers, date up to which paid (with details of total salary and dearness allowance), submission of the last report.
2. Number of pupils on the roll class by class.
3. Number of pupils on the roll class by class on the corresponding date last year.
4. Annual or six-monthly examination/assessment results.
5. Number of admissions and withdrawals since the beginning of the year class by class.
6. What devices are used for the concrete teaching of arithmetic ?
7. Are the pupils of class I provided with states and those of the other classes with separate copy-books for each subject ?
8. What teaching devices (illustrative material) have been prepared by the teacher ?
9. Does the head teacher take part in the teaching work of class I ?
10. Equipment and apparatus ...
11. Condition of school house ...
12. Details of progress made in ...
| Class | Arithmetic and Geometry | Language and Literature | Social studies | Practical work | General science | Physical training and Games | Drawing and Music |
| 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 |
| Class I | |||||||
| Class II | |||||||
| Class III | |||||||
| Class IV | |||||||
| Class V |
1. Date of inspection
2. Name of the office inspected
3. Date of last inspection and by whom
4. Name, qualifications and date of posting of the present officer in that office.
5. Whether he has passed the Departmental Examination ?
6. Whether passed the Tribal Language Examination, if necessary ?
7. Ministerial staff - No., name and date of posting of each of the ministerial staff.
Whether the staff in the office is adequate ? If inadequate, state requirements with grounds.8. Accommodation - What is the area of the floor-space of the office ? Is accommo-dation sufficient ? Does the building require extension/repairs/renovation ?
9. Tour days - How many days have been spent on Tour outside the headquarters and how many nighthalts made ? Do they conform to the minimum requirements ?
10. Inspection work - Is the target of inspection work for the particular or previous year complete ? Whether compliance reports called for perusal ? (Comments on the quality and quantity of inspection done.)
11. Correspondence - Is the correspondence prompt? Number of letters pending for more than one month.
12. Maps showing schools - Is district/subdivision/circle map showing location and up-to-date posting of schools maintained in the office ?
13. Schools proposed in the Education Survey - Has the office maintained a list of schools of which he is directly incharge to be opened according to education survey ?
14. Interviews of parents, guardians and managers of schools - In how many schools did the officer arrange interviews with members of the managing committee, parents and guardians ? What steps were taken to increase enrolment and ensure regular attendance (in primary and middle schools) ?
15. Progress of Development Schemes - Has progress of various projects and schemes under the direct charge of the officer been maintained ? Is there progress clearly ?
16. Scholarship - Has the scholarship examination been conducted properly and havethe awards been made in time ?
17. Selection and deputation of candidates or teachers for training - Has selection and deputation of candidates/teachers for training been made in time and judiciously ?
18. Records - Are the records maintained properly and methodically, i.e., is it possible to get at any correspondence with minimum of delay ?
19. Accounts - General impression of how accurately and methodically the accounts have been maintained should be noted. Have any irregularities been noticed in the past. If so, have they been remedied ?
20. Appointments - Have appointments, if any, been made properly ? Has the roster for permanent and temporary appointments of scheduled castes/backward tribes been maintained ? (Vide D.P.I.'s circular no. 3263, dated 27th August, 1959.)
21. Records to be produced for inspection :-
1. Short Title and Definitions. - (1) These rules may be called the Provident Fund Rules for aided schools in Bihar.
2. In these rules unless there is anything repugnant in the subject or context:-
3. Constitution and management of the fund. - (1) The fund shall be administered by the State Government and shall be maintained in rupees.
4.
5. No proposal for alterations or additions to these rules affecting the rights and interest of those subscribers who have accounts at the time of such proposal shall be considered by the State Government without previous notice of such proposed alterations, additions being given to the subscribers.
6. Nothing in these rules, shall, debar a Managing Committee from making additional provision for those of its employees who have served the school for 26 years, or more.
7. Nomination. - (1) The Managing Committee shall, as soon as, may be, require every subscriber to make a nomination conferring the right to receive the amount that may stand to his credit in the fund in the event of his death before quitting the service. The form of nomination shall be signed by the subscriber in the presence of two members of the teaching staff of the school, who shall attest his signature. The form of nomination shall be retained in safe custody by the secretary to the Managing Committee, who shall give a receipt therefor.
8. Conditions and Rates of subscriptions. - (1) Every subscriber shall subscribe monthly to the fund when on duty.
9. The amount of the subscription shall be-
one anna [6 paise] for each complete rupee of the subscriber's salary.Voluntary subscriptions in excess of these limits shall not be permissible. The subscription of a subscriber on leave shall be calculated on his salary and not on his leave allowance. A teacher suspended from duty shall be required to subscribe at his usual rate if he receives pay for the period of his suspension.10. Realisation of subscriptions. - Recovery of subscriptions, on account of the salary and of advances shall be made by the managing committee from every monthly salary bill presented and the net salary only shall be paid to the subscriber.
11. Contribution by the managing committee. - (1) The managing committee shall make a contribution monthly out of the school funds to the account of each subscriber. Failure to contribute shall involve forfeiture of the Government grant.
12. Contribution by the State Government. - The State Government shall contribute to the fund. This contribution shall be paid when the final payment to a subscriber becomes due and shall be equal to one-third of the sum standing at the subscriber's credit on the date. If any balance is outstanding of any advance paid, the balance shall be deemed for this purpose to be part of the sum standing at the subscriber's credit.
13. Investment. - (1) The amount of the subscriptions realized from each subscriber and the contributions made by the managing committee shall be paid to the local postmaster for credit to a post office savings bank account to be opened on behalf of the said subscriber, such remittances being made whenever possible between the 1st and 5th day of each month in order that interest may accrue for the month of the deposit. The money shall be sent by the head teacher and a certificate signed by him that the subscriptions and contributions due in respect of the pay for any month have been paid shall be attached to the next grant-in-aid bill submitted. The head teacher shall send with the money to the post office savings bank the different pass books concerned and a statement in the following form :-
Name of the institution.............Month of.| Account no. as in the pass book. | Name of subscriber. | Monthly pay of subscriber. | His subscription. | Managing committee's contribution. | Amount of advance refunded. | Total. |
| 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 |
| Rs. | Rs. | Rs. | Rs. | Rs. | ||
| Total |
14. Advance from the fund. - (1) Provided that in no case shall the balance at the credit of a subscriber be reduced below Rs. 50, a temporary advance, not ordinarily exceeding three months' pay or half the sum at his credit, whichever is less, may with the sanction of the controlling authority be granted to a subscriber from the amount standing to his credit in the fund for the following and other similar purposes :-
(a)to pay expenses incurred in connection with the subscriber's illness, or that of a member of his family or other dependent as defined in rule 2(viii);(b)to pay expenses in connection with marriages, funerals, or other ceremonies which by the religion of the subscriber it is incumbent upon him to perform and in connection with which it is obligatory that expenditure should be incurred.15.
16. Circumstances in which accumulations are payable. - Subject to any deduction made under rule 18, the amount payable to a subscriber shall be determined by the following rules :-
17. Subject to any deduction made under rule 18, on the death of a subscriber before quitting the service :-
(i)When the subscriber leaves a family-(a)if a nomination made by the subscriber in accordance with the provisions of rule 7(2) in favour of a member or members of his family or other dependent subsists, the amount standing to his credit in the fund, or the part thereof to which the nomination relates, shall become payable to his nominee, or nominees in the proportion specified in the nomination;(b)if no such nomination in favour of a member or members of the family or other dependents of the subscriber subsists, or if such nomination relates only to a part of the amount standing to his credit in the fund, the whole amount or the part thereof to which the nomination does not relate, as the case may be, shall, notwithstanding any nomination purporting to be in favour of any person or persons other than a member or members of his family, or other dependent, become payable to the members of his family in equal shares;Provided that no share shall be payable to-18. Deductions. - Subject to the condition that no deduction may be made which reduces the sum at the subscriber's credit by more than the amount of the contribution by the managing committee, with interest thereon, the controlling authority may deduct from the amount standing to the credit of a subscriber, when that amount becomes payable, any amount due under a liability incurred by him to the Managing Committee.
19. Payment. - (1) When the amount standing to the credit of a subscriber in the fund, or the balance thereof after any deduction under rule 18, becomes payable, it shall be the duty of the controlling authority, after satisfying himself. When no such deduction has been directed under that rule, that no deduction is to be made, to make payment as provided in these rules and in section 4 of the Provident Funds Act, 1925.
20. Procedure for payment. - The procedure to be followed for making payment shall be as follows:-
21. The pass book of every subscriber shall be shown to him not later than the last week of February in each year. He shall, within one month of being shown the pass book, certify in writing as to the correctness thereof. If he fails to do so within the period thus allowed, he shall have no right to challenge the correctness of the account at any later date.
22. All deposits relating to the fund shall stand in the joint names of the subscriber and of the controlling authority.
First ScheduleRule 7(2)Forms of nomination when subscriber has a familyI, hereby direct that the amount at my credit in the Provident Fund for aided schools in Bihar at the time of my death shall be distributed among the members of my family and other dependents mentioned below in the manner shown against their names.| Name and address of the nominee or nominees. | Relationship with the subscriber. | Age of the nominee. | Amount or share of accumulation. |
| 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 |
| Name and address of the nominee or nominees. | Relationship with the subscriber. | Age of the nominee. | Amount or share of accumulation. |
| 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 |
| Signed, sealed and delivered by............ Collector of thedistrict of............for and on behalf of the Governor ofBihar, in the presence of | Collector |
| Witness............... | (1)............................. |
| (2)............................. | |
| Signed, sealed and delivered by the above-named schoolauthority in the presence of | School authority. |
| Witness............... | (1)............................. |
| (2)............................. |
2. Now, therefore, we the undersigned, being the...............the said school and hereinbefore and hereinafter called the school authority, which term shall be taken to include also our successors in office, heirs, representatives and assigns, in consideration of the said grant do hereby agree that we and our successors in office, heirs, representatives and assigns shall, for a period of twenty years from the date on which the said grant shall be paid to us, be bound by the conditions which are hereinafter set forth below.
3. And we the said school authority do hereby further agree that if at any time within a period of one year from the date on which any grant is actually paid to the school authority for the abovementioned purpose, any of the said conditions shall be broken or cease to be performed or observed or if the said school authority shall fail to remedy within the time allotted by him or any extension thereof granted by him any remediable defect on demand by the Director of Public Instruction to have such defect remedied, the school authority shall be liable on demand by the said Director of Public Instruction to repay to the Governor the whole of such grant.
4. And we the said school authority do hereby further agree that if at any time during the aforesaid period of twenty years and after the lapse of one year from the aforesaid date any of the said conditions shall be broken or cease to be performed or observed as aforesaid or if the said school authority shall fail to remedy within the time allotted by him or any extension thereof granted by him, any remediable defect on demand by the Director of Public Instruction to have such defect remedied as aforesaid, then the school authority shall be liable on demand as aforesaid to repay only so much of the said grant as remains after deducting therefrom in respect of each completed year between the date of such grant and the date on which such condition was broken or ceased to be performed or observed or a demand was made (whichever of these is the earlier) a sum equal to one-twentieth of the said grant:
Provided that after the expiration of a period of twenty years from the date on which any grant is paid to the school authority for the abovementioned purpose, this agreement shall terminate and the obligations herein imposed on the said school authority shall cease and be determined:Some provided (further) that the said school authority shall be bound even after the expiration of the said period of twenty years to repay to the Governor on demand and the Director of Public Instruction as aforesaid such sum as became payable before the expiration of the said period under the provisions contained in paragraphs 3 and 4 of this agreement.5. And we the said school authority further agree that in the event of a dispute as to whether there has been a breach of any of the said conditions or as to whether a defect has been remedied, the dispute shall be referred to the State Government whose decision shall be final.
Conditions| Witness- | (1)................................... | |
| (2)................................... |
| Witness- | (1)................................... | |
| (2)................................... |
| Signed by- | School Authority | |
| In the presence of witnesses:- | ||
| (1)................................... | ||
| (2)................................... | ||
| Signed by:- | Teacher | |
| In the presence of witnesses:- | ||
| (1) .................................. | ||
| (2) .................................. |